Psion Teklogix PDAs Smartphones 8100107B User Manual

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held

Computer With

Windows Mobile 5.0

User Manual

December 11, 2006

Part No. 8100107.A

ISO 9001 Certified

Quality Management System

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Teklogix Inc.,

is issued in strict confidence, and is not to be reproduced or copied, in whole or in

part, except for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Teklogix manufactured

goods and services. Furthermore, this document is not to be used as a basis for

design, manufacture, or sub-contract, or in any manner detrimental to the interests

of Psion Teklogix Inc.

All trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Return-To-Factory Warranty

Psion Teklogix provides a return to factory warranty on this product for a period of

twelve (12) months in accordance with the Statement of Limited Warranty and Limi-

tation of Liability provided at www.psionteklogix.com/warranty. (If you are not

already a member of Teknet and you attempt to view this warranty, you will be asked

to register. As a member of Teknet, you’ll have access to helpful information about

your Psion Teklogix products at no charge to you.) In some regions, this warranty

may exceed this period. Please contact your local Psion Teklogix office for details.

For a list of offices, refer to Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices.

The warranty on Psion Teklogix manufactured equipment does not extend to any

product that has been tampered with, altered, or repaired by any person other than an

employee of an authorized Psion Teklogix service organization. See Psion Teklogix

terms and conditions of sale for full details.

Important:Psion Teklogix warranties begin at the date of shipment.

Service

Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its custom-

ers. For helpful information about accessing our services, please refer to the

Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices.

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive

2002/96/EC

This Product, and its accessories, comply with the requirements of the Waste Electri-

cal and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive 2002/96/EC. If your end-of-life

Psion Teklogix product or accessory carries a label as shown here, please contact

your local country representative for details on how to arrange recycling.

For a list of international subsidiaries, please go to:

www.psionteklogix.com/public.aspx?s=us&p=Contacts.

Restriction On Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2002/95/EC

What is RoHS?

The European Union has mandated that high environmental standards be met in the

design and manufacture of electronic and electrical products sold in Europe, to reduce

hazardous substances from entering the environment. The “Restriction on Hazardous

Substances Directive (RoHS)” prescribes the maximum trace levels of lead, cad-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

mium, mercury, hexavalent chromium, and flame retardants PBB and PBDE that

may be contained in a product. Only products meeting these high environmental

standards may be “placed on the market” in EU member states after July 1, 2006.

RoHS Logo

Although there is no legal requirement to mark RoHS-compliant products, Psion

Teklogix Inc. indicates its compliance with the directive as follows:

The RoHS logo located either on the back of the product or underneath the battery in

the battery compartment (or on a related accessory such as the charger or docking

station) signifies that the product is RoHS-compliant as per the EU directive. Other

than as noted below, a Psion Teklogix product that does not have an accompanying

RoHS logo signifies that it was placed on the EU market prior to July 1, 2006, and is

thereby exempt from the directive.

Note: Not all accessories or peripherals will have a RoHS logo due to physical

space limitations or as a result of their exempt status.

Disclaimer

Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate, and up-to-

date. In addition, changes are periodically added to the information herein; these

changes will be incorporated into new editions of the publication.

Psion Teklogix Inc. reserves the right to make improvements and/or changes in the

product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this document without notice, and

shall not be responsible for any damages, including but not limited to consequential

damages, caused by reliance on the material presented, including but not limited to

typographical errors.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

T ABLE OF CONTENTS

Program License Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I

Approvals And Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .XI

Chapter 1: Introduction

1.1 About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.2 Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

1.3 About The WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer . . . . . . . . . 4

1.3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

1.3.2 The WORKABOUT PRO C Hand-Held Computer . . . . . . . 8

1.3.3 The WORKABOUT PRO S Hand-Held Computer. . . . . . . . 9

1.3.4 Regulatory Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 0

Chapter 2: Basic Checkout

2.1 Preparing The WORKABOUT PRO For Operation . . . . . . . . . . .1 5

2.1.1 The Main Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 5

2.1.2 The Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 6

2.2 Turning The WORKABOUT PRO On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 6

2.2.1 Installing The Battery And Switching The Unit On. . . . . . . .1 6

2.2.2 Switching The Unit Off (Suspend) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 7

2.3 The Getting Started CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 7

2.4 Connecting The WORKABOUT PRO To A PC . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

2.4.1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync To Work With Files . . . . . . . .19

2.5 Aligning (Calibrating) The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

2.6 Resetting The WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

2.6.1 Performing A Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

2.6.2 Accessing The BooSt Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

3.1 Features Of The WORKABOUT PRO C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

3.2 Features of the WORKABOUT PRO S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3.3 The Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3.3.1 Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

3.3.2 Removing And Installing The Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . 26

3.3.3 Battery Swap Tim e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 7

3.3.4 Charging The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3.4 Switching The Hand-Held On And Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

3.5 The Keyboard s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 0

3.5.1 The WORKABOUT PRO C Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

3.5.2 The WORKABOUT PRO S Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

3.5.3 Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

3.5.4 The Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.5.5 The WORKABOUT PRO S – Accessing Alpha Keys . . . . . 35

3.5.6 The Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.6 The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.6.1 Adjusting The Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.6.2 Aligning (Calibrating) The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

3.7 Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

3.7.1 The LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

3.7.2 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

3.8 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time . . . . . . . . . . 39

3.8.1 Storing Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

3.9 Uploading Data In A Docking Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

3.10 Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

3.11 The SD/MMC Card—Adding Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

3.11.1 Inserting The Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

3.12 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

3.12.1 Caring For The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

3.12.2 Cleaning The WORKABOUT PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

4.1 Navigating In Windows Mobile 5.0 And Applications . . . . . . . . . 47

4.1.1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus . . . . . . . . . . 47

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

4.2 Windows Mobile 5.0 Desktop–Today Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 7

4.2.1 Windows Mobile 5.0 Navigation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 8

4.2.2 Today’s Date, Clock And Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 9

4.2.3 Ownership Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 1

4.2.4 E-mail Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 1

4.2.5 Task Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2

4.2.6 Calendar Of Upcoming Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 4

4.3 Start Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 7

4.3.1 Customising The Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 8

4.4 Managing Files And Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 9

4.4.1 Creating A New Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 0

4.4.2 Renaming A File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 0

4.4.3 Copying A File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 0

4.4.4 Deleting A File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 0

4.5 Using Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1

4.5.1 Pop-Up Menu s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1

4.6 The Softkey Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2

4.7 Programs–Using Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 4

4.8 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 5

4.9 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

4.10 Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 6

4.10.1 Soft Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 7

4.10.2 The Transcriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 7

4.10.3 Block Recognizer And Letter Recognizer. . . . . . . . . . . . .6 9

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

5.1 Installing The 802.11g Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 3

5.2 Configuring Y o ur Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 3

5.3 Setting Up A RA2041 Radio–Summit Client Utility . . . . . . . . . . .7 3

5.3.1 Assigning The IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 3

5.3.2 Using The SCU To Connect To The WLAN . . . . . . . . . . .74

5.4 SCU Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

5.4.1 Main Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

5.4.2 Config Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

5.4.3 Global Settings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

5.4.4 Status Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

5.4.5 Diags Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

5.5 Setting Up A RA2040 CF Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

5.5.1 Adding A New Network Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

5.5.2 Network Authentication Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

5.5.3 Deleting A Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Chapter 6: Settings

6.1 Personal Setting s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 01

6.2 App Launch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 01

6.3 Buttons Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 03

6.3.1 Up/Down Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 03

6.3.2 One Shots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 04

6.3.3 Keyboard Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 05

6.3.4 Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 07

6.3.5 Scancode Remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 08

6.3.6 Lock Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 11

6.4 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

6.4.1 Input Method Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 12

6.4.2 Options–Additional Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 16

6.5 Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

6.6 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

6.6.1 Start Menu Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 18

6.7 Owner Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

6.8 Sound & Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

6.8.1 Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 19

6.8.2 Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 19

6.9 Today Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 20

6.9.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 20

6.9.2 Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 20

6.10 System Tab Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 21

6.11 About. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

6.12 About Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

6.13 Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

6.13.1 Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

6.13.2 External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

6.13.3 Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

6.14 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

6.14.1 Choosing A Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

6.15 Clock & Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

6.16 COM Port Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

6.17 Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

6.18 GPS – Global Positioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

6.19 Manage Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

6.19.1 Trigger Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

6.20 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

6.20.1 Main Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

6.20.2 Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

6.20.3 Running Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

6.21 Power Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

6.21.1 Battery Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

6.21.2 Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

6.21.3 Battery Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

6.21.4 Card Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

6.21.5 Built-In Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

6.21.6 Suspend Threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

6.21.7 Wakeup Keys Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

6.22 Regional Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

6.23 Remove Program s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 40

6.24 Screen Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

6.25 Scanner Setting s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 41

6.25.1 Decoded (Internal) Scanners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

6.25.2 Decoded (HHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

6.25.3 Decoded (Intermec ISCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

6.25.4 Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

6.25.5 Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

6.25.6 Translations Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

6.25.7 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

6.26 Total Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

6.26.1 Creating A Backup Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

6.26.2 Restoring A Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

6.27 Connections Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

6.28 Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

6.29 Bluetooth Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 19

6.29.1 Bluetooth Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 19

6.29.2 Scanning For A New Devic e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 20

6.29.3 Bluetooth COM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 21

6.29.4 Active Connections List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 22

6.29.5 About Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 23

6.29.6 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 23

6.30 Connections – Connecting To The Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 25

6.30.1 Modem Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 26

6.31 Wireless Power Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 31

6.31.1 Flight Mode – Disabling Wireless Components . . . . . . . . .2 32

6.31.2 Setting Up A Network Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 32

6.31.3 Network Adaptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 33

6.31.4 Changing Network Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 34

6.31.5 VPN Connection Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 34

6.31.6 Managing An Existing Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 35

6.31.7 Selecting A Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 37

6.31.8 Proxy Server Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 38

6.32 Wireless Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 39

6.33 Wireless W A N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 39

6.33.1 Softkey Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 39

6.33.2 Establishing A Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

6.33.3 Disconnecting From A Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 41

6.33.4 Advanced Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 42

6.33.5 Tools Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 44

6.33.6 SMS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 52

Chapter 7: Programs

7.1 Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 59

7.2 ActiveSync®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 59

7.2.1 Synchronization Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260

7.2.2 ActiveSync Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

7.2.3 Scheduling Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

7.2.4 Connecting To The Internet With ActiveSync. . . . . . . . . .262

7.3 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

7.4 Demo Imager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

7.5 Demo Scanne r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 62

7.6 Download Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

7.7 Excel Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

7.7.1 Workbook Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

7.7.2 Adding, Deleting And Renaming Worksheets . . . . . . . . . 264

7.7.3 Entering Data In A Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

7.7.4 Working With Cells, Rows and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

7.7.5 Creating Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

7.8 File Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

7.9 Internet Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

7.10 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

7.10.1 Creating A Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

7.10.2 Converting Handwritten Notes To Tex t . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 72

7.10.3 Renaming A Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

7.10.4 Recording Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

7.10.5 Synchronizing A Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

7.11 Pictures & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

7.11.1 Moving Photos To The WORKBOUT PRO . . . . . . . . . . 277

7.11.2 Opening A Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

7.11.3 Deleting A Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

7.11.4 Editing A Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

7.11.5 Creating A Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

7.12 Pocket MS N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 78

7.12.1 Setting Up Your MSN Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

7.12.2 First-Time Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

7.12.3 Getting Starte d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 79

7.12.4 Adding Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

7.12.5 Blocking And Unblocking A Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

7.12.6 Changing Your Contact Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

7.13 Summit Client Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

7.14 Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

7.14.1 Internet Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

7.14.2 Browsing Web Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

7.15 Messaging–The Inbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

7.15.1 Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

7.15.2 Synchronizing E-mail With Outlook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

vii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

7.15.3 Changing Synchronization Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 86

7.15.4 Creating a New Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 87

7.16 Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 87

7.17 Terminal Services Clien t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 87

7.17.1 Connecting To A Terminal Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 87

7.17.2 Moving Around Terminal Services Client . . . . . . . . . . . .2 88

7.17.3 Improving Display Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 88

7.17.4 Improving Browser Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 89

7.17.5 Disconnecting Without Ending A Session . . . . . . . . . . . .2 89

7.17.6 Ending A Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289

7.18 Word Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 89

7.18.1 Creating A New Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 90

7.18.2 Data Entry Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 91

7.18.3 Sharing Documents With Your PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 91

Chapter 8: Expansion Modules

8.1 Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 95

8.1.1 Imager And Laser Scanner Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . .2 95

8.1.2 Compact Flash Radios & Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 95

8.1.3 Wide Area Network Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 95

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

9.1 Carrying Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 99

9.1.1 Attaching The Hand Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 99

9.1.2 Attaching The Pistol Grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 01

9.1.3 Protective Carrying Cas e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 02

9.1.4 Soft Shell Holster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 04

9.2 The Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 05

9.3 Chargers And Docking Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 05

9.3.1 Installation–Chargers And Docking Stations . . . . . . . . . .3 05

9.3.2 Power Consumption Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

9.3.3 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

9.3.4 Important Charger Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

9.4 Desktop Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

9.4.1 Charging A Battery Installed In The WORKABOUT PRO . . .308

9.4.2 Charging A Spare Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308

viii WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

9.4.3 Battery Charge Duration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

9.4.4 Charger LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

9.4.5 Troubleshooting The Charging Operation Of The Dock . . . . 309

9.4.6 Desktop Docking Station Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

9.4.7 Linking A WORKABOUT PRO To A PC . . . . . . . . . . . 310

9.4.8 Linking A WORKABOUT PRO To An Ethernet Network. . . 311

9.4.9 Troubleshooting The Docking Station Operations . . . . . . . 312

9.5 Single Battery Charger–Model #W A 3001-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

9.5.1 Inserting A Battery In The Single Battery Charger . . . . . . . 312

9.5.2 Battery Charge Duration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

9.5.3 Charge Indicators–The LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

9.6 Quad Battery Charger–Model #W A 3004-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

9.6.1 Charging Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

9.6.2 Battery Charge Duration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

9.6.3 Charge Indicators–The LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

9.6.4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

9.7 Quad Docking Station–Model #W A 4004-G1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

9.7.1 Quad Docking Station Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

9.7.2 Quad Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

9.7.3 Inserting A WORKABOUT In The Quad Docking Station. . . 317

9.7.4 Network Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

9.7.5 Battery Charging–LED Behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

9.7.6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

9.8 AC Wall Adaptor And Tether Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

9.9 Automotive Power Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

9.10 The V e hicle Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

9.10.1 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 322

9.10.2 Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

9.10.3 Using The Vehicle Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

9.10.4 Maintaining The Vehicle Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

9.10.5 Powered Cradle Installation In High Voltage Vehicles . . . . . 323

9.10.6 Powered Vehicle Cradle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

9.10.7 The Port Replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

9.11 Bluetooth Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

Chapter 10: Specifications

10.1 Hand-Held Computer Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 29

10.2 Radio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 31

10.3 Scanner Specification s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 32

10.3.1 SE 1223HP, LR, ALR And SE 955HP Specifications. . . . . .3 32

10.3.2 EV15 Imager Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 34

10.3.3 HHP5180 Imager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335

10.3.4 SX5393 Imager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 37

10.4 Battery Test Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 38

10.4.1 Standard Capacity–2000 mAh (Model WA3000-G1) . . . . . .3 38

10.4.2 High Capacity–3000 mAh (Model WA3006) . . . . . . . . . .3 41

10.4.3 Maxell ML2032 Rechargeable Coin Battery . . . . . . . . . .344

Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices

A.1 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

A.2 Product Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

A.3 Worldwide Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2

Appendix B: Port Pinouts

B.1 Standard Battery Contact Pin Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

B.2 High-Capacity Battery Contact Pin Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

B.2.1 Positive Female Battery Connector (2000mAh & 3000mAh) .B-2

B.3 LIF (Low Insertion Force) Port Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2

B.4 Tether Port Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3

B.5 Audio Mini-Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROGRAM LICENSE AGREEMENTS

Windows Mobile Version 5.0 EULA Terms

•

You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software licensed by Psion Teklogix Inc.

from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation (“MS”). Those installed software products of MS

origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic documentation

(“SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The

•

IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“EULA”), DO

NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT

Psion Teklogix Inc. FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S)

FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED

TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS

EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT.)

•

SOFTWARE includes software already installed on the DEVICE (“DEVICE Software”) and

MS software contained on the CD-ROM disk (“Companion CD”).

GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following license:

DEVICE Software. You may use the DEVICE Software as installed on the DEVICE.

Companion CD. A Companion CD is included with your DEVICE, and you may install and use the

Microsoft® ActiveSync® component on one (1) or more personal computers to exchange information

with one (1) or more computing devices that contain a compatible version of the Microsoft® Windows

Mobile® Version 5.0 operating system. For other software component(s) contained on the Companion

CD, you may install and use such components only in accordance with the terms of the printed or

online end user license agreement(s) provided with such component(s). In the absence of an end user

license agreement for particular component(s) of the Companion CD, you may install and use only one

(1) copy of such component(s) on the DEVICE or a single personal computer with which you use the

DEVICE.

Phone Functionality. If the DEVICE Software includes phone functionality, all or certain portions of

the DEVICE Software may be inoperable if you do not have and maintain a service account with an

appropriate wireless telecommunication carrier to whom Psion Teklogix Inc. may distribute its

DEVICES (“Mobile Operator”), or if the Mobile Operator’s network facilities are not operating or con-

figured to operate with the DEVICE.

Microsoft® Outlook®. If Microsoft Outlook is included with your Device, the following terms apply

to your use of Microsoft Outlook: (i) regardless of the information contained in the “Software Installa-

tion and Use” section of the online EULA you may install one (1) copy of Microsoft Outlook on one

(1) personal computer to use, exchange data, share data, access and interact with the DEVICE, and (ii)

the EULA for Microsoft Outlook is between Psion Teklogix Inc. and the end user – not between the PC

manufacturer and end user.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

License Agreement

Upgrade Software. Psion Teklogix Inc. is distributing the accompanying SOFTWARE in this format

exclusively for installation as an upgrade to previously distributed DEVICES preinstalled with one of

the following: 1- Microsoft® Windows Mobile® 2003 Software for Pocket PC, Professional Edition

with Microsoft Outlook® 2002: 2- Microsoft® Windows Mobile® 2003 Software for Pocket PC, Pre-

mium Edition with Microsoft Outlook® 2002: 3 – Microsoft® Windows Mobile® 2003 Software for

Pocket PC, Professional Edition; 4 – Microsoft® Windows Mobile® 2003 Software for Pocket PC,

Premium Edition; 5 – Microsoft® Windows Mobile® 2003 Software for Pocket PC, Premium with

Phone Edition (GSM/GPRS) with Microsoft Outlook® 2002; 6 – Microsoft® Windows Mobile® 2003

Software for Pocket PC, Premium with Phone Edition (GSM/GPRS); 7 – Microsoft® Windows

Mobile® 2003 Software for Pocket PC, Premium with Phone Edition (CDMA/1xRTT) with Microsoft

Outlook® 2002; and 8 – Microsoft® Windows Mobile® 2003 Software for Pocket PC, Premium with

Phone Edition (CDMA/1xRTT)

Accordingly, you may follow the applicable instructions accompanying this SOFTWARE and install

one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE on one (1) DEVICE presently containing a licensed copy of a prede-

cessor version of the SOFTWARE (unless this EULA indicates that this SOFTWARE copy has been

licensed for installation on multiple DEVICES). No representation or warranty is made by MS with

respect to the compatibility of this SOFTWARE with any DEVICE or any other existing software or

data of any kind contained on such DEVICES, and MS shall not be responsible in any regard with

respect to any loss, corruption, modification or inaccessibility of any data, applications, or other soft-

ware resulting from the installation of the SOFTWARE on any DEVICE. The media containing the

SOFTWARE shall replace the previous Recovery Image media, if any, and may be maintained by you

for recovery purposes only for the upgraded DEVICE, as provided below in this EULA under the

heading “Recovery Media”.

DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS.

•

Speech/Handwriting Recognition. If the DEVICE Software includes speech and/or handwrit-

ing recognition component(s), you should understand that speech and handwriting recognition

are inherently statistical processes and that errors can occur in the component’s recognition of

your handwriting, and the final conversion into text. Neither Psion Teklogix Inc. nor its suppli-

ers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech and handwriting recogni-

tion process.

•

Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly. You may not reverse

engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such

activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.

Single EULA. The package for the DEVICE may contain multiple versions of this EULA, such

as multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user documentation and in

the software). Even if you receive multiple versions of the EULA, you are licensed to use only

one (1) copy of the DEVICE Software.

•

NOTICE REGARDING THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD. The DEVICE Software

may include MPEG-4 visual decoding technology. MPEG LA, L.L.C. requires the following

notice:

•

USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-

6 VISUAL STANDARD IS PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE DIRECTLY RELATED

TO (A) DATA OR INFORMATION (i) GENERATED BY AND OBTAINED WITHOUT

CHARGE FROM A CONSUMER NOT THEREBY ENGAGED IN A BUSINESS

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

License Agreement

ENTERPRISE, AND (ii) FOR PERSONAL USE ONLY; AND (B) OTHER USES SPE-

CIFICALLY AND SEPARATELY LICESED BY MPEG LA, L.L.C.

•

If you have questions regarding this Notice, please contact MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 Steele

Street, Suite 300, Denver, Colorado 80206; Telephone 303 331.1880; FAX 303 331.1879

No Rental/Commercial Hosting. You may not rent, lease or lend or provide commercial host-

ing services with the SOFTWARE to others.

•

SOFTWARE as Component of the Device – Software Transfer. The DEVICE Software is

licensed with the DEVICE as a single integrated product. The DEVICE Software installed in

the read only memory (“ROM”) of the DEVICE may only be used as part of the DEVICE. Its

component parts may not be separated for use on more than one Device, unless expressly per-

mitted by this EULA. You may permanently transfer all of your rights under this EULA only as

part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the

SOFTWARE (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades,

this EULA and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to the

terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior ver-

sions of the SOFTWARE.

If the DEVICE Software includes phone functionality, you may not permanently transfer any of

your rights under this EULA with regard to the DEVICE Software or Companion CD, except

as permitted by the applicable Mobile Operator. In the event that the Mobile Operator permits

such transfer, you may permanently transfer all of your rights under this EULA only as part of a

sale or transfer of the DEVICE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFT-

WARE (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this

EULA and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to the

terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior ver-

sions of the SOFTWARE.

•

Termination. Without prejudice to any other rights, Psion Teklogix Inc. or MS may terminate

this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. In such event, you

must destroy all copies of the software and all of its component parts.

Security Updates/Digital Rights Management. Content providers are using the digital rights

management technology (“DRM”) contained in your DEVICE to protect the integrity of their

content (“Secure Content”) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in such con-

tent is not misappropriated. Ports of the DEVICE Software and third party applications such as

media players use DRM to play Secure Content (“DRM Software”). If the DRM Software’s

security has been compromised, owners of Secure Content (“Secure Content Owners”) may

request that MS block the ability of DRM license servers and personal computers to deliver

new licenses that enable an affected DEVICE to play Secure Content. This action does not alter

the DRM Software’s ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked DRM Software is

sent to your DEVICE whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or

from your personal computer. You therefore agree that MS may, in conjunction with such

license, also download revocation lists onto your DEVICE on behalf of Secure Content Own-

ers. MS will not retrieve any personally identifiable information, or any other information,

from your DEVICE by downloading such revocation lists.

•

Consent to Use of Data. You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporate, their affiliates and/or their

designated agent may collect and use technical information gathered in any manner as part of

product support services related to the SOFTWARE. MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates

and/or their designated agent may use this information solely to improve their products or to

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

III

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

License Agreement

provide customized services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates

and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that per-

sonally identifies you.

•

Internet Gaming/Update Features. If the DEVICE Software provides, and you choose to uti-

lize, the Internet gaming or update features within the DEVICE Software, it is necessary to use

certain computer system, hardware, and software information to implement the features. By

using these features, you explicitly authorize MS, Microsoft Corporation and/or their desig-

nated agent to use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized

services or technologies to you. MS or Microsoft Corporation may disclose this information to

others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.

•

Internet-Based Services Component. The DEVICE Software may contain components that

enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that

MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may automatically

check the version of the DEVICE Software and/or its components that you are utilizing and

may provide upgrades or supplements to the DEVICE Software that may be automatically

downloaded to your DEVICE.

Additional Software/Services. The DEVICE Software may permit Psion Teklogix Inc., MS

Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent to provide or make avail-

able to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements, add-on components, or Internet-based services

components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE

(“Supplemental Components”).

•

If Psion Teklogix Inc. provides or makes available to you Supplemental Components and

no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components, then the

terms of this EULA shall apply.

•

If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent make available

Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are provided, then the terms of this

EULA shall apply, except that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing

the Supplemental Component(s) shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component(s).

Psion Teklogix Inc., MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated

agent reserve the right to discontinue any Internet-based services provided to you or made

available to you through the use of the DEVICE Software.

•

Links to Third Party Sites. The DEVICE Software may provide you with the ability to link to

third party sites through the use of the DEVICE Software. The third party sites are not under

the control of MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent. Neither

MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their designated agents are responsible

for (i) the contents of any third party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any

changes or updates to third party sites, nor (ii) webcasting or any other form of transmission

received from any third party sites. If the DEVICE Software provides links to third party sites,

those links are provided to you only as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not

imply an endorsement of the third party site of MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates

and/or their designated agents.

UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA.

•

DEVICE Software. If the DEVICE Software is provided by Psion Teklogix Inc. separate from

the DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other

means, and is labeled “For Upgrade Purposes Only” you may install one (1) copy of such

IV WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

License Agreement

DEVICE Software onto the DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing DEVICE Soft-

ware, and use it in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms accom-

panying the upgrade DEVICE Software.

•

COMPANION CD. If any software component(s) is provided by Psion Teklogix Inc. separate

from the DEVICE on CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means, and labeled “For

Upgrade Purposes Only”, you may (i) install and use one (1) copy of such component(s) on the

computer(s) you use to exchange data with the DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing

Companion CD component(s).

RECOVERY MEDIA. If SOFTWARE is provided by Psion Teklogix Inc. on separate media

labeled “Recovery Media” you may use the Recovery Media solely to restore or reinstall the

SOFTWARE originally installed on your DEVICE.

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the

SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music,

text and “applets,” incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed materials, and any

copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS or its suppliers (including Microsoft Corporation). The

SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFT-

WARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through

the use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by

applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to

use such content. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS its suppliers

(including Microsoft Corporation). Use of any on-line services which may be accessed through the

SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this SOFT-

WARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form, you may print one copy of

such electronic documentation.

TRADEMARKS. This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or ser-

vice marks of Psion Teklogix Inc., MS Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates or suppliers.

EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and European

Union export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that

apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user,

end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information,

see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.

PRODUCT SUPPORT. Product support for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS, Microsoft Cor-

poration, or their affiliates. For product support, please refer to Psion Teklogix Inc. support number pro-

vided in the documentation for the DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or

if you desire to contact Psion Teklogix Inc. for any other reason, please refer to the address provided in

the documentation for the DEVICE.

RESTRICTED USE. The SOFTWARE is not designed or intended for use or resale in hazardous

environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft

navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, or other devices or systems in which a mal-

function of the SOFTWARE would result in foreseeable risk or injury or death to the operator of the

device or system, or to others.

NO LIABILITY FOR CERTAIN DAMAGES. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS,

MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR

ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

License Agreement

OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMI-

TATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO

EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF TWO HUNDRED

AND FIFTY U.S. DOLLARS (U.S. $250).

FOR APPLICABLE LIMITED WARRANTIES (IF ANY) AND SPECIAL PROVISIONS PER-

TAINING TO YOUR PARTICULAR JURISDICTION, PLEASE REFER TO YOUR WAR-

RANTY BOOKLET (IF ANY) INCLUDED WITH THIS PACKAGE OR PROVIDED WITH

THE SOFTWARE PRINTED MATERIALS OR ELECTRONICALLY.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITH ALL FAULTS. THE ENTIRE RISK

AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY, AND EFFORT

(INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES

OR CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, OR IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, ANY (IF ANY) IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MER-

CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, LACK OF VIRUSES OR

NON-INFRINGEMENT, OR WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR

ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, ANY AND ALL OF WHICH ARE HEREBY

EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARD-

ING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWRE IN A WARRANTY BOOKLET OR OTHERWISE,

THOSE ARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE NOT BINDING ON, MS,

MICROSOFT CORPORATION OR THEIR AFFILIATES.

Microsoft's End User License Agreement

You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software licensed by Psion Teklogix Inc. from

Microsoft Licensing Inc. or its affiliates (‘MS”). Those installed software products of MS origin, as

well as associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (“SOFTWARE”)

are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not

IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“EULA”), DO NOT

USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT PSION

TEKLOGIX INC. FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A

REFUND. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON

THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFI-

CATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).

GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following license:

•

You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.

NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT. PSION TEK-

LOGIX INC. HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN

THE DEVICE, AND MS HAS RELIED UPON PSION TEKLOGIX INC. TO CONDUCT

SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR

SUCH USE.

•

NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS” and

with all faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFOR-

MANCE, ACCURACY, AND EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS

WITH YOU. ALSO, THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH

VI WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

License Agreement

YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU

HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFT-

WARE, THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE NOT BINDING

ON, MS.

•

Note on Java Support. The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java.

Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed, manufactured, or intended for use or

resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance,

such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air

traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of Java

technology could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental

damage. Sun Microsystems, Inc. has contractually obligated MS to make this disclaimer.

No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL

HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR

INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE

OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY

EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT

SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED

FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.OO).

•

Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You may not

reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent

that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.

SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS. You may perma-

nently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the

Device, and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any

transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.

•

EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. export

jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply

to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user,

end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional infor-

mation see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.

Psion Teklogix Inc. End User License Agreement

IMPORTANT – READ CAREFULLY:

This License Agreement (“Agreement”) is a legal agreement between you and Psion Teklogix (“we”),

the licensor of this software package (“Software”), for your use of the Software only as authorized in

this Agreement.

By clicking on the “Accept” or other appropriate assent button and/or installing the Software, you

agree to be and are hereby bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. If you do not agree

with this Agreement, we do not grant you a license to the Software, and you may not install or use the

Software or any accompanying documentation.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual VII

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

License Agreement

The Software is the property of Psion Teklogix Inc. or its licensors and is protected by copyright laws

and international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. The Soft-

ware is licensed, not sold. Psion Teklogix Inc. provides the Software and licenses its use worldwide.

You assume responsibility for the selection of the Software to achieve your intended results, and for the

use and results obtained from it.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE

We hereby grant you and you hereby accept a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited license to install

and use the Software in object code form only, subject to the terms and restrictions set forth in this

Agreement. Except as explicitly set forth below, (i) you are not permitted to copy, sell, lease or rent,

distribute or sublicense the Software or to use the Software in a time-sharing arrangement or in any

other unauthorized manner; (ii) no license is granted to you in the human readable code of the Software

(source code); and (iii) this Agreement does not grant you any rights to patents, copyrights, trade

secrets, trademarks, intellectual property or any other ownership rights with respect to the Software.

2. DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS, RESTRICTIONS, RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS

a. Copy. The right and license granted to you shall be limited to installation and use of the Software

up to but not exceeding the number of copies you have licensed. However, you may make a copy

of the Software for backup or archival purposes. You shall not remove any copyright notice or pro-

prietary notices, labels or marks in or on the Software.

b. Evaluation. As part of evaluation, you may install and use the Software only during the specified

evaluation period. Unless you register the license as described below, the evaluation license shall

expire upon the expiration of the evaluation period.

c. License Registration. You will be required to provide a license ID, unique to each device, for reg-

istering your Software license. As part of your software license registration, we will provide you a

corresponding license key for each device.

d. No Modifications. You may not modify or create any derivative work of the Software or any copy

or portion thereof nor may you remove any Software identification, copyright or other notices.

e. No Distribution. You may not distribute the Software, in whole or in part, to any other third party.

f. Virus Program. You may not develop or knowingly incorporate any virus program that may be

harmful to a computer or a network in conjunction with the Software, or use the Software for any

other purpose as which may be harmful to a third party.

g. Assignment. You may not assign or transfer the Software to a third party or allow a third party to

use the same.

h. Reverse Engineering. Modification, reverse engineering, reverse compiling, disassembly, unbun-

dling or extraction of the Software is expressly prohibited.

i. Export Restrictions. You agree to comply with all applicable laws and regulations and that you

will not export or re-export the Software, or any part or copies thereof, or any products utilizing the

Software in violation of applicable laws or regulations of the United States or the country in which

you obtained them.

3. HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES

The Software is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as on-

line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the oper-

ation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life

VIII WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

License Agreement

support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the Software could lead to death, per-

sonal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage (“High Risk Activities”). We specifically dis-

claim any express or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities.

4. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY

We do not warrant uninterrupted or error free operation of the Software nor do we warrant that the

Software will meet your requirements. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS-IS” WITHOUT ANY

WARRANTY WHATSOEVER AND WITHOUT ANY TECHNICAL SUPPORT OF ANY KIND.

WE DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,

WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABLE QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR A PAR-

TICULAR PURPOSE. WE DO NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS

REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF

ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, USE WITH FUTURE PSION TEKLOGIX

DEVICES INTRODUCED, OR OTHERWISE. YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND

AGREE THAT USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND YOU ARE RESPONSI-

BLE FOR INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE ON YOUR COMPUTER.

5. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

We are liable for no more than the value of the license fee that you paid for the Software. This limita-

tion is cumulative and our responsibility for multiple claims will not exceed in aggregate this limit.

Under no circumstances are we or our third party suppliers liable for damages of third parties claimed

against you, or for harm to your records or data, or special, incidental, indirect, or consequential dam-

ages, including but not limited to lost profits, lost business revenue or failure to realize expected sav-

ings, loss of data, loss of use of the Software or any associated equipment, downtime and user’s time,

even if you informed us of their possibility, or for breach of any express or implied warranty, breach of

contract, negligence, strict liability or any other legal theory related to the Software. This limitation

applies whether you are entitled to claim damages from us or our third party suppliers as a matter of

contract or tort.

6. COPYRIGHTS, OWNERSHIP AND PROPRIETARY RIGHTS

All title and copyrights in and to the Software, and any copies thereof, are owned by Psion Teklogix

Inc. or its suppliers. The Software also contains copyrighted material licensed from our suppliers or

obtained from open source and all rights to such copyrighted material rests with such suppliers. Addi-

tional third party license terms and conditions may apply. We retain title to the Software and any copies

made from it. Any copies of the Software you made are subject to the restrictions of this Agreement.

WE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND INDEMNITIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STAT-

UTORY, FOR PATENT OR COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT.

7. CONFIDENTIALITY

You agree not to use or disclose any proprietary information provided by us, except for the purposes of

this Agreement. You agree not to reproduce any of the copyrighted materials unless expressly permit-

ted by this Agreement.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

License Agreement

8. ENDING THIS AGREEMENT

We may terminate this Agreement and your license immediately without notice if (a) you fail to com-

ply with any term of this Agreement, or (b) your rights are assigned by you, by operation of law or oth-

erwise. In such event, you must return or destroy all copies and component parts of the Software and

documentation, as well as any other Psion Teklogix proprietary information in your possession, within

fourteen (14) days of the date of termination. Any rights and obligations under this Agreement that by

their nature continue after it ends will remain in effect until they are completed.

9. GENERAL

The laws of the Province of Ontario and the federal laws applicable therein, excluding the conflict of

laws provisions, govern this Agreement. If any provision of this Agreement is deemed invalid or unen-

forceable by any country, that particular provision will be deemed modified to the extent necessary to

make the provision valid and enforceable, and the remaining provisions will remain in full force and

effect. Failure by us to insist on strict performance or to exercise a right when entitled, does not prevent

us from doing so at a later time, either in relation to that default or any subsequent one.

No modifications of this Agreement shall be effective unless in writing and approved by us.

You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and that it is the complete agree-

ment between you and Psion Teklogix with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersedes all prior

agreements, oral or written.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPROVALS AND SAFETY SUMMARY

FCC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (DoC)

Applicant’s Name & Address:

PSION TEKLOGIX Inc.

2100 Meadowvale Blvd.,

Mississauga, Ontario

Canada L5N 7J9

Contact Person: Iain Roy

Telephone No.: (905) 813-9900

US Representative’s Name & Address: PSION TEKLOGIX

1810 Airport Exchange Blvd., Suite 500

Erlanger, KY, 41018, USA

Contact Person: Kyle Day

Telephone No.: (859) 372-4329

Equipment Type/Environment:

Computing Devices

Trade Name / Model No.:

WORKABOUT PRO family: Model 7525C & 7525S

and their accessories.

Year of Manufacture:

2006

Standard(s) to which Conformity is Declared:

The above products, supplied by Psion Teklogix Inc., have been tested and found to com-

ply with FCC PART 15, SUBPART B - UNINTENTIONAL RADIATORS, CLASS B

COMPUTING DEVICES FOR HOME & OFFICE USE.

I, the undersigned, hereby declare that the equipment as tested is representative within

manufacturing tolerance to units.

Applicant

Legal Representative in U.S.

Signature

Mike Doyle

Kyle Day

Full Name

V.P. of Engineering & Operations

V.P. Channel Sales

Position

Mississauga, Ontario

Erlanger, KY 41018, USA

Place

Nov. 13, 2006

Date

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Approvals And Safety Summary

CE Marking

When used in a residential, commercial or light industrial environment the product

and its approved UK and European peripherals fulfil all requirements for CE marking.

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC

This equipment complies with the essential requirements of EU Directive

1999/5/EC (Declaration available: www.psionteklogix.com).

Cet équipement est conforme aux principales caractéristiques définies dans la

Directive européenne RTTE 1999/5/CE. (Déclaration disponible sur le site:

www.psionteklogix.com).

Die Geräte erfüllen die grundlegenden Anforderungen der RTTE-Richtlinie

(1999/5/EG). (Den Wortlaut der Richtlinie finden Sie unter:

www.psionteklogix.com).

Questa apparecchiatura è conforme ai requisiti essenziali della Direttiva Europea

R&TTE 1999/5/CE. (Dichiarazione disponibile sul sito: www.psionteklogix.com).

Este equipo cumple los requisitos principales de la Directiva 1995/5/CE de la UE,

“Equipos de Terminales de Radio y Telecomu-nicaciones”. (Declaración disponible

en: www.psionteklogix.com).

Este equipamento cumpre os requisitos essenciais da Directiva 1999/5/CE do

Parlamento Europeu e do Conselho (Directiva RTT). (Declaração disponível no

endereço: www.psionteklogix.com).

Ο εξοπλισμός αυτός πληροί τις βασικές απαιτήσεις της κοινοτικής οδηγίας EU

R&TTE 1999/5/EΚ. (Η δήλωση συμμόρφωσης διατίθεται στη διεύθυνση:

www.psionteklogix.com)

Deze apparatuur voldoet aan de noodzakelijke vereisten van EU-richtlijn

betreffende radioapparatuur en telecommunicatie-eindappa-ratuur 199/5/EG.

(verklaring beschikbaar: www.psionteklogix.com).

Dette udstyr opfylder de Væsentlige krav i EU's direktiv 1999/5/EC om Radio- og

teleterminaludstyr. (Erklæring findes på: www.psionteklogix.com).

Dette utstyret er i overensstemmelse med hovedkravene i R&TTE-direktivet

(1999/5/EC) fra EU. (Erklæring finnes på: www.psionteklogix.com).

Utrustningen uppfyller kraven för EU-direktivet 1999/5/EC om ansluten

teleutrustning och ömsesidigt erkännande av utrustningens överensstämmelse

(R&TTE). (Förklaringen finns att läsa på: www.psionteklogix.com).

XII

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Approvals And Safety Summary

Tämä laite vastaa EU:n radio- ja telepäätelaitedirektiivin (EU R&TTE Directive

1999/5/EC) vaatimuksia. (Julkilausuma nähtävillä osoitteessa:

www.psionteklogix.com).

PSION TEKLOGIX tímto prohlašuje, že WORKABOUT PRO C & S

je ve shod se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanovenímisměrnice

1995/5/ES (NV č. 426/2000 Sb.) a Prohlášení o shod

www.PsionTeklogix.com.

je k dispozici na

generální licence

Toto zařízení lze provozovat v České republice na základ

č. GL - 12/R/2000.

PSION TEKLOGIX týmto vyhlasuje, žeWORKABOUT PRO C & S

spĺ a základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice

1995/5/ES (NV č. 443/2001 Z.z.) a Vyhlásenie o zhode je k dispozícii na

www.PsionTeklogix.com.

Toto zariadenie je možné prevádzkovať v Slovenskej republike na základe

Všeobecného povolenia č. VPR-01/2001.

LUse of the 802.11 WORKABOUT PRO C & S in France:

Owing to French Government restrictions, the 802.11 WORKABOUT PRO C

& S is limited to indoor use. They may be used outdoors, on private property,

only with prior authorization from the French Ministry of Defense.

For GSM/GPRS Users in North America:

Although the GSM/GPRS Expansion Module is a three band device, only the 1900

(PCS) band is used in North America

FCC Information To Users

Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B

digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference

to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not

occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,

which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is

encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

•

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

XIII

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Approvals And Safety Summary

•

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which

the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

IMPORTANT NOTE:

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an

uncontrolled environment under 47 CFR 2.1093 paragraph (d)(2), for use in a PDA.

End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure

compliance.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other

antenna or transmitter.

Some equipment in hospitals and aircraft are not shielded from radio frequency

energy. Do not use the WORKABOUT PRO onboard aircraft, or in hospitals,

without first obtaining permission.

Do not use near pacemakers. The product may affect the operation of some

medically implanted devices such as pacemakers, causing them to malfunction.

Avoid placing your product next to such devices. Keep a minimum distance of 20

cm between the device and the product to reduce the risk of interference. If you have

any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, turn off the WORKABOUT

PRO and contact your cardiologist for assistance.

Note: To maintain compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines, if you

wear the WORKABOUT PRO C & S on your body, use the Psion Teklogix

approved carrying case.

Use of non-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.

Emissions Information For Canada

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations. When using the 802.11 radio option, to prevent

radio interference, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from

windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is

installed outdoors is subject to licensing.

XIV WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Approvals And Safety Summary

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement

sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. En cas d’utilisation du module radio 802.11,

afin d'éviter toute interférence radio avec le service autorisé, l'appareil doit être

utilisé à l'intérieur, tout en tant éloigné de toute fenêtre afin de garantir le maximum

de protection. Si cet équipement (ou son antenne émettrice) est installé à l'extérieur,

il est alors soumis à licence.

Warning for Australia

The user needs to switch off the device when exposed to areas with potentially

explosive atmospheres such as petrol stations, chemical storage depots and blasting

operations.

Warning to Users

This product is a Class I/Class II laser product according to CDRH 21 CFR 1040.10

and 1040.11 and Class1/Class 2 laser product according to IEC 60825-

1:1993+A1:1997+A2:2001

The SE1200 ALR has a maximum radiated power less than 1.4 mW; according to

EN 60825-1: 2001 it is classified as a Class 3B laser product.

LASER/LED WARNINGS

For your own safety, it is critical that you comply with the following warnings:

CAUTION

The laser/LED aperture is located in the front of terminal. Do not look into the

laser/LED beam or point the beam at people or animals.

CAUTION

Using controls or adjustments, or performing procedures other than those speci-

fied herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

CAUTION

The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard.

This product may contain a laser scanner that emits less than 1.4mW maximum

radiant power at a wavelength of 650nm or 680nm.

DO NOT OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE

Operating Psion Teklogix equipment where explosive gas is present may result in

an explosion.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Approvals And Safety Summary

DO NOT REMOVE COVERS OR OPEN ENCLOSURES

To avoid injury, the equipment covers and enclosures should only be removed by

qualified service personnel. Do not operate the equipment without the covers and

enclosures properly installed.

For qualified personnel: Remove the battery pack before removing the cover

and enclosures.

CAUTION!

Danger of explosion if a WORKABOUT PRO M-E, C & S battery is incorrectly

handled, charged, disposed of or replaced. Replace only with the same or equiva-

lent type recommended by Psion Teklogix – i.e., Models WA3000-G1 or

WA3006. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions listed under the

heading “Lithium Ion Battery Safety Precautions” on page XVIII. Carefully

review all battery safety issues.

VORSICHT!

Explosiongefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie Ersatz nur durch

denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.

Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE FOLLOWING:

•

WORKABOUT PRO AC Wall Adaptor (WA3220-G1),

Desktop Docking Stations (WA4002-1-G1, WA4102-1-G1), and

Tether Cable (CA1050-G1)

For your own safety, it is critical that you comply with the following warnings:

CAUTION!

Before use, read all safety instructions for the Docking Station, the WORKA-

BOUT PRO and the AC Wall Adaptor.

CAUTION!

To avoid the risk of fire or personal injury, use only the Psion Teklogix recom-

mended AC adaptor.

CAUTION!

Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by Psion Teklogix may result in

fire, electric shock, or personal injury.

XVI WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Approvals And Safety Summary

CAUTION!

To reduce risk of damage to the electric plug and cord when unplugging the

charger, pull the plug rather than the cord.

CAUTION!

Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on, tripped over, or oth-

erwise subjected to damage or stress.

CAUTION!

Do not operate with a damaged cord or plug. Replace immediately.

CAUTION!

Do not operate if the device has received a sharp blow, been dropped,

or otherwise damaged in any way; it should be inspected by qualified service per-

sonnel.

CAUTION!

Do not disassemble; repairs must be carried out by Psion Teklogix qualified serv-

ice personnel. Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or fire.

CAUTION!

To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug the AC adapter from the outlet before

attempting any cleaning.

CAUTION!

An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary. Use of an

improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock. If an extension cord

must be used, make sure the plug pins on the extension cord are the same number,

size, and shape as those on the adapter, the extension cord is properly wired and

in good electrical condition and that the wire size is larger than 16 AWG.

CAUTION!

The AC adaptor is for indoor use only. Do not expose the AC adaptor to rain or

snow.

CAUTION!

Use only Psion Teklogix approved power adaptors.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual XVII

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Approvals And Safety Summary

LITHIUM ION BATTERY SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Important: It is critical that this safety information be reviewed and that all

warnings be strictly followed.

Warning:

BATTERIES ARE CONSIDERED HAZARDOUS WASTE and

must be returned to Psion Teklogix for proper disposal. All used

batteries must be forwarded to one of the following offices:

Psion Teklogix Inc.

2100 Meadowvale Blvd.

Mississauga, Ontario

Canada

Psion Teklogix Corp.

1810 Airport Exchange Blvd.

Suite 500

Erlanger, Kentucky

USA 41018

L5N 7J9

Psion Teklogix S.A.

La Duranne; 135 Rue Rene Descartes; BP 421000

13591 Aix-En-Provence

Cedex 3; France

Warning:

TO PREVENT the battery from leaking acid, generating heat or

exploding, adhere to precautions listed below.

•

There is a risk of explosion if a WORKABOUT PRO battery is replaced

with an incorrect type.

The battery incorporates built-in safety devices. To ensure their proper

function, do not disassemble or alter any parts of the battery.

Do not short-circuit the battery by directly connecting any of the exposed

terminals with metal objects such as wire. Do not transport or store the

battery together with metal objects such as necklaces, hair pins, etc.

•

Do not dispose of batteries in fire.

Do not use or leave the battery near a heat source such as a fire

or heater.

•

Do not immerse the battery in water.

When charging, use the battery charger specifically designed for

the battery.

•

Do not pierce, strike, throw or step on the battery.

Do not directly solder the battery.

Do not connect the battery to an electrical outlet, vehicle

cigarette lighter, etc.

•

Do not put battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container.

XVIII WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Approvals And Safety Summary

•

Do not use the battery in combination with primary batteries (such as

dry-cell batteries) or batteries of different capacities or brands.

Immediately remove the battery from the device or battery charger

and stop use if the battery gives off an odor, generates heat, becomes

discoloured or deformed, or in any way appears abnormal during use.

•

Do not continue charging the battery if it does not recharge within the

specified charge time.

The battery may burst or ignite if the battery leaks. Always ensure that it

is away from any exposed flames.

If leaking electrolyte sprays into your eyes, rinse them with clean

running water, and immediately seek medical attention.

Do not store the battery in extremely high temperatures (e.g., a vehicle,

strong direct sunlight, etc.). This may cause the battery to overheat

or ignite, and it may also reduce the performance and service life of

the battery.

•

Do not use in areas where static electricity is greater than what the

manufacturer guarantees.

Keep batteries out of reach of children.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual XIX

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

1.1 About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.2 Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

1.3 About The WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer . . . . . . . . . . . 4

1.3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

1.3.2 The WORKABOUT PRO C Hand-Held Computer . . . . . . . . . . 8

1.3.3 The WORKABOUT PRO S Hand-Held Computer . . . . . . . . . . 9

1.3.4 Regulatory Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1: Introduction

About This Manual

1.1 About This Manual

This manual describes how to configure, operate and maintain the WORKABOUT

PRO hand-held computer.

Chapter 1: Introduction

provides a basic overview of the WORKABOUT PRO hand-held.

Chapter 2: Basic Checkout

describes the steps required to get the unit ready for operation.

Chapter 3: Getting T o K now The WORKABOUT PRO

describes the features and outlines how to charge and maintain the battery. This

chapter also provides information about indicators, SD/MMC card installation and

general maintenance.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

describes the Microsoft® Windows Mobile 5.0 Today screen and how to use it. This

chapter also outlines basics like moving around a window, displaying menus, and so on.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

describes how to insert and configure an 802.11g radio.

Chapter 6: Settings

provides a description of the Windows Mobile 5.0 Settings options and how to

use them.

Chapter 7: Programs

provides a description of the Windows Mobile 5.0 Programs options and how to

use them.

Chapter 8: Expansion Modules

provides a list of the Windows Mobile 5.0 expansion modules.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

describes the peripherals and accessories available for your hand-held.

Chapter 10: Specifications

details radio, hand-held computer, scanner and battery specifications.

Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices

provides the helpdesk phone number at the Mississauga, Ontario, Canada office

and details the support services available. This appendix also lists worldwide

office addresses and phone numbers, along with web access information.

Appendix B: Port Pinouts

describes port pinouts.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Text Conventions

1.2 Text Conventions

Note: Notes highlight additional helpful information.

Important: These statements provide particularly important instructions

or additional information that is critical to the operation of

the equipment.

Warning:

These statements provide critical information that may prevent

physical injury, equipment damage or data loss.

1.3 About The WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer

The WORKABOUT PRO is a ruggedized hand-held personal computer, running

the Microsoft® Windows Mobile 5.0 operating system. It is intended for use in

commercial and light industrial applications with a focus on real time wireless data

transactions. This hand-held is optimized for mobile computing applications and

third party expansion. Psion Teklogix offers two models of this hand-held that

operate with the Windows Mobile 5.0 operating system: WORKABOUT PRO C

and WORKABOUT PRO S. Any differences between the units are clearly indicated

in this manual.

1.3.1 Features

WORKABOUT PRO Models

•

WORKABOUT PRO C

Colour touchscreen display

64 MB Flash

128 MB RAM

Integrated Bluetooth

•

WORKABOUT PRO S

Colour touchscreen display

64 MB Flash

128 MB RAM

Integrated Bluetooth

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Features

Processor:

•

400 MHz Intel Xscale PXA255

Operating System:

•

Microsoft Windows Mobile 5.0

Programming Environment:

•

HTML, XML

Psion Teklogix Mobile Devices SDK

Windows Mobile 5.0 Standard SDK

.NET Compact Framework

WORKABOUT PRO Hardware Development Kit

Wireless Communications:

Optional expansion modules for:

•

802.11g (via Compact Flash slot)

GSM/GPRS (via expansion interface)

CDMA/lxRTT (via expansion interface)

UMTS (via expansion interface)

•

Integrated Bluetooth class II, version 1.1 16.4 ft or 5m range standard on

WORKABOUT PRO C and S

Note: WAN, 802.11g and Bluetooth are available simultaneously on

WORKABOUT PRO C and S models.

Application Software:

•

Pocket Internet Explorer, Word Mobile, Powerpoint Mobile, Excel Mobile,

Pocket MSN

User Interface:

•

Colour Touchscreen Display

3.5” (8.9cm) diagonal, 1⁄

mode TFT

4 VGA, 240 x 320 transflective portrait

16-bit colour

Adjustable backlight

Sunlight readable for outdoor use

High reliability LED backlight

•

Touchscreen (standard)

Passive stylus or finger operation

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Features

Signature capture

•

Keyboards

Alphanumeric (C models)

Numeric (S model)

Ergonomic ambidextrous one-hand operation

Backlit, high durability hard-capped keys

Indicators and Controls

Internal speaker with volume control

LED indicating battery charge status

Bar Code Applications (all are optional):

•

SX5393 imager expansion module (Model No. WA9010)

EV15 imager expansion module (Model No. WA9003-G1)

SE 1223HP laser scanner expansion module (Model No. WA9000-G1)

SE 1223LR laser scanner expansion module (Model No. WA9005-G1)

SE 1223ALR laser scanner expansion module (Model No. WA9006)

SE 955 laser scanner expansion module (Model No. WA9002-G1)

HHP5180 imager expansion module (Model No. WA9012-G1)

Pistol grip (Model No. WA6001-G1)

Note: All are field upgradeable.

Expansion Slots:

•

One SD/MMC memory card slot–user accessible

100 Pin High-Speed Expansion connector, accessible through end-cap or

back cover

Supports serial, USB, PCMCIA

•

Type II Compact Flash slot accessible through end-cap

Other Expansion Modules:

•

Type II PCMCIA slot–field upgradeable

External Ports:

•

USB 1.1 Host port on base of tethered USB devices (printers, etc.)

Low Insertion Force Docking Station Port with:

USB 1.1 device port

USB 1.1 Host port

Battery charging

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Features

Power Management:

•

Full-shift Standard Lithium-ion (3.7V, 2000 mAh)

High-Capacity Lithium-ion (3.7V, 3000 mAh)

Also accepts standard consumer available AA Alkaline batteries

(C models)

•

Quick swap pack

Advanced Smart Battery with gas gauge

3 power source options: Runs off battery, AC or automotive power supplies

Built-in charger

Rechargeable, user replaceable, coin cell backup battery

Environmental (Standard):

•

Operating temp: 14ºF to 122ºF (-10ºC to +50ºC)

Storage temp: -13ºF to 140ºF (-25ºC to +60ºC)

Humidity: 5-95% RH non-condensing

Rain/Dust: IEC 529, classification IP54

Shock: Multiple 4 ft. (1.2m) drops to polished concrete

Power Accessories

•

AC power supply (charge and operate hand-held)

Automotive lighter power supply (charge and operate hand-held)

1 slot battery charger

Quad battery charger

Desktop Docking Station (charges hand-held and spare battery)

Vehicle cradle with optional charge capability

Communication Accessories:

•

Quad Dock (4-site) with 10/100BaseT Ethernet and charge functions

Desktop Docking Station (charges hand-held and spare battery) provides

USB host and device ports and supports optional 10/100 Base T Ethernet

module

•

Powered cradle for vehicle applications

Port Replicator for vehicle cradles (field installable option) includes 3

RS232 ports plus USB device port.

Carrying Accessories:

•

Handstrap, pistol grip with trigger, holster, belt loop, protective vinyl carry-

ing case (with optional shoulder strap).

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1: Introduction

The WORKABOUT PRO C Hand-Held Computer

1.3.2 The WORKABOUT PRO C Hand-Held Computer

Figure 1.1 WORKABOUT PRO C

Audio Jack

Low Insertion

Force Port (LIF)

Tether Port

Figure 1.2 Tether Port, Low Insertion Force (LIF) Port And Audio Jack

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1: Introduction

The WORKABOUT PRO S Hand-Held Computer

1.3.3 The WORKABOUT PRO S Hand-Held Computer

Figure 1.3 WORKABOUT PRO S

Audio Jack

Low Insertion

Force Port (LIF)

Tether Port

Figure 1.4 Tether Port, Low Insertion Force (LIF) Port And Audio Jack

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Regulatory Labels

1.3.4 Regulatory Labels

Warning:

Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than

those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Aperture

This labelled is affixed below the aperture.

Figure 1.5 Scanner Module–Laser Warning Label

Figure 1.6 End-Cap–Expansion Module Warning

0889

7525C-G1 WORKABOUT PRO

RATING: 5 VDC 2.1A MAX

CONTAINS: FCC ID: GM37525BTB

IC: 2739D-7525BTB

N15025

For Batteries See

User Instructions

Figure 1.7 FCC Compliance Label – WORKABOUT PRO C

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Regulatory Labels

7525S-G1 WORKABOUT PRO

RATING: 5 Vdc

3A MAX

CONTAINS: FCC ID: GM37525BTB

IC: 2739D-7525BTB

0889

N15025

For Batteries See

User Instructions

FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE

Figure 1.8 FCC Compliance Label – WORKABOUT PRO S

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BASIC CHECKOUT

2.1 Preparing The WORKABOUT PRO For Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.1.1 The Main Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.1.1.1 Charging The Main Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.1.2 The Backup Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.2 Turning The WORKABOUT PRO On and Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.2.1 Installing The Battery And Switching The Unit On . . . . . . . . . 16

2.2.2 Switching The Unit Off (Suspend) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.3 The Getting Started CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.4 Connecting The WORKABOUT PRO To A PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.4.1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync To Work With Files . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.5 Aligning (Calibrating) The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

2.6 Resetting The WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

2.6.1 Performing A Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

2.6.2 Accessing The BooSt Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2: Basic Checkout

Preparing The WORKABOUT PRO For Operation

2.1 Preparing The WORKABOUT PRO For Operation

2.1.1 The Main Battery

Warning:

It is critical that you review the battery safety guidelines in “Lith-

ium Ion Battery Safety Precautions” on page XVIII before charg-

ing the battery.

The WORKABOUT PRO C can be powered with one of the following batteries:

•

Standard Battery

High-Capacity Battery, or

3 AA alkaline batteries.

The WORKABOUT PRO S can be powered with one of the following battery packs:

•

Standard Battery, or

High-Capacity Battery

2.1.1.1 Charging The Main Battery

Important: Before opening the battery cover to replace a battery, it is critical

that you read “Removing And Installing The Battery Pack” on

page 34 and “Safely Swapping The Main Battery” on page 27 for

details about safely swapping the battery.

Battery packs shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% and must

be fully charged prior to use. Batteries can be charged using a variety of chargers

and docking stations along with a WORKABOUT PRO internal charger. When

using the internal charger, a suitable power source is required. All chargers and

docking stations are described in Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

beginning on page 297.

Note: If you are powering up a new unit, a warning message may appear on the

screen indicating that the backup battery capacity is low. To recharge the

internal battery, you must fully charge the WORKABOUT PRO with the

main battery installed in the unit. An overnight charge is recommended.

Important: Before opening the battery cover on your WORKABOUT PRO,

you must turn off the hand-held. If the battery cover is opened

while the hand-held is still powered on, the unit may reboot.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2: Basic Checkout

The Backup Battery

2.1.2 The Backup Battery

To preserve data stored in your WORKABOUT PRO while you swap the main

battery, the unit is equipped with an internal backup battery–a standard Lithium

Alloy Manganese Dioxide coin battery–a Maxell ML2032. The backup battery will

supply 5 minutes of continuous power while you install a charged, main battery.

The backup battery is trickle charged from the main battery. Provided that the main

battery contains power, the backup battery will maintain a charge whether the

WORKABOUT PRO is switched on or off, in a docking station or a cradle. Even

when the main battery reaches its Suspend Threshold (refer to “Suspend Threshold”

on page 137) and the hand-held shuts down, the backup battery will continue to

draw a trickle charge from the main battery to protect the data stored in the unit until

a charged main battery is installed.

Note: The backup battery takes approximately 100 hrs to fully charge from a

fully discharged (flat) state. While you can continue to use the WORK-

ABOUT PRO, replacing the main battery while the backup battery is not

fully charged is not recommended because you risk losing the data stored

on the unit.

2.1.2.1 Backup Battery Gas Gauge

To safely replace the main battery and preserve the data stored in the

WORKABOUT PRO, the backup battery should contain a minimum of 80% of its

charge capacity. The Battery tab in the Power applet displays a gas gauge to indicate

the charge remaining in the backup battery from 0 to 100%. To check the backup

battery capacity, tap on the Settings menu and then tap on Power applet followed by

System>Battery.

For more details about replacing batteries, refer to “Removing And Installing The

Battery Pack” on page 34 and “Safely Swapping The Main Battery” on page 35.

2.2 Turning The WORKABOUT PRO On and Off

2.2.1 Installing The Battery And Switching The Unit On

•

Turn the fasteners at the base of the battery cover counter-clockwise to

unlock the cover and remove it. The top of the stylus is slot-shaped to help

you loosen the fasteners.

•

Slide the charged battery into the unit. Replace the battery cover, and turn the

fasteners at the base of the battery cover clockwise to lock the battery in place.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2: Basic Checkout

Switching The Unit Off (Suspend)

Note: If you are using a docking station or an external power supply, you can

insert an uncharged battery, dock the unit and switch it on.

To switch on the WORKABOUT PRO:

•

Press and hold down the [ENTER/ON] key for at least one second.

When the LED flashes green, release the [ENTER/ON] button.

The desktop Today screen is displayed.

Note: If the unit was already in use–the unit may be off (suspend state)–press-

ing [ENTER/ON] ‘wakes’ the unit from this state. The screen in which you

were working prior to the suspend state is displayed.

2.2.2 Switching The Unit Off (Suspend)

•

Press the [BLUE] key, and then press [ENTER/ON].

2.3 The Getting Started CD

The Getting Started CD shipped with your unit runs automatically when inserted,

guiding you through ActiveSync 4.2 and Outlook 2002 installation. Once installation

is complete, you are guided through additional options to personalize your hand-held.

Note: If while working with the CD, you are asked, “Do you want to run or save

this file”, do not to click the [Save] button.

Tapping on Next in the start-up screen below guides you through ActiveSync 4.2 and

Outlook 2002 installation.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2: Basic Checkout

The Getting Started CD

Once installation is complete, a new screen is displayed that allows you to

personalize your WORKABOUT PRO.

If you do not want to explore further options at this time, tap on Finish.

•

Note: You can always insert the CD another time to add additional programs.

Tapping on one of the following options displays the associated information:

Add new programs to my device–walks you through installing additional

programs.

Add music, pictures, or videos to my device–guides you through the steps

required to add one or more of these options to your unit.

Learn more–provides access to the Windows Mobile web page and the

Psion Teklogix web page.

About this disk–provides copyright information about this CD.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2: Basic Checkout

Connecting The WORKABOUT PRO To A PC

If you insert your CD a second time, you’ll see the Welcome Back screen.

•

Tap on an option in this screen (e.g., Add new programs to my device) and

follow the associated steps.

2.4 Connecting The WORKABOUT PRO To A PC

Note: Refer to “Linking A WORKABOUT PRO To A PC” on page 310 for more

details about the desktop docking station and how to link to a PC.

The WORKABOUT PRO can be connected to a PC using the desktop docking station.

•

Insert the unit in the desktop docking station.

Use a Client USB connector to complete the communication link between

the hand-held and the PC.

2.4.1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync To Work With Files

ActiveSync–Microsoft PC connectivity software–can be used to connect the

WORKABOUT PRO to PCs running this software. ActiveSync version 4.0 or higher

is required for Windows Mobile 5.0. ActiveSync version 4.2 can be installed from

the Getting Started CD shipped with your WORKABOUT PRO.

By connecting the WORKABOUT PRO to a PC through your desktop docking

station and running ActiveSync on the PC, you can view files on the hand-held, drag

and drop files between the hand-held and the PC, connect to the Internet, and so on.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2: Basic Checkout

Aligning (Calibrating) The Touchscreen

2.5 Aligning (Calibrating) The Touchscreen

Refer to “Aligning (Calibrating) The Touchscreen” on page 37 for details.

2.6 Resetting The WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held

When you reset your hand-held, the registry settings and any installed programs

(stored on the flash file system) and data are preserved.

2.6.1 Performing A Reset

•

Press and hold down the [BLUE] key and the [ENTER/ON] key simulta-

neously for a minimum of six seconds. When the splash screen appears,

release the keys.

Note: You do not need to reset your WORKABOUT PRO after configuring the radio.

2.6.2 Accessing The BooSt Menu

To execute a reset and access the BooSt menu:

•

Press and hold down the [BLUE] key, the [ENTER] key and the left

[SCAN] key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds.

•

When the BooSt menu appears, release the buttons.

After a reset, the BooSt menu appears, listing possible BooSt commands.

To load the Windows Mobile 5.0 operating system, type 1.

•

Note: Authorized personnel can perform a ‘clean start’. A clean start resets

not only the registry settings to factory defaults, but also erases any

files or applications stored or installed on the built-in flash file sys-

tem. After a clean start, anything that is not part of the OS image is

erased. Only data stored on a SD/MMC card or externally to the

device on a USB memory stick or on a PC is preserved during a

clean start.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING T O K NOW T HE WORKABOUT PRO

3.1 Features Of The WORKABOUT PRO C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3

3.2 Features of the WORKABOUT PRO S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3.3 The Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3.3.1 Battery Safet y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 6

3.3.2 Removing And Installing The Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

3.3.3 Battery Swap Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3.3.3.1 Safely Swapping The Main Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3.3.4 Charging The Batter y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 7

3.3.4.1 Chargers And Docking Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

3.4 Switching The Hand-Held On And Of f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 9

3.5 The Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

3.5.1 The WORKABOUT PRO C Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

3.5.2 The WORKABOUT PRO S Keyboar d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1

3.5.3 Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

3.5.3.1 Activating Modifier Keys & The Shift-State Indicator Icon 32

3.5.3.2 Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

3.5.4 The Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.5.5 The WORKABOUT PRO S – Accessing Alpha Keys . . . . . . . . 35

3.5.5.1 Choosing A Single Alpha Character. . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3.5.5.2 Creating Uppercase Letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.5.5.3 Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.5.6 The Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.6 The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.6.1 Adjusting The Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.6.2 Aligning (Calibrating) The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

3.7 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

3.7.1 The LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

3.7.2 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

3.7.2.1 Adjusting Speaker Volume On The WORKABOUT PRO C 39

3.7.2.2 Adjusting Speaker Volume On The WORKABOUT PRO S 39

3.8 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time. . . . . . . . . . . . 39

3.8.1 Storing Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

3.9 Uploading Data In A Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

3.10 Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

3.11 The SD/MMC Card—Adding Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

3.11.1 Inserting The Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

3.12 General Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

3.12.1 Caring For The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

3.12.2 Cleaning The WORKABOUT PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

Features Of The WORKABOUT PRO C

3.1 Features Of The WORKABOUT PRO C

Sound Port

Stylus

(pointing tool)

LED

(Light Emitting Diode)

Microphone

Figure 3.1 Front Of WORKABOUT PRO C

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

Features Of The WORKABOUT PRO C

End Cap

Back Cover –

optional scanner

module fits here

Battery Cover

Fasteners

Tether Port

Audio Jack

Low Insertion

Force (LIF) Port

Figure 3.2 Back Of WORKABOUT PRO

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

Features of the WORKABOUT PRO S

3.2 Features of the WORKABOUT PRO S

Sound Port

Stylus

(pointing tool)

LED

(Light Emitting Diode)

Microphone

Figure 3.3 Front Of WORKABOUT PRO S

3.3 The Batteries

The WORKABOUT PRO C hand-held can operate with a Standard Lithium Ion

battery pack, a High Capacity Lithium Ion battery pack or three AA alkaline batteries.

The WORKABOUT PRO S can operate with either a Standard or a High Capacity

Lithium Ion battery pack; it does not support AA alkaline batteries.

If you are using a Lithium Ion battery pack, preparing the hand-held unit for

operation requires that the battery pack be charged before it is installed in the unit.

To maintain data during a battery swap, the WORKABOUT PRO is also equipped

with a coin backup battery. Refer to “The Backup Battery” on page 16 and “Battery

Swap Time” on page 27 for additional information.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

Battery Safety

3.3.1 Battery Safety

Important: Before attempting to install, use or charge the battery pack, it is

critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines

in the section entitled “Lithium Ion Battery Safety Precautions”

beginning on page XVIII.

3.3.2 Removing And Installing The Battery Pack

Removing The Battery Cover

•

Turn off the WORKABOUT PRO before opening the battery cover.

•

Turn the fasteners at the base of the battery cover counter-clockwise to

unlock the cover. The top of the stylus has a screwdriver shaped end to help

you loosen the fasteners.

•

Lift and remove the cover.

Battery Cover Fasteners

Battery Cover

Figure 3.4 The Battery Cover

Installing The Battery

•

Insert a charged battery in the unit.

•

Replace the battery cover, and turn the fasteners at the base of the battery

cover clockwise to lock the battery in place.

Note: If you are using a docking station or other external power source,

you can insert an uncharged battery, dock the unit and switch it on.

Otherwise, always begin the day with a charged battery.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

Battery Swap Time

3.3.3 Battery Swap Time

Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not

been altered, battery swap time is approximately 5 minutes—you will not lose data

if the battery is replaced within this time frame.

To protect data, the safest place to store data is on a SD/MMC memory card or

externally to the device on a USB memory stick or on a PC.

To protect against data loss, the unit will automatically shut down with enough

reserve in the main battery to last up to 99 hours, the default setting. (Refer to

“Suspend Threshold” on page 137 for details about reserving battery power for data

backup purposes.) Even when the hand-held shuts down, the backup battery

continues to draw a trickle charge from the main battery to maintain the data stored

in the unit until a new battery can be installed.

3.3.3.1 Safely Swapping The Main Battery

There are a few steps you need to take to ensure that no data is lost during a battery

swap. First, you need to make certain that the backup battery is holding at least 80%

of its charge capacity. This information is displayed in the Battery tab.

•

Tap on Settings and then on the Power icon. Tap on System>Battery

and check the Backup battery gas gauge to determine the battery charge

remaining.

If the backup battery charge capacity is less than 80%:

•

Insert the WORKABOUT PRO in a docking station or cradle to top up the

power supply before removing the main battery from the unit.

Important: Before opening the battery cover on your WORKABOUT PRO to

remove the battery, you must turn off the hand-held. If the battery

cover is opened while the hand-held is still powered on, the unit

may reboot.

3.3.4 Charging The Battery

Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% of capacity.

They must be fully charged prior to use.

Keep in mind also that, along with the main battery, the WORKABOUT PRO is

equipped with an internal, backup battery that preserves data stored on the unit

while the main battery is swapped.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

Chargers And Docking Stations

Important: The backup battery is trickle charged from the main battery. To

maximize battery life, avoid excessive discharging and recharging

of the backup battery by keeping the main battery fully charged.

IF YOU ARE POWERING UP A NEW UNIT, a warning message

may appear on the screen indicating that the backup battery

capacity is low. To recharge the backup battery, you must fully

charge the WORKABOUT PRO with the main battery installed in

the unit. An overnight charge is recommended.

3.3.4.1 Chargers And Docking Stations

Important: FOR DETAILED INFORMATION about chargers and docking

stations, refer to Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

beginning on page 297.

For battery safety, refer to “Lithium Ion Battery Safety Precau-

tions” beginning on page XVIII.

Lithium Ion battery packs must be charged before use. These batteries can be

charged with a variety of chargers and docking stations. These include:

•

Desktop Docking Station (Model WA4002-G1 for the WORKABOUT

PRO C & Model WA4102-G1 for the WORKABOUT PRO S)—operates

as both a charger and a docking station. Operating as a charger, both the

battery installed in the hand-held and a spare battery can be charged simul-

taneously.

•

Quad Docking Station (Model #WA4004-G1)—can charge the battery of

up to four WORKABOUT PROs inserted in the docking station.

•

Single Battery Charger (Model #W A 3001-G1)—charges a single battery.

Quad Battery Charger (Model #WA3004-G1)—charges up to four spare

Standard or High-Capacity WORKABOUT PRO battery packs.

It can take up to 5 hours to charge a battery. The WORKABOUT PRO intelligent

charging system protects the battery from over-charging by terminating the charge

process when the battery is at maximum capacity.

Note: Refer to “Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time” on page 39

for additional information about the battery.

Important: To avoid damaging the battery, chargers will not begin the charge

process until the battery temperature is between 0° C to 45 °C

(32° F to 113° F).

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

Switching The Hand-Held On And Off

3.4 Switching The Hand-Held On And Off

Switching On The WORKABOUT PRO

•

Press and hold down the [ENTER/ON] key for at least one second.

•

When the LED flashes green, release the [ENTER/ON] button.

The startup Today screen is displayed.

Note: If the WORKABOUT PRO is in suspend state, pressing [ENTER/ON] key

‘wakes’ the unit from this state. The screen in which you were working

before the computer entered suspend state is displayed.

Switching Off The WORKABOUT PRO (Suspend)

Important: Keep in mind that turning off the WORKABOUT PRO does not

result in a complete reboot; rather, the unit enters a power-saving,

“suspend” state. When the unit is turned on from suspend state,

operation resumes within a few seconds.

To switch off the WORKABOUT PRO:

•

Press the [BLUE] key, and then press the [ENTER/ON] key.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

The Keyboards

3.5 The Keyboards

3.5.1 The WORKABOUT PRO C Keyboard

Arrow

Keys

Scan

Key

Scan

Key

Contrast

Key

Display

Backlight Key

Blue

Key

Orange

Key

Figure 3.5 The Keys

WORKABOUT PRO C units are designed with a 55-key alphanumeric keyboard.

Along with the standard keyboard keys, these units are equipped with an

[ORANGE] and a [BLUE] modifier key to provide access to additional keys and

system functions. These functions are colour coded in orange and blue print above

the keyboard keys.

Note: Almost all keys can be reprogrammed to suit your requirements.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

The WORKABOUT PRO S Keyboard

3.5.2 The WORKABOUT PRO S Keyboard

Scan Key

Arrow Keys

Scan Keys

Scan Key

FN/Blue Key

ALPHA/Orange

Key

Display

Backlight Key

3.5.3 Modifier Keys

The [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [ORANGE] and [BLUE] keys are modifier keys.

Pressing a modifier key changes the function of the next key pressed. For example,

on a WORKABOUT PRO C, a square bracket is printed in orange print above the

[4] key. Pressing the [ORANGE] key followed by the [4] key displays a square

bracket rather than the number 4.

The [SHIFT], [CTRL] and [ALT] keys operate like a desktop keyboard except that

they are not chorded (two keys held down simultaneously). The modifier key must

be pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

Activating Modifier Keys & The Shift-State Indicator Icon

3.5.3.1 Activating Modifier Keys & The Shift-State Indicator Icon

When a modifier key is pressed, it is represented in the shift-state indicator icon in

the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen, making it easier to determine whether or

not a modifier key is active. If the shift-state indicator icon is not visible (you can

only see the soft keyboard icon), you may need to take a few steps to display the

shift-state indicator icon.

•

Tap on Start>Settings followed by the Buttons icon.

Tap on the One Shots tab at the bottom of the screen.

Tap in the check box next to Show modifier key state to display the

shift-state indicator icon.

Shift-State Indicator Icon replaces

Soft Keyboard Icon.

Soft Keyboard Icon

Figure 3.6 Shift-State Indicator Icon

3.5.3.2 Locking Modifier Keys

Note: The locking behaviour of the modifier keys can be changed so that, for

example, pressing a modifier key once will lock the key ‘on’. Refer to

“One Shots” on page 104 for details. Note too that by default, the

[ORANGE] key is locked ‘on’ when pressed only once.

When a modifier key is locked ‘on’, it will remain active until it is pressed again to

unlock or turn it off.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

The Keys

To help you identify when a modifier key is locked ‘on’, the key is represented in

the shift-state indicator icon with a black frame around it.

Figure 3.7 Shift-State Indicator Icon – Locked Modifier Key

Once a modifier key is unlocked or turned off, it is no longer displayed in the

shift-state indicator icon.

3.5.4 The Keys

The [ALPHA] Key (WORKABOUT PRO S Only)

This key is used to access the alpha characters displayed in orange print above

numeric keys [1] through [9].

The [CAPS] Key (WORKABOUT PRO S Only)

When this key is pressed, uppercase alpha characters are displayed. Press

[ALPHA/ORANGE] [.] to activate this key.

The [SHIFT] Key (WORKABOUT PRO C Only)

The [SHIFT] key is used to display uppercase alpha characters and provide access to

the symbols above the numeric keys. You can lock this key ‘on’ so that when you

press an alpha key, an upper case character is displayed. When you press a numeric

key, the associated symbol on the numeric key is displayed on the screen.

If you press [BLUE] [SHIFT], the [SHIFT] key acts as a [CAPS] key, displaying

uppercase characters. In this state, if you type a numeric key, the number rather than

the symbol above it is displayed. Press [BLUE] [SHIFT] again to turn the [CAPS]

function off.

The Arrow Keys

The Arrow keys are located on the grey, circular key at the top of the keyboard,

directly below the display. The arrow keys move the cursor around the screen–up,

down, left and right. The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that

indicates where the next character you type will appear.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

The Keys

The [BKSP/DEL] Key

The [BKSP] key (sometimes referred to as destructive backspace) moves the cursor

one character to the left, erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke.

The [DEL] key ([BLUE] [BKSP]) erases the character at the cursor position.

The [CTRL] And [ALT] Keys

The [CTRL] and [ALT] keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are

application dependent.

The [TAB] Key

Typically, the [TAB] key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward.

The [ESC] Key

Generally, this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu, dialog

box or activity and return to the previous one.

The [SPACE] Key

Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters. In a Windows dialog

box, pressing the [SPACE] key enables or disables a checkbox.

The [SCAN] Keys

Pressing either of the [SCAN] keys–the two yellow keys situated in upper-left and

upper-right corners of the keyboard–activates the scanner beam. For units that do

not have internal scanners, these keys can be remapped to serve other functions.

The Function Keys–[F1] to [F10]

Function keys [F1] to [F10] perform special, custom-defined functions. These keys

are accessed by pressing [BLUE] followed by numeric keys [1] to [10]. They can be

used with the Windows Mobile 5.0 operating system or another application. Keep in

mind that the following function keys are used by the Windows Mobile 5.0

operating system: [F1] - softkey 1, [F2] - softkey 2, [F6] - volume up, and [F7] -

volume down.

Function keys [F1], [F2], [F5] and [F6] labelled in grey boxes next to the [TAB],

[ALT], [ESC] and [CTRL] keys allow you to remap these keys for your application.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

The WORKABOUT PRO S – Accessing Alpha Keys

The Macro Keys–[M1] to [M3] (WORKABOUT PRO C Only)

Macro keys [M1] to [M3] contain up to 20 programmable characters (“positions”)

and executable keys. These keys are accessed by pressing [ORANGE] followed by

alpha keys [O], [P] or [Q]. When pressed, the macro key executes a custom-defined

string of characters, including executable keys.

3.5.5 The WORKABOUT PRO S – Accessing Alpha Keys

Because the WORKABOUT PRO S provides a numeric keypad, you’ll need to take

a few extra steps to access the alphabetic characters on this type of keyboard.

3.5.5.1 Choosing A Single Alpha Character

The examples below illustrate how to access, A, B and C, all of which are printed in

orange characters above the numeric key [2].

Important: The letters you choose appear in the softkey bar, providing a

visual indicator of which letter will be displayed on the screen.

To choose the letter a:

•

Press the [ALPHA/ORANGE] key, and press the numeric key [2].

Note: To choose the second, third or fourth alpha character assigned to a

numeric key, you may want to lock the [ALPHA/ORANGE] key ‘on’. By

default, the [ALPHA/ORANGE] key is locked ‘on’ when pressed once.

However, depending on how your unit is set up in the ‘One Shots’ tab, you

may find that you need to press the [ALPHA/ORANGE] key twice to lock

it ‘on’. Refer to “One Shots” on page 104 for details.

To choose the second letter in the sequence—in this example, the letter b:

•

Lock the [ALPHA/ORANGE] key ‘on’. A shift-state indicator icon in the

softkey bar represents the orange key with a black frame around it to indi-

cate that this key is locked ‘on’.

•

Press numeric key [2] twice to display the letter b.

To choose the third letter in the sequence—in this example, the letter c:

•

Lock the [ALPHA/ORANGE] key ‘on’.

Press numeric key [2] three times to display the letter c.

Note: Keep in mind that there is a timeout if you pause for one second

between key presses when selecting the second, third or fourth letters

on a key. For example, suppose you want to type the letter ‘c’–you’d need

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

Creating Uppercase Letters

to press the [2] key three times. With the [ALPHA/ORANGE] key locked

‘on’, if you press [2] twice and then pause between key presses for 1 sec-

ond, the letter ‘b’ will be selected automatically.

3.5.5.2 Creating Uppercase Letters

To display capital letters, you need to first activate the [CAPS] key. You’ll find this

key in orange print above the [.] (period) key.

•

Press [ALPHA/ORANGE] followed by the [.] (period) key to turn on the

[CAPS] key.

All alpha keys are displayed in uppercase until you press [ALPHA/ORANGE] [.]

again to switch the [CAPS] key off.

3.5.5.3 Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters

•

Lock the [ALPHA/ORANGE] key ‘on’.

Each time you press a numeric key from [2] through [9], an alpha character will be

displayed on the screen. Remember that you can refer to the softkey bar for a visual

indication of which alpha key will be displayed on the screen.

Important: Once you have finished typing alpha characters, remember to

turn off or unlock the [ALPHA/ORANGE] key. Check the

shift-state indicator icon (refer to Figure 3.7 on page 33) to make

to make certain that the key is turned off.

3.5.6 The Keypad Backlight

The intensity of the keypad backlight can be configured using the Backlight icon

accessed by tapping on Start>Settings. Refer to “Backlight” on page 122 for details

about this option.

3.6 The Display

3.6.1 Adjusting The Backlight

The display backlight can be adjusted using the keyboard.

•

Press the Backlight key [ ] to cycle from the lightest to darkest settings,

and then back to lightest. Press [ORANGE] [ ] to cycle backward from

darker to lighter.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

Aligning (Calibrating) The Touchscreen

To set the backlight intensity and the duration of time that the backlight will remain

on, you’ll need to choose the Backlight icon. Tap on Start>Settings and then, tap on

the System tab. Refer to “Backlight” on page 122 for details about the Backlight.

3.6.2 Aligning (Calibrating) The Touchscreen

If your touchscreen has never been aligned (calibrated) or if you find that the stylus

pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, follow the steps below.

•

Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab to display the Screen icon.

•

Tap on the Screen icon to display the Alignment tab.

•

Tap on the Align Screen button, and follow the directions on the screen to

align (calibrate) the screen.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

Indicators

Note: This window provides two additional tabs: ClearType and Text Size. Tap-

ping on the ClearType tab allows you to enable the ClearType option to

smooth screen font appearance. The Text Size tab allows you to increase

or decrease the size of the font displayed on the screen.

3.7 Indicators

The WORKABOUT PRO uses an LED (Light Emitting Diode), onscreen messages

and audio tones to indicate the various conditions of the hand-held, the batteries, the

scans and so on.

3.7.1 The LED

A single, two-coloured LED is located on the left side of the unit, just above the

[BKSP] key. When you press [ENTER/ON], the LED flashes green to indicate that

the unit has been powered up. The LED table below outlines the behaviour of the

LED while the unit is docked in a charger.

Keep in mind that the application running on the WORKABOUT PRO can dictate

how the LED operates. Review the documentation provided with your application to

determine LED behaviour.

If the unit is attached to an external power supply, the hand-held LED reflects the

battery charge status.

LED Behaviour

Charge Status

Solid Green

Charge complete.

Charge in progress. Battery charged to less than 80%

capacity.

Fast Blinking Green

Slow Blinking Green

Solid Red

Battery charged to greater than 80% of capacity.

Temperature outside charge range (0° C to 50° C).

Battery is not charging. Battery fault.

Blinking Red

Table 3.1 WORKABOUT PRO LED BEHAVIOUR

3.7.2 Audio Indicators

The audio speaker provides a variety of sounds when a key is pressed, a keyboard

character is rejected, scan input is accepted or rejected, an operator’s entry does not

match in a match field or the battery is low. To specify how you want your

WORKABOUT PRO to respond under various conditions, refer to “Sound &

Notifications” on page 119.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

Adjusting Speaker Volume On The WORKABOUT PRO C

The volume keys are located above [A] and [B] on WORKABOUT PRO C models

and to the left and right of the arrow key on WORKABOUT PRO S models. The

increase volume key is labelled with a plus symbol

key is labelled with a minus symbol

and the decrease volume

3.7.2.1 Adjusting Speaker Volume On The WORKABOUT PRO C

•

Lock the [BLUE] key ‘on’ and then, press [A]—the increase volume key or

[B]—the decrease volume key until the volume meets your requirements.

Remember to press the [BLUE] key again to turn it ‘off’.

•

3.7.2.2 Adjusting Speaker Volume On The WORKABOUT PRO S

•

Lock the [FN/BLUE] key ‘on’ and then, press the [RIGHT] arrow key—the

increase volume key or the [LEFT] arrow key—the decrease volume key

until the volume meets your requirements.

•

Remember to press the [FN/BLUE] key again to turn it ‘off’.

3.8 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time

Note: When the main battery is at 50% capacity, a ‘low battery’ warning is dis-

played. When the battery is at approximately 10% capacity, a ‘very low

main battery’ notification bubble appears.

Under normal operating conditions, fully charged Standard Batteries hold a charge

for up to 8 hours. High-Capacity batteries can hold a charge for up to 12 hours.

As Lithium Ion batteries age, their capacity decreases gradually, and they are

generally considered depleted after approximately 2 years of use (less than 60% of

original capacity remaining). Keep in mind however that heavy usage or operating

the unit at temperature extremes will shorten the battery life.

Lithium Ion batteries do not require conditioning cycles and the WORKABOUT

PRO battery system (including chargers) requires no user interaction to maintain

peak performance.

To maximize the run time of your batteries, consider the following:

•

The display backlight is the largest drain on the battery. Try to keep its

brightness as low as possible.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

Storing Batteries

•

The hand-held is ‘event’ driven—that is, when the unit is not in use, it

reverts to sleep mode (even when it appears to be running), saving battery

power. Events include a key press, touchscreen taps and scan triggers.

Power consumption is reduced if you avoid unnecessary events, and allow

the unit to sleep as much as possible.

•

The battery is a ‘smart battery’ with built-in intelligence.

Tapping on the Power icon under Start>Settings>System tab displays a

dialog box that provides detailed information about the battery status of the

main and backup batteries installed in your unit.

When the hand-held is switched off, it goes into a low-power, suspend state

but continues to draw a small amount of power from the battery. This

should not be an issue unless the unit is left in suspend state for more than a

week—for long-term storage, the battery should be removed from the unit.

3.8.1 Storing Batteries

Long term battery storage is not recommended. If storage is necessary:

•

Always try to use a ‘first-in first-out’ approach to minimize storage time.

Lithium Ion batteries age much faster at elevated temperatures. Store batter-

ies at temperatures between 0° C and 20° C.

•

Always charge batteries to at least 40 to 60% before storing them. Batteries

can be damaged by an over-discharge phenomenon that occurs when an

empty battery is stored for a long period of time such that the cell voltage

drops below a lower limit.

•

To minimize storage degradation, recharge stored batteries to 40 to 60%

every 4 or 6 months to prevent over-discharge damage.

A ‘never used’ Li-Ion battery that has been stored for 3 years may have

limited or no useful life remaining once put into service. Think of batteries

as perishable goods.

3.9 Uploading Data In A Docking Station

Important: Review the documentation provided with the user application installed

in your WORKABOUT PRO before performing data uploads.

The desktop docking station and quad docking station allow the WORKABOUT

PRO to link to an Ethernet network. They are typically used to upload transaction

data to a server computer when a radio link is not available.

Note: Refer to “Chargers And Docking Stations” on page 305 for more details.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

Bluetooth Radio

The desktop docking station can complete batch uploads to a Client USB connected

PC or server. An optional 10/100baseT Ethernet module is also available.

Unlike the desktop docking station, the quad docking station supports only TCP/IP

connections to a PC or server through a 10/100baseT Ethernet connection.

When a WORKABOUT PRO is properly inserted in a docking station, a dock icon

is displayed in the navigation bar at the top of the screen. The unit also detects the

presence of the Ethernet network.

3.10 Bluetooth Radio

Note: Integrated Bluetooth class II radios are standard on WORKABOUT

PRO C and S units. Keep in mind also that Bluetooth is available simulta-

neously with WAN and 802.11g on a single unit.

The WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with an on-board Bluetooth radio. This type of

radio enables short range data communication between devices. The Bluetooth also

provides the capability to use a Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone as a data modem,

exchanging information with other Bluetooth devices and providing network access.

Refer to “The Bluetooth GPRS Phone” on page 223 for setup details.

3.11 The SD/MMC Card—Adding Memory

To add additional non-volatile memory to your hand-held, you can insert a Secure

Digital/Multi-Media Card (SD/MMC) through the battery compartment.

3.11.1 Inserting The Card

•

Switch off the WORKABOUT PRO.

Remove the battery cover and the battery.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

General Maintenance

A hinged door at the top of the battery compartment protects the connectors.

Hinged SD door

SD/MMC

Card

Figure 3.8 Inserting the SD/MMC Card

•

Lift the hinged SD door by gently pulling upward on the metal tab.

Orient the SD/MMC card according to the legend stamped into the battery

well plastic.

•

Place the card in the slot with the card contacts down, and slide it inward

until it latches into place.

•

Swing the hinged door back into place.

To remove the card:

Gently press it inward slightly until the detent unlatches, and the card is

expelled from the slot.

•

3.12 General Maintenance

3.12.1 Caring For The Touchscreen

The top of the touchscreen is a thin, flexible polyester plastic sheet with a

conductive coating on the inside. The polyester can be permanently damaged by

harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches. Using sharp objects

on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic, or crack the internal conductive

coating.

The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen:

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know The WORKABOUT PRO

Cleaning The WORKABOUT PRO

•

sodium hydroxide,

concentrated caustic solutions,

benzyl alcohol, and

concentrated acids.

If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments, consider applying a disposable

screen protector (WA6110). These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly

but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen. When they become

scratched and abraded, they are easily removed and replaced.

3.12.2 Cleaning The WORKABOUT PRO

Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild

detergent to wipe the unit clean.

•

Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the hand-held unit.

Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The

plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble

in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in

strong alkaline solutions.

•

To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen, use isopropyl

alcohol.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WORKING W ITH W INDOWS M OBILE 5.0

4.1 Navigating In Windows Mobile 5.0 And Applications . . . . . . . . . . . 47

4.1.1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

4.2 Windows Mobile 5.0 Desktop–Today Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

4.2.1 Windows Mobile 5.0 Navigation Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

4.2.2 Today’s Date, Clock And Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

4.2.3 Ownership Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.2.4 E-mail Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.2.5 Task Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

4.2.6 Calendar Of Upcoming Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

4.2.6.1 Creating And Editing Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

4.2.6.2 Adding Reminder s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5

4.2.6.3 Using Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

4.2.6.4 Deleting Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

4.3 Start Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

4.3.1 Customising The Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

4.4 Managing Files And Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

4.4.1 Creating A New Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

4.4.2 Renaming A File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

4.4.3 Copying A File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

4.4.4 Deleting A File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

4.5 Using Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4.5.1 Pop-Up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4.6 The Softkey Ba r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2

4.7 Programs–Using Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

4.8 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

4.9 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

4.10 Entering Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

4.10.1 Soft Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.10.2 The Transcriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.10.3 Block Recognizer And Letter Recognizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Navigating In Windows Mobile 5.0 And Applications

4.1 Navigating In Windows Mobile 5.0 And Applications

Graphic user interfaces like Windows Mobile 5.0 for portable devices or desktop

Windows (2000, X P , e tc.) utilize ‘point and click’ navigation. On the

WORKABOUT PRO, this is accomplished using a touchscreen and stylus rather

than a mouse.

4.1.1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus

Note: If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately, it may

need recalibration. Refer to “Aligning (Calibrating) The Touchscreen”

on page 37.

A touchscreen is a standard feature on all WORKABOUT PROs. Each is equipped

with a stylus–a pointing tool that looks like a pen–stored in a slot at the top of the

unit. The stylus is used to select objects on the touchscreen.

•

Tap on the appropriate icon to open files and folders, launch applications

and programs, make selections, and so on.

4.2 Windows Mobile 5.0 Desktop–Today Screen

Volume Control

Connectivity Indicator

Battery Charge State

Start Button

Today’s Date

Navigation Bar

Clock

Owner Information

E-mail Notification

Tasks To Complete

Calendar-Upcoming Appointments

WORKABOUT PRO

Connection

Softkey Bar

The Today screen displays all your important information–tasks, unread e-mails and

upcoming appointments–all in one place. The Start menu provides access to

everything else you’ll need.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Windows Mobile 5.0 Navigation Bar

4.2.1 Windows Mobile 5.0 Navigation Bar

The navigation bar along the top of the screen provides icons that, when tapped,

open their associated programs.

Hotkeys

Volume Control

Start Button

Battery Capacity

Connectivity

Figure 4.1 Navigation Bar

Note: When a peripheral is attached to the tether or LIF port of the WORK-

ABOUT PRO, an associated icon is displayed briefly in the navigation

bar to indicate that the hand-held has recognized the connection.

Start Button

Tapping on the Start button displays the Start menu.

Connectivity

The Connectivity hotkey provides a shortcut to the Connections tab in the Settings

window. This tab provides access to Bluetooth, network, network card and internet

connection setups.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Today’s Date, Clock And Alarm

Volume Control

Tapping on this icon displays a sliding tab that allows you to adjust the speaker

volume or turn the speaker on and off.

Battery Capacity

Tapping on the Battery hotkey displays the Battery tab allowing you to view the

remaining battery capacity in the main battery and the backup battery.

4.2.2 Today’s Date, Clock And Alarm

This option displays the current date. If you need to adjust the date or set an alarm:

•

In the Today screen, tap on today’s date.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Today’s Date, Clock And Alarm

The Clock & Alarms screen is displayed.

•

Tap on the drop-down menu arrows to set the GMT, time and date.

An option to set the date and time for a visiting time zone is also available.

To set an alarm:

•

Tap on the Alarms tab.

You can set a maximum of three alarms.

•

Tap in the checkbox to enable an alarm.

Tap the day on which you want the alarm to go off–Sunday through Saturday.

Tap on the clock and set the time of the alarm. Keep in mind that it can only

be set for hours–minutes cannot be specified.

•

Tap on OK to save your changes.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Ownership Information

4.2.3 Ownership Information

This option allows you to add your personal information to the WORKABOUT

PRO. Some of this information will be displayed in the desktop Today screen.

•

Tap on Owner to display a screen in which you can type information.

•

Type your name, company name, address, telephone number and

e-mail address.

Note: You can type information using the WORKABOUT PRO keyboard, or you

can tap on the soft keyboard icon in the bottom right corner of the softkey

bar to display an onscreen keyboard.

The Ownership screen has two additional tabs–Notes where you can add any

pertinent, additional information and Options where you can specify whether you

want the desktop to display your ‘identification’ information or your ‘note’

information.

4.2.4 E-mail Notification

If you have any e-mail, it will be indicated in the Today desktop screen. To view

your e-mail, tap on the E-mail Notification option.

Refer to “Messaging–The Inbox” on page 283 for details about setting up your

Inbox. To synchronize this option with your PC, refer to “Synchronizing E-mail

With Outlook” on page 284.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Task Notification

4.2.5 Task Notification

Tasks lets you create lists of entries representing your responsibilities, upcoming

projects, and so on. If you’ve assigned any tasks, this option lets you know how

many active tasks you have.

Note: You can synchronize the Task Notification option using ActiveSync so that

any tasks are displayed on your WORKABOUT PRO as well as your PC.

Refer to “ActiveSync Options” on page 261 for details.

•

Tap on the Tasks option to display a list of tasks.

Creating A Task

•

Tap in the field labelled Tap here to add a new task. The text is replaced

with a blinking cursor. If you prefer to type the task using the soft keyboard,

tap on the soft keyboard icon in the softkey bar.

•

Type your task description.

Tap anywhere in the blank part of the screen, or press [ENTER] to add the

task to your list.

Editing A Task

•

Tap directly on a task in the task list to select it, and then tap Edit in

the softkey bar to display a detailed task screen where you can define

task characteristics.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Task Notification

Figure 4.2 Task Details Screen

Each of the nine items in this screen, when tapped, displays a dropdown menu

where you can choose from a list of options.

•

Once you’ve completed all the appropriate fields, tap on OK to save your

changes.

Note: You can also tap on the Notes tab to add additional information about the

task your are defining.

Deleting A Task

•

Press and hold the stylus on a task until a pop-up menu is displayed.

•

Tap on Delete Task.

Marking A Task As Completed

•

In the Tasks list, tap the checkbox next to the items that are completed.

Sorting Tasks

•

Tap on the Menu option in the lower-right corner of softkey bar, and tap on

Sort By.

You can choose from Status, Priority, Subject, Start Date or Due Date. The tasks

are arranged in the list according to the criterion you chose.

Limiting The Tasks Displayed In The Task Screen

•

Tap on Menu in the lower-right corner of softkey bar, and tap on Filter.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Calendar Of Upcoming Appointments

You can choose All Tasks, Recently Viewed, No Categories, Active Tasks, or

Completed Tasks. The tasks are displayed on the screen according to the preference

you chose.

4.2.6 Calendar Of Upcoming Appointments

This option is used to map out all your upcoming appointments, meetings and so on

in the weeks, months and years ahead.

Note: You can synchronize the Calendar using ActiveSync so that any meetings,

appointments and so on are displayed on your WORKABOUT PRO Today

screen as well as on your PC. Refer to “ActiveSync Options” on page 261

for details.

•

Tap on the Upcoming Appointments option in the Today screen, or tap on

Start>Calendar to display the calendar.

The default calendar display divides the time into one Week. You can choose to

leave the calendar as is, or you can tap on the Week option changing the layout to

reflect the Month, Year, Agenda or Day.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Creating And Editing Appointments

4.2.6.1 Creating And Editing Appointments

•

In the Calendar screen, tap on Menu in the softkey bar, and then tap on

New Appointment.

Figure 4.3 Appointment Detail Screen

In the Subject field, name the appointment.

•

Complete the remaining fields to reflect your appointment details.

Note: Refer to “Adding Reminders” on page 55 for details about reminders.

Refer to “Using Categories” on page 56 for information about this option.

•

Tap on OK to save your changes and close the screen.

4.2.6.2 Adding Reminders

•

Tap on Calendar in the softkey bar of the Today screen. Tap on the appoint-

ment for which you’d like a reminder. Tap on the appointment in the Calendar

screen. Tap on Edit in the softkey bar to display the Summary screen.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Using Categories

If you want to be reminded in advance of an appointment:

•

In the Reminder field, choose Remind me from the drop-down menu.

In the second Reminder field, tap on the number in the field to display a

dropdown menu where you can define a numeric value of 1, 5, 10, 15, 30.

Tap on minute(s) to display a dropdown menu from which you can choose

the time unit for your reminder–minute(s), hour(s), day(s) or week(s).

•

Tap OK to finish. You are returned to the view you were in before adding

the reminder.

Tap the appointment in the Calendar screen to display it in a summary

screen. The reminder is indicated by the small, ringing bell icon.

4.2.6.3 Using Categories

Categories help you organize and track the different types of data you keep on your

hand-held.

To assign an appointment to a category:

•

Tap on an appointment to display it in its Summary screen, and tap on the

Edit menu. The Appointment Details screen is displayed.

If necessary, use the scroll bar to display the Categories field.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Deleting Appointments

•

Tap the Categories field to display the Categories screen.

•

Tap in the checkbox next to the category to which you want to assign the

appointment.

Tap OK. Your appointment is assigned to the category or categories you chose.

Note: You can create a new category by tapping on New in the softkey bar at the

bottom of the screen.

4.2.6.4 Deleting Appointments

•

Tap and hold the stylus on the appointment you want to delete.

Tap on Delete Appointment in the pop-up menu.

4.3 Start Menu

To display the Start menu:

Tap on the Start button in the upper-left corner of the Windows Mobile 5.0

navigation bar.

•

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Customising The Start Menu

Start Button

Navigation Bar

Custom-chosen

programs

Most recently used

programs

Windows Mobile

command centre

•

Tap on the Start menu item with which you want to work.

4.3.1 Customising The Start Menu

You can choose the items you want to appear in the Start menu–items you use most often.

•

Tap on Start>Settings.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Managing Files And Folders

•

In the Personal tab, tap on the Menus icon.

•

Tap the checkboxes next to the items you want to appear in your Start

menu. When you’ve finished your selections, tap on OK.

4.4 Managing Files And Folders

Windows Mobile 5.0 files are stored in folders and sub-folders that are accessible

with File Explorer. You can open, save, rename, copy and paste files in the same

manner as you would on any desktop PC.

•

Tap on Start>File Explorer.

If this option is not available in the Start menu, tap on Start>Programs.

Tap on the File Explorer icon.

Tap to display

additional

Files stored here

automatically

storage/files

Tap to display

sorting options

Tap to move

back one level

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Creating A New Folder

4.4.1 Creating A New Folder

•

Tap Start>Programs>File Explorer.

Tap Menu>New Folder in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen.

Use the WORKABOUT PRO keyboard or the soft keyboard to assign a

name to the folder.

4.4.2 Renaming A File

•

Press and hold the stylus on the file you want to rename. A ring of dots is

displayed followed by a pop-up menu.

•

Tap Rename. The file name is highlighted. Type a new name.

4.4.3 Copying A File

•

Press and hold the stylus on the file you want to copy. A ring of dots is dis-

played followed by a pop-up menu.

•

Tap on Copy in the pop-up menu.

Navigate to the location where you want to copy the file.

Press and hold the stylus in a blank area of the screen—away from other

icons—until a pop-up menu is displayed.

•

Tap Paste to copy the file to the new location.

4.4.4 Deleting A File

•

Press and hold the stylus on the file or folder you want to delete until a

pop-up menu is displayed.

•

Tap Delete to remove the file.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Using Menus

4.5 Using Menus

In Windows Mobile 5.0, the menu is located in softkey bar at the bottom of

the screen.

Softkey Bar

To execute a command:

•

TaponMenu to display the commands associated with it, and then tap on the

command you want to execute.

4.5.1 Pop-Up Menus

Pop-up menus are available in many screens and programs. They offer quick access

to a group of useful commands in addition to those available in the menu bar. To

display a pop-up menu:

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

The Softkey Bar

•

Gently press and hold the stylus on the screen. A ring of dots is displayed

on the screen followed by a pop-up menu.

•

Tap on the command you want to execute.

4.6 The Softkey Bar

The WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with a softkey bar at the bottom of the screen.

It displays softkeys that allow you to access menus and commands. It also displays

the soft keyboard icon.

Soft keyboard

Soft keyboard icon

Softkey Bar

Softkeys

Softkey

Tapping on a softkey displays information associated with the softkey –for example,

in the sample screen above, the Menu softkey displays the commands associated

with Word Mobile. The New softkey allows you to create a new document.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

The Softkey Bar

The Soft Keyboard Icon

Tapping on the soft keyboard icon displays an onscreen keyboard you can use as an

alternative to the hand-held keyboard.

Shift-State Indicator Icon

The softkey bar can also display the shift-state indicator icon. This icon indicates

active modifier keys–[SHIFT], [ALT], [CTRL], [ORANGE] and [BLUE].

•

Tap on Start>Settings>Buttons>One Shots. Tap in the checkbox next to

Show modifier key state, to replace the soft keyboard icon with the

shift-state indicator icon.

Shift-state indicator icon

When a modifier key is pressed, it is displayed in the shift-state indicator icon. In

the example above, the [ORANGE] key was activated.

To distinguish a ‘locked’ modifier key–a key that has been locked ‘on’–from a

modifier key that is only active until the next key is pressed, ‘locked’ keys are

encircled in a black frame in the shift-state indicator icon. Refer to “Activating

Modifier Keys & The Shift-State Indicator Icon” on page 32 for details.

Note: You can still access the soft keyboard while the shift-state indicator icon is

displayed. Tapping on this icon displays the soft keyboard. Tapping on the

shift-state indicator icon again removes the soft keyboard.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Programs–Using Applications

4.7 Programs–Using Applications

•

Tap Start>Programs to display the programs installed on your WORK-

ABOUT PRO.

Figure 4.4 Program Screen Icons

Opening An Application

•

Tap on an icon in this screen to launch the associated program.

Minimizing An Application

•

Tap on the X button in the upper-right corner of an application screen to

minimize the application.

Note: Although it looks like a Close button, this button does not close the appli-

cation–it only minimizes it.

Closing An Application

•

Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab and then the Memory

icon–the Memory screen is opened.

•

Tap on the Running Program tab to view a list of running applications.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Settings

•

Tap on the application you want to shut down, and then tap on Stop. If you

want to shut down all running applications, tap on Stop All.

To display a program from this list on your screen, tap on Activate.

4.8 Settings

•

Tap Start>Settings to display the setting options for your hand-held.

Figure 4.5 Settings Icons

Settings are divided into three tabs–Personal, System and Connections. Refer to

Chapter 6: Settings for details about the options available to you.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Help

4.9 Help

Tapping on the Help option displays a screen in which you can tap on the topic

about which you require information. Keep in mind that this option is not always

available. If you see a question mark icon in screen, help descriptions are available.

4.10 Entering Text

Note: For additional information about tailoring text entry using the soft key-

board, the transcriber, the block recognizer and the letter recognizer, refer

to “Input” on page 112.

You can enter text using either the soft keyboard or the WORKABOUT PRO

keyboard. You can also use the Transcriber to handwrite information directly on the

touchscreen using your stylus.

•

Open an existing document or create a new one–tap Start>

Programs>Word Mobile and tap on New in the softkey bar to create a

new document.

If you’re using the WORKABOUT PRO keyboard to enter text, there are no special

steps. Just begin typing–the text, spaces, etc. will appear in the document.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Soft Keyboard

4.10.1 Soft Keyboard

The soft keyboard is laid out just like the keypad on a PC keyboard. By tapping the

stylus on letters and modifier keys like the [SHIFT] key, you can enter text in a

document.

If the soft keyboard is not already displayed:

•

Tap on the soft keyboard icon in the softkey bar.

Tap on the letters in the keyboard to enter text in your document.

To switch to a numeric keyboard:

•

Tap on the 123 key in the upper-left corner of the soft keyboard.

Tap on this key again to return to the standard keyboard.

4.10.2 The Transcriber

To access the Transcriber, with your document opened:

•

Tap on the arrow next to the keyboard icon, and choose Transcriber from

the pop-up menu.

Review the introductory screen. It provides some shortcut symbols you can

draw on your screen to work with the Transcriber.

When you’ve finished reading the introductory screen, tap OK.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

The Transcriber

The Transcriber menu and icon bars are displayed at the bottom of the document.

Transcriber icon

Figure 4.6 Transcriber Screen

Use your stylus to write a few words anywhere on the screen.

•

After a few seconds, your words are recognized (or not) and are transcribed into

typed text.

Note: Character recognition is more successful if you write using large letters.

Editing Text Within The Transcriber

With your document open, make certain that you are in transcriber mode–the

Transcriber icon should be displayed in the lower-right corner of the softkey bar.

•

Double-tap to select a word or triple-tap to select a paragraph, or

Draw a line through the text you want to select and wait a few seconds until

the Transcriber highlights the text.

•

Once the text is highlighted, write the new text that is to replace the high-

lighted information, or

Press and hold the stylus on the selected text to display a pop-up menu.

Choose Cut, Copy, Paste or Clear (delete).

Note: You can also use the softkey bar tools or the shortcuts listed in the intro-

ductory screen to help you edit a document within the Transcriber.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Block Recognizer And Letter Recognizer

4.10.3 Block Recognizer And Letter Recognizer

While the Transcriber attempts to recognize natural handwriting and transcribe it,

Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer attempt to teach you how to conform your

handwriting to what the hand-held can recognize.

Block Recognizer

•

Open a document, and tap on the arrow next to the input icon. Choose

Block Recognizer.

Recognizer Icon Bar

Input Icon

Input Panel

There are two points to remember when using Block Recognizer. First, limit your

writing to the Block Recognizer input panel–do not write in the body of the

document. Second, write only uppercase letters with your stylus.

•

Tap on the ? icon in the Recognizer Icon Bar to display the Character Rec-

ognizer screen. This screen provides a visual demonstration of how to enter

letters that will be recognized. Tap on a character in the soft keyboard for a

demonstration of how to form a recognizable letter.

•

In the Block Recognizer panel, write letters to the left (abc) and numbers to

the right (123) on the input panel. Remember to write using uppercase let-

ters–they will be printed on the screen as lowercase unless you follow the

step below to create an uppercase letter.

•

To create an uppercase character, draw a line straight up the ‘abc’ panel.

Use the Recognizer Icon Bar to move around the screen, add spaces, special

characters, and so on.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 5.0

Block Recognizer And Letter Recognizer

Letter Recognizer

•

Open a document, and tap on the arrow next to the input icon. Choose

Letter Recognizer.

Recognizer Icon Bar

Input Icon

Input Panel

There are two points to remember when using Letter Recognizer. First, limit your

writing to the Letter Recognizer Input Panel–do not write in the body of the

document. Second, write only lowercase letters with your stylus.

•

Tap on the ? icon in the Recognizer Icon Bar to display the Character Rec-

ognizer screen. This screen provides a visual demonstration of how to enter

letters that will be recognized. Tap on a character in the soft keyboard for a

demonstration of how to form a recognizable letter.

•

To create an uppercase character, write a lowercase letter on the left side

(ABC) of the input panel.

To create a lowercase character, write a lowercase letter in the middle (abc)

of the input panel.

Write numbers on the right side (123) of the input panel.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONNECTING T O A LAN W ITH 802.11

5.1 Installing The 802.11g Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

5.2 Configuring Y o ur Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 3

5.3 Setting Up A RA2041 Radio–Summit Client Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 3

5.3.1 Assigning The IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 3

5.3.2 Using The SCU To Connect To The WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 4

5.4 SCU Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 7

5.4.1 Main Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 7

5.4.2 Config Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 8

5.4.2.1 SCU Security Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

5.4.2.2 EAP Credentials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

5.4.2.3 ThirdPartyConfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

5.4.3 Global Settings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 3

5.4.4 Status Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 5

5.4.5 Diags Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

5.5 Setting Up A RA2040 CF Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

5.5.1 Adding A New Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

5.5.2 Network Authentication Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

5.5.2.1 IEEE 802.1x Network Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

5.5.3 Deleting A Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Installing The 802.11g Radio

5.1 Installing The 802.11g Radio

Psion Teklogix provides two types of 802.11g Compact Flash (CF) wireless LAN

radio cards for the WORKABOUT PRO: the RA2040 and the RA2041. Both

models are Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum radios.

The 802.11g CF card is easily installed in the WORKABOUT PRO. An instruction

sheet is enclosed with each Psion Teklogix 802.11g radio to walk you through the

installation steps.

5.2 Configuring Your Radio

If your WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with a RA2041 CF radio, follow the steps

under Section 5.3, “Setting Up A RA2041 Radio–Summit Client Utility” to set up

this type of radio for communication with a wireless LAN.

If your hand-held is equipped with a RA2040 CF radio, follow the steps outlined

under the heading Section 5.5, “Setting Up A RA2040 CF Radio” beginning on

page 86. Keep in mind also that for this type of radio, the radio connection dialog

boxes provide detailed Help files. If you need additional help while navigating the

radio setup, tap on the question mark icon in the upper-right corner of each

connection dialog box.

5.3 Setting Up A RA2041 Radio–Summit Client Utility

This section describes the Summit Client Utility (SCU). The SCU provides the

utilities you will need to configure the Summit 802.11g Compact Flash radio

module, model number RA2041 so that it can communicate through a wireless LAN

effectively and securely.

5.3.1 Assigning The IP Address

Before launching the SCU, you need to configure the method by which the IP

address will be obtained.

•

Tap on Start>Settings>Connections>Wireless Power.

In the Wireless Power dialog box, tap on the Settings button.

In the Configure Wireless Networks dialog box:

•

Tap on the Network Adapters tab, and tap on Summit WLAN Adapter in

the adaptor list.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Using The SCU To Connect To The WLAN

The Summit WLAN Adapter dialog box is displayed. You have two options:

•

Tap on Use server-assigned IP address to have an address assigned auto-

matically, or

If you want to use a particular IP address, tap on Use specific IP address,

and type the preferred address.

If you tap on the Name Servers tab, you can statically configure the DNS

servers; however, if you use DHCP for IP address assignment, DNS is

usually supplied by the same server that supplied the IP addresses.

5.3.2 Using The SCU To Connect To The WLAN

This section provides a quick set of steps to create a profile (referred to as a config).

Detailed information about each of the SCU tabs – Main, Config, Status, Diags and

Global Settings – is provided under Section 5.4, “SCU Tabs” beginning on page 77.

To launch the SCU so that your hand-held can connect to a wireless LAN:

•

Tap on Start>Programs, and then tap on the SCU icon.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Using The SCU To Connect To The WLAN

•

Tap on the Config tab.

•

Tap on New to define a new config.

Type a name for your configuration using any alpha-numeric combination

to uniquely identify this config.

•

Tap on OK to return to the Config tab.

Tap on Commit to save the config name.

When a pop-up message indicates that your configuration will be saved, tap

on OK.

To configure the SSID for the network to which you want to associate:

•

Type an SSID in the text box to the right of SSID. This field is limited to 32

characters.

•

Tap on Commit and then, in the pop-up message, tap on OK to save your

SSID setting.

Important: To learn more about the other options available in the radio

attributes list, refer to “Config Tab” beginning on page 78.

To configure authentication:

•

Tap on the EAP type dropdown menu, and choose the appropriate type of

authentication – LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP-MSCHAP, and PEAP-GTC.

•

Next, tap on the Credentials button, and type credentials for IEEE 802.1X

EAP types.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Using The SCU To Connect To The WLAN

Important: Refer to “SCU Security Capabilities” on page 80 for details about

security settings. Additional EAP details are described in “EAP

Credentials” on page 82.

To configure encryption:

•

Tap on the Encryption dropdown menu, and choose the appropriate type of

encryption – Manual WEP, Auto WEP, WPA PSK, WPA TKIP,

WPA2 PSK, WPA2 AES, and CCKM TKIP.

If you choose Manual WEP, WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK:

•

Tap on the WEP/PSK Keys button. For Manual WEP, choose up to four

static WEP keys. For PSK, type an ASCII passphrase or hex PSK.

Configure any other settings that are supplied by the network administrator

for the SSID to which you will associate.

Make certain that you tap on Commit following each change.

Once you’ve completed the configuration:

•

Tap the Main tab. Tap on the Active Config button – your new config will

be listed in the dropdown menu.

When you tap on the config you created, the RA2041 radio module attempts to con-

nect to the network using the following steps:

- Associate to the SSID.

- Authenticate to the network.

- If EAP authentication is being used, derive dynamic encryption keys.

- If DHCP is being used by the network, obtain an IP address.

If the RA2041 is not connecting properly:

•

Tap on the Status tab.

The Status dialog box lists the IP and MAC address, and indicates the current state

of the radio, the signal strength, channel and so on.

You can also use the Status screen for DHCP renewal and ICMP Echo Requests

(Pings).

Important: For details about the Status dialog box, refer to “Status Tab” on

page 85.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

SCU Tabs

5.4 SCU Tabs

This section provides a detailed description of each of the tabs available in the SCU

– Main, Config, Status, Diags and Global Settings.

5.4.1 Main Tab

The Main tab is displayed when you tap on the Start>Programs>SCU icon.

•

Enable/Disable Radio: Enables or disables the radio. This a toggle button;

when the radio is enabled, this button reads Disable Radio, and when the

radio is disabled, the button reads Enable Radio.

Active Config: Lists the name(s) of the active configuration profile(s)

which are referred to as configs. When a config is chosen from the Active

Config dropdown menu, the settings for that config become active.

If ThirdPartyConfig is selected, after the WORKABOUT PRO goes

through a power cycle, WZC is used for configuration of the radio. See

“ThirdPartyConfig” on page 82 for details.

•

Association Status: Indicates if the radio is associated to an access point. If

this is not the case, Association Status indicates the radio status.

Software Version: This field displays the version of the device driver and

the SCU that are running on the WORKABOUT PRO.

About Box: This box provides information about the SCU.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Config Tab

5.4.2 Config Tab

The Config tab allows you to define radio and security settings that are stored in the

registry as part of the configuration profile or config.

The config you create and save is listed in the Active Config dropdown menu in the

Main tab. You can define up to 20 configs.

Radio

Attributes

•

Config: Used to choose the config to be viewed or edited. If ThirdParty-

Config is chosen, after the WORKABOUT PRO goes through a power

cycle, WZC is used for configuration of the radio.

•

Rename: Allows you to assign a config name.

Delete: Deletes the config unless it is currently active.

New: Allows you to create a new config with default settings and assign it

a name.

•

Commit: Saves all changes.

Radio Attributes: Lists radio attributes. These attributes can be individu-

ally chosen from this menu. When an attribute is chosen, an associated

list of options is displayed where you can assign new settings or view

existing settings.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Config Tab

The following table describes the options in the Radio Attributes dropdown menu:

Radio

Description

Value

Default

Attribute

Name of config (configura-

tion profile). Use Rename

button to change name.

Config

Maximum of 32 characters.

None

Service set identifier (SSID)

SSID

for WLAN to which the radio Maximum of 32 characters.

connects.

None

Name assigned to radio &

Client Name WORKABOUT PRO into

which it is installed.

Maximum of 16 characters.

CAM: Constantly awake.

Maximum: Maximum power

savings.

Power Save Power save mode for radio.

Fast

Fast: Fast power save mode.

Max: Maximum defined for

current regulatory domain.

Measured in mW: 50,30,10, 1.

Tx Power

Bit Rate

Maximum transmit power.

Max

Auto

Auto: Rate automatically

Used by radio when interact- negotiated with access point.

ing with WLAN access point. Rates in Mbps: 1, 2, 5.5, 6.9

11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54.

B rates only: 1, 2, 5.5, & 11

Mbps.

G rates only: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24,

Used by 802.11g when inter- 36, 48, and 54 Mbps.

BG rates

Radio Mode

acting with access point.

BG rates full: All B and G

optimized

rates.

BG rates optimized: 1, 2, 5.5,

6, 11, 24, 36 & 54 Mbps.

802.11 authentication type

used when associating with

access point.

Open, shared-key, or LEAP

(Network-EAP).

Auth Type

EAP Type

Open

None

Extensible Authentication

Protocol type used for

802.1X authentication to

access point.

None, LEAP, EAP-FAST,

PEAP-MSCHAP

– To use EAP-TLS, you must

use WZC.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Config Tab

Radio

Description

Value

Default

Attribute

User: Username or

Domain/Username (up to 64

characters).

Authentication credentials

for the selected EAP type.

Credentials

None

Password: up to 64 characters.

For PEAP: CA Cert–CA

server certificate filename.

Refer to “EAP Credentials”

on page 82.

Off, Manual WEP, Auto WEP

(generated during EAP

authentication), WPA-PSK,

WPA-TKIP, WPA2-PSK,

WPA2-TKIP, WPA2-AES,

CCKM-TKI P .

Type of encryption used to

protect transmitted data.

Encryption

None

For Manual WEP: Up to four

static WEP keys.

For PSK: ASCII passphrase or

hex PSK.

•

EAP-Type & Encryption: Security settings. These settings allow you to

enhance the security of data across the wireless LAN. Refer to “EAP Cre-

dentials” on page 82 and “SCU Security Capabilities” on page 80 for

details about these settings.

5.4.2.1 SCU Security Capabilities

The SCU provides integrated security to protect transmitted data as well as the hand-

held and wireless WAN infrastructure that transmit and receive data.

A foundational element of the IEEE 802.11i WLAN security standard is IEEE

802.1X and a critical application on a mobile device is an 802.1X supplicant. This

supplicant provides an interface between the radio and the operating system and

supports the authentication and encryption elements required for 802.11i, also

known as Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 (WPA2), as well as predecessors such as WPA

and WEP. Summit software includes an integrated supplicant that supports a broad

range of security capabilities, including:

•

802.1X authentication using pre-shared keys or an EAP type, required for

WPA2 and WPA.

•

Data encryption and decryption using WPA2 AES, WPA TKIP or WEP.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Config Tab

Common EAP types include:

•

EAP-TLS: Uses the same technology as a follow-on to Secure Socket

Layer (SSL). It provides strong security, but relies on client certificates for

user authentication.

•

PEAP: Provides secure user authentication by using a TLS tunnel to

encrypt EAP traffic. Two different inner methods are used with PEAP:

•

EAP-MSCHAPV2, resulting in PEAP-MSCHAP: This is appropriate

for use against Windows Active Directory and domains.

EAP-GTC, resulting in PEAP-GTC: This is for authentication with one-

time passwords (OTPs) against OTP databases such as SecureID.

•

LEAP: Is an authentication method for use with Cisco WLAN access

points. LEAP does not require the use of server or client certificates. LEAP

supports Windows Active Directory and domains but requires the use of

strong passwords to avoid vulnerability to offline dictionary attacks.

EAP-FAST: Is a successor to LEAP and does not require strong passwords

to protect against offline dictionary attacks. Like LEAP, EAP-FAST does

not require the use of server or client certificates and supports Windows

Active Directory and domains.

Note: PEAP and EAP-TLS require the use of Windows facilities for the configu-

ration of digital certificates.

SCU EAP Types

The following EAP types are supported by the integrated supplicant and can be

configured in SCU: PEAP-MSCHAP, PEAP-GTC, LEAP and EAP-FAST. With

each of these four types, if authentication credentials are not stored in the config,

you will be prompted to enter credentials the first time the radio attempts to

associate to an access point that supports 802.1X (EAP).

Consider the following when configuring one of the EAP types:

•

PEAP-GTC: SCU supports static (login) passwords only.

LEAP: Strong passwords are recommended.

EAP-FAST: SCU supports automatic, not manual, PAC provisioning.

EAP-TLS will work with a RA2041 radio module when Windows Zero Config

(WZC) rather than the SCU is used to configure the type. With WZC, the native

Windows supplicant instead of the SCU integrated supplicant is used.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Config Tab

5.4.2.2 EAP Credentials

Keep the following in mind when defining security settings:

•

If the credentials specified in the config are incorrect and that config is used,

the authentication fails without an error message; you will not be prompted

to enter correct credentials.

•

If the credentials are not specified in the config, when the radio tries to asso-

ciate using that config, you will be prompted to enter the credentials.

When prompted, you can enter valid credentials, enter invalid credentials,

or cancel the operation.

•

If you enter valid credentials and tap OK, the radio will associate and

authenticate.

•

If you enter invalid credentials and tap on OK, the radio will associate

but will not authenticate; you will be prompted again to enter creden-

tials.

•

If you tap on Cancel or clear the credentials fields and tap on OK, the

radio will not attempt to associate with that config until you perform

one of the following actions (while the config is the active config):

•

Cause the WORKABOUT PRO to go through a power cycle or

suspend/resume.

Disable and enable the radio, or tap the Reconnect button on the

Diags windows.

Modify the config, and tap on Commit.

Alternatively, you can choose another config as the active config and then switch

back to the config for which EAP authentication was cancelled.

5.4.2.3 ThirdPartyConfig

If you choose to configure ThirdPartyConfig, the SCU will work with the operating

system’s Windows Zero Config (WZC) to configure radio and security settings for

the CF radio installed in the unit.

Choosing this config means that WZC must be used to define the following radio

and security options: SSID, Auth Type, EAP Type and Encryption.The SCU settings

for ThirdPartyConfig include: Client Name, Power Save, Tx Power, Bit Rate and

Radio Mode. These SCU settings along with SCU global settings and the WZC

settings will be applied to the radio module.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Global Settings Tab

5.4.3 Global Settings Tab

The Global Settings tab allows you to define radio and security settings that apply to

all configs (profiles), along with settings that apply specifically to the SCU.

The Global Settings in the table below can be edited in the SCU:

Global Setting

Description

Value

Default

Activates three CCX features:

AP-assisted roaming, AP-speci-

fied maximum transmit power &

radio management.

CCX features

On, Off

Off

Directory where certificates for Valid directory path up Dependent

Cert Path

EAP authentication are stored.

to 64 characters.

on device.

Packet is fragmented when

packet size (in bytes) exceeds

threshold.

Integer from 256 to

2346.

Frag Thresh

G Shortslot

2346

802.11g short slot timing mode. Auto, Off, On

Auto

On - SCU as well as EAP

authentication dialog boxes hide

On, Off

Hide Passwords

Off

passwords, WEP keys and other

sensitive information.

LED

Available only with MCF10G.

On, Off

Off

Type of radio preamble or head-

ers.

Preamble

Auto, Short, Long

Auto

Amount of data to be transmit-

ted on a ping.

Bytes: 32, 64, 128,

256, 512 & 1024

Ping Payload

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Global Settings Tab

Global Setting

Description

Value

Default

Amount of time in milliseconds

that passes without a response

before ping request is consid-

ered a failure.

Ping Timeout

Integer from 0 to

30000.

5000

Amount of time in milliseconds

Ping Delays ms between successive ping

requests.

Integer from 0 to

7200000.

1000

Amount by which second AP’s

RSSI must exceed the moving

average RSSI for the current AP

before the radio will attempt to

roam to a second AP.

dBm: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25,

30, 35

Roam Delta

Roam Period

Following an association or

roam scan (with no roam), the

number of seconds the radio

collects RSSI scan data before

considering roaming.

Seconds: 5, 10, 15, 20,

25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 10

55, 60

If RSSI from AP is less than

roam trigger value, radio per-

forms roam scan or probes for

an AP with stronger signal.

dBm: -50, -55, -60,

-70

Roam Trigger

RTS Thresh

-65, -70, -75

Packet size above which

RTS/CTS is required on link.

An integer from 0 to

2347

2347.

-On-Start on Main: On

startup, use main

antenna.

-On-Start on Aux: On

startup, use auxiliary

antenna.

Defines how to handle antenna

diversity when receiving data

from AP.

On-Start on

Main

RX Diversity

-Main only: Use main

antenna only.

-Aux only: Use auxil-

iary antenna only.

-Main only: Use main

Defines how to handle antenna antenna only.

diversity when transmitting data -Aux only: Use auxil- On

TX Diversity

WMM

to AP.

iary antenna only.

-On: Use diversity.

Use Wi-Fi Multimedia Exten-

sions, also know as WMM.

On, Off

Off

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Status Tab

5.4.4 Status Tab

The Status tab provides status information including IP address and MAC address

for the client radio, IP address and MAC address for the AP, signal strength,

channel, transmit power and data rate.

5.4.5 Diags Tab

Ping Address

Ping Results

Use the Diags tab as a troubleshooting tool. The functions are as follows:

•

(Re)Connect: Enables/Disables the radio, applies/reapplies current config

and tries to associate and authenticate to the wireless LAN, logging all

activity in the output area at bottom of the dialog box.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Setting Up A RA2040 CF Radio

•

Release/Renew: Obtains a new IP address through DHCP and logs all

activity in the output area.

Start Ping/Stop Ping: Starts a continuous ping to the address in the text

box next to this button. This a toggle button so when you tap on it, it

changes to Stop Ping. Closing this window or tapping on another button

also stops the ping.

•

Diagnostics: Attempts to connect or reconnect to an AP, and provides a

more detailed dump of data than if you used (Re)connect. The dump

includes the radio state, config settings, global settings and BSSID list

of APs. The SCU is saved to a file called _sdc_diag.txt in the Windows

directory.

5.5 Setting Up A RA2040 CF Radio

Note: If a RA2041 CF radio is installed in your unit, follow the setup instruction

in “Setting Up A RA2041 Radio–Summit Client Utility” on page 73.

Network (802.11) cards are used to connect to a wireless LAN. When a radio is

installed in your hand-held, a notification bubble is displayed listing the networks

(SSIDs) that have been located. You can tap on a network listed in the notification

bubble to connect to an existing network.

You can also choose to set up a new network. The steps in this section use the

Windows Mobile 5.0 operating system connection setup tools (Windows Zero

Config – WZC) to set up a network.

Note: A detailed, context sensitive Help File is available on your WORK-

ABOUT PRO. If you find that you’re unsure how to proceed at any point

during setup, just tap on the question mark icon in the navigation bar at

the top of the screen for further assistance.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Setting Up A RA2040 CF Radio

•

Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Wire-

less Power icon.

This dialog box lists the radios and their connection status – Available (enabled) or

Disabled. If the radio you want to set up is disabled, you’ll need to enable it before

you can set up the radio.

•

Highlight the radio you want to enable in the dialog box. Tap on Enable.

To display the Configure Wireless Networks dialog box so you can set up your radio:

Highlight the radio you want to set up, and tap on Settings.

•

This dialog box lists existing networks to which you can connect, and it allows you

to add a new network or modify the settings for an existing network.

•

In the Networks to access dropdown menu, choose All Available, Only

access points or Only computer-to-computer depending on the type of

network to which you want to connect.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Adding A New Network Setup

•

To choose a particular network listed in this dialog box, tap on the preferred

network, and then tap on the Connect softkey in the softkey bar at the

bottom of the dialog box.

Softkey

5.5.1 Adding A New Network Setup

•

To create a new network, tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab.

Tap on the Wireless Power icon. In the Wireless Power tab, tap on

Settings>Add new.

•

In the Network name field, type a network name. If a network was detected,

the network name is automatically entered and cannot be changed.

In the Connects to dropdown menu, choose what your network will use to

connect–Work or Internet.

To use an ad-hoc connection, enable This is a device-to-computer (ad-

hoc) connection.

Tap on Next to display the Configure Network Authentication dialog box.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Network Authentication Settings

5.5.2 Network Authentication Settings

Contact your network administrator for the appropriate authentication information.

Tap on the dropdown menu next to Authentication to display your options.

•

Authentication

802.11 supports four subtypes of network authentication services: Open, Shared,

WPA, and WPA-PSK. Under Open authentication, any wireless station can request

authentication. The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless station

sends an authentication management frame that contains the identity of the sending

station. The receiving station then sends back a frame that indicates whether it

recognizes the identity of the sending station.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Network Authentication Settings

Under Shared authentication, each wireless station is assumed to have received a

secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802.11 wireless

network communications channel.

Under WPA and WPA-PSK authentication, the use of 802.1x authentication is

required. For wireless networks without a Remote Authentication Dial-In User

Service (RADIUS) infrastructure, WPA supports the use of a preshared key. For

wireless networks with a RADIUS infrastructure, Extensible Authentication

Protocol (EAP) and RADIUS is supported.

Data Encryption

WEP (Wired-Equivalent Privacy) encryption prevents others from accidentally

accessing your network. If you are not using encryption, you can choose Disabled

from the dropdown encryption menu. Otherwise, leave this field as is.

Note: WEP cannot be disabled if you are using WPA or WPA-PSK authentication.

TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) is an encryption protocol included as part

of the IEEE 802.11 standard for wireless LANs. Designed to enhance WEP, TKIP

uses the original WEP encryption but ‘wraps’ additional code at the beginning and

end to encapsulate and modify it, encrypting each data packet with a unique

encryption key.

Network Key

This text box is used to specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent

10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the

access point.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Network Authentication Settings

•

To assign a Network key, uncheck the checkbox to the left of The key is

automatically provided.

Uncheck this option to

access Network Key &

Key Index fields.

Key Index

This field is used to identify the WEP key.

•

Choose a value from 1 to 4 in the dropdown menu next to this option.

Tap on the Next softkey to move to the next dialog box.

5.5.2.1 IEEE 802.1x Network Access Control

To enable increased security:

•

Tap in the checkbox next to Use IEEE 802.1x network access control.

The EAP dropdown menu lists the EAP type available on your system. The items in

this dropdown menu will vary depending on your network setup.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5: Connecting To A LAN With 802.11

Deleting A Network

Keep in mind also that some authentication protocols require that you select a

Certificate. By tapping on the Properties button, you will be able to choose a

Certificate.

•

Tap on Finish once you’ve completed the setup process.

5.5.3 Deleting A Network

Your WORKABOUT PRO keeps a record of each wireless network to which it

connects. The Wireless Networks box in the Wireless tab can get quite full.

To delete a network setup in the Configure Wireless Networks dialog box:

•

Tap and hold the stylus on the network connection you want to delete.

Choose Remove Settings from the pop-up menu.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETTINGS

6.1 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

6.2 App Launch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

6.3 Buttons Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

6.3.1 Up/Down Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

6.3.2 One Shots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

6.3.3 Keyboard Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

6.3.4 Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

6.3.5 Scancode Remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

6.3.6 Lock Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

6.4 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

6.4.1 Input Method Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

6.4.1.1 Word Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

6.4.2 Options–Additional Choices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

6.5 Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

6.6 Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

6.6.1 Start Menu Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

6.7 Owner Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

6.8 Sound & Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

6.8.1 Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

6.8.2 Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

6.9 Today Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

6.9.1 Appearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

6.9.2 Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

6.10 System Tab Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

6.11 About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

6.12 About Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

6.13 Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

6.13.1 Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

6.13.2 External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

6.13.3 Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 23

6.14 Certificate s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 24

6.14.1 Choosing A Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 25

6.15 Clock & Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 25

6.16 COM Port Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

6.17 Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

6.18 GPS – Global Positioning Syste m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 27

6.19 Manage Trigger s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 29

6.19.1 Trigger Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 29

6.19.1.1 Add And Edit Trigger Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

6.20 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 32

6.20.1 Main Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 33

6.20.2 Storage Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 33

6.20.3 Running Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 34

6.21 Power Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 34

6.21.1 Battery Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 34

6.21.2 Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 35

6.21.3 Battery Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 36

6.21.4 Card Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 36

6.21.5 Built-In Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 37

6.21.6 Suspend Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

6.21.6.1 Suspend Threshold And Estimated Battery Backup . . . . . 138

6.21.7 Wakeup Keys Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

6.22 Regional Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

6.23 Remove Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

6.24 Screen Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

6.25 Scanner Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

6.25.1 Decoded (Internal) Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

6.25.1.1 Options — Decoded (Internal) Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . 142

6.25.1.2 Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

6.25.1.3 Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options . . . . . . . . . . .1 44

6.25.1.4 Data Options — Decoded (Internal) Scanner . . . . . . . . .1 45

6.25.1.5 Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 46

6.25.1.6 Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 49

6.25.1.7 EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 49

6.25.1.8 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 50

6.25.1.9 UPC A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 50

6.25.1.10 UPC E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 51

6.25.1.11 UPC/EAN Shared Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 52

6.25.1.12 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 53

6.25.1.13 Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 54

6.25.1.14 MSI Plessey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 54

6.25.1.15 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 55

6.25.1.16 Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 56

6.25.1.17 RSS Cod e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 57

6.25.1.18 Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 57

6.25.1.19 PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 58

6.25.1.20 Micro PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 58

6.25.2 Decoded (HHP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

6.25.2.1 Options — Decoded (HHP) Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 59

6.25.2.2 Decoded (HHP) Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 59

6.25.2.3 Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 60

6.25.2.4 Trioptic Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 61

6.25.2.5 Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 61

6.25.2.6 EAN 13 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 62

6.25.2.7 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 63

6.25.2.8 UPC A Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 64

6.25.2.9 UPC E Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 64

6.25.2.10 UPC/EAN Shared Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 65

6.25.2.11 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 66

6.25.2.12 Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

6.25.2.13 MSI Plessey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

6.25.2.14 Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

6.25.2.15 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

6.25.2.16 Matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

6.25.2.17 IATA 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

6.25.2.18 Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 70

6.25.2.19 Telepen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

6.25.2.20 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology) . . . . . . . . . . 171

6.25.2.21 PosiCode (Reduced Space Symbology) . . . . . . . . . . 172

6.25.2.22 Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

6.25.2.23 TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

6.25.2.24 PDF-41 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 73

6.25.2.25 Micro PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

6.25.2.26 Code 16K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

6.25.2.27 Code 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

6.25.2.28 Codablock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

6.25.2.29 2D Data Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

6.25.2.30 2D QR Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

6.25.2.31 2D Maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

6.25.2.32 2D Aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

6.25.2.33 Postal: PlaNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

6.25.2.34 Postal: PostNE T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 77

6.25.2.35 Postal: Australian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

6.25.2.36 Postal: Canadian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

6.25.2.37 Postal: China . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

6.25.2.38 Postal: Japanese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

6.25.2.39 Postal: Kix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

6.25.2.40 Postal: Korea n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 79

6.25.2.41 Postal: Royal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

6.25.3 Decoded (Intermec ISCP ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 80

6.25.3.1 Options — Decoded (Intermec ISCP) Scanner . . . . . . . 180

6.25.3.2 Advanced Options — Decoded (Intermec ISCP) Scanne r . . 1 80

6.25.3.3 Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

6.25.3.4 Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

6.25.3.5 EAN 13 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

6.25.3.6 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

6.25.3.7 UPC A Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

6.25.3.8 UPC E Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

6.25.3.9 UPC/EAN Shared Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

6.25.3.10 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

6.25.3.11 Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

6.25.3.12 MSI Plessey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 89

6.25.3.13 Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 90

6.25.3.14 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 90

6.25.3.15 Matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 91

6.25.3.16 Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 92

6.25.3.17 Telepen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 93

6.25.3.18 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology) . . . . . . . . . . .1 93

6.25.3.19 PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 94

6.25.3.20 Micro PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 94

6.25.3.21 Codablock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 95

6.25.4 Imager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

6.25.4.1 Options – Imager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 95

6.25.4.2 Advanced Options – Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 97

6.25.4.3 Code 39 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 99

6.25.4.4 Code 128 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 99

6.25.4.5 EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 00

6.25.4.6 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 00

6.25.4.7 UPC A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 01

6.25.4.8 UPC E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 01

6.25.4.9 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 01

6.25.4.10 Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 01

6.25.4.11 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 02

6.25.4.12 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology) . . . . . . . . . . .2 02

6.25.4.13 Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 02

6.25.4.14 PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 02

6.25.4.15 Micro PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 03

6.25.4.16 2D Data Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 03

6.25.4.17 2D QR Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 03

6.25.4.18 2D Maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 03

6.25.4.19 2D Aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 03

6.25.4.20 Postal: PlaNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204

6.25.4.21 Postal: PostNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204

6.25.4.22 Postal: Australian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204

6.25.4.23 Postal: Japanese. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204

6.25.4.24 Postal: Korean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

6.25.4.25 Postal: Royal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

6.25.5 Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 05

6.25.5.1 Double Click Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

6.25.5.2 Display Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

6.25.6 Translations Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 07

6.25.6.1 Case Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

6.25.7 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 10

6.25.7.1 Port Replicator Port A (COM5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

6.25.7.2 Port Replicator Port B (COM6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

6.25.7.3 Port Replicator Port B (COM7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

6.26 Total Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

6.26.1 Creating A Backup Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

6.26.2 Restoring A Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

6.27 Connections Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 17

6.28 Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 18

6.29 Bluetooth Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 19

6.29.1 Bluetooth Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 19

6.29.2 Scanning For A New Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 20

6.29.3 Bluetooth COM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 21

6.29.4 Active Connections List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 22

6.29.5 About Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 23

6.29.6 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 23

6.30 Connections – Connecting To The Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 25

6.30.1 Modem Connection Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 26

6.30.1.1 Advanced Modem Setting s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 28

6.31 Wireless Power Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 31

6.31.1 Flight Mode – Disabling Wireless Components . . . . . . . . . . .2 32

6.31.2 Setting Up A Network Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 32

6.31.3 Network Adaptors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

6.31.4 Changing Network Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

6.31.5 VPN Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

6.31.6 Managing An Existing Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

6.31.6.1 Editing A Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

6.31.6.2 Changing A Connection Setting Name. . . . . . . . . . . . 236

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

6.31.7 Selecting A Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

6.31.8 Proxy Server Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

6.31.8.1 Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings . . . . . . . . . .2 39

6.32 Wireless Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

6.33 Wireless WAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

6.33.1 Softkey Bar Icon s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

6.33.2 Establishing A Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

6.33.3 Disconnecting From A Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

6.33.3.1 Shutting Down The Wireless W A N User Interface . . . . . .2 42

6.33.4 Advanced Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

6.33.4.1 Entering A PIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 42

6.33.4.2 Error States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 43

6.33.5 Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

6.33.5.1 Data Connection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 44

6.33.5.2 Security Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 48

6.33.5.3 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 49

6.33.5.4 Driver Mode Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 50

6.33.5.5 Modem Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251

6.33.6 SMS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

6.33.6.1 New SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

6.33.6.2 Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

6.33.6.3 Outbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254

6.33.6.4 SMS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Personal Settings

The Settings screen is divided into three tabs–Personal, System and Connections

•

Tap on Start>Settings to display this screen.

Figure 6.1 Settings Tabs

6.1 Personal Settings

The Personal tab allows you to tailor the general behaviour of your WORKABOUT

PRO such as defining input methods, Start menu options, owner information,

password assignment, sound specifications, and so on.

6.2 App Launch Keys

This icon allows you to map a key to an application so that you can then launch the

application from a single key-press.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

App Launch Keys

To assign an application key:

•

Tap the Add button.

•

Press the key you want to use to launch an application. (If an unsupported

key is pressed, a message appears on this screen letting you know.)

The cursor moves to the App field and a new screen is displayed where you can

choose the application to which you want to assign the application key. If you need

to, you can Browse through the information in your hand-held until you locate the

application you want to launch.

•

Once you’ve selected the file you want to map, tap on OK.

The cursor moves to the Data field. You can use this field if you need to define

special parameters to your application launch key. If you don’t want to assign any

parameters, you can leave the Data field blank. If, for example, you want to assign

an application launch key to launch the Word Mobile application, you can leave this

field blank. If you want to assign an application launch key that will open a specific

102 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Buttons Icon

document in the Word Mobile application, you need to browse to and choose that

document while the cursor is in the Data field.

•

Tap on OK.

•

If you need to Edit, Remove or Add another App Launch Key, you can do it

from this final screen. Otherwise, tap on OK to save you Application

Launch Key.

To launch the application you chose, press the application key you assigned.

6.3 Buttons Icon

•

Tap on this icon to display your options.

Note: The ‘Program Buttons’ option is not available on this unit.

6.3.1 Up/Down Control

Sliding the Delay before first repeat bar to the left decreases the delay between key

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

One Shots

repeats while sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat delay time.

Sliding the Repeat rate bar to the left slows the rate at which a key repeats when

pressed. Sliding the bar to the right increases the key repeat rate.

6.3.2 One Shots

The options in this tab allows you to determine how modifier keys on your

WORKABOUT PRO behave. For each modifier key–[ALT], [SHIFT], [CTRL],

[ORANGE] and [BLUE]–you have the following options in the dropdown menu:

Lock, OneShot, and OneShot/Lock.

Important: Once you’ve assigned a One Shot mode to a modifier key, you

need to tap on the OK button at the top of the tab to activate

your selection.

Lock

If you choose Lock from the dropdown menu, pressing a modifier key once locks it

‘on’ until you press the modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off.

OneShot

If you choose OneShot, the modifier key remains active only until the next key

is pressed.

104 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Keyboard Macro Keys

OneShot/Lock

OneShot/Lock allows you to combine these functions. When you choose this

option and you press the modifier key once, it remains active only until the next key

is pressed.

If you press the modifier key twice, it is locked ‘on’, remaining active until the

modifier key is pressed a third time to turn it ‘off’.

Show Modifier Key State

When you enable Show modifier key state, a shift-state indicator icon

replaces

the soft keyboard icon in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen. When a

modifier key is pressed, a square in this icon is highlighted. A ‘locked’ modifier key

is displayed in the shift-state indicator icon with a black frame around it.

6.3.3 Keyboard Macro Keys

A macro has 20 programmable characters (or “positions”). The macro keys can be

programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of

executable keys including [ENTER], [BKSP] and [DEL] ([BLUE]-[BKSP]),

function keys, and arrow keys.

Recording And Saving A Macro

You can program up to 15 macro keys.

•

In the Macro menu, highlight a macro key number–for example, macro 1 to

assign a macro to macro key [M1]. Tap on the Record button.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Keyboard Macro Keys

A Record Macro screen is displayed.

•

Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key. You can

type text and numbers, and you can program the function of special keys

into a macro.

When you’ve finished recording your macro sequence, tap on the

Stop Recording button.

A new screen–Verify Macro–displays the macro sequence you created.

•

Tap on the Save button to save your macro. Your macro key sequence is

listed in the Macro screen.

•

Tap on OK to save your macro key assignment.

Executing A Macro

•

Press the macro key to which you’ve assigned the macro. For example, if

you created a macro for macro key ‘1’, press [M1] ([ORANGE][O]) to

execute the macro.

Deleting A Macro

•

In the Macros tab, highlight the macro number you want to delete.

•

Tap on the Delete button.

106 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Unicode Mapping

6.3.4 Unicode Mapping

•

Tap on the Unicode Mapping tab to display this screen.

The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and

[CTRL] and [SHIFT] states to Unicode™ values. This tab shows the configured

Unicode character along with the Unicode value. For example, “a (U+0061)”

indicates that the character “a” is represented by the Unicode value “0061”, and so

on. Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexidecimal rather

than decimal values.

All user-defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order

of virtual key value, and then by order of the shift state. If a Unicode mapping is not

listed, the Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Scancode Remapping

Adding And Changing Unicode Values

Important: Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the

Unicode Mapping tab by tapping on [OK].

•

Tap on the Add/Change button.

•

Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list.

Position the cursor in the Unicode Mapping field, and type a Unicode

value for the highlighted key.

Note: To add a shifted state–[SHIFT] and/or [CTRL], tap on the checkbox next

to ‘SHIFT Pressed’ and/or ‘CTRL Pressed’.

Removing Unicode Values

•

In the Unicode Mapping tab, highlight the item you want to delete, and tap

the Remove button.

6.3.5 Scancode Remapping

A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard. Every

key has a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key, a function, or a macro.

Scancode Remapping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the

keyboard. A key can be remapped to send a virtual key (e.g. VK_F represents the

‘F’ key; VK_RETURN represents the [ENTER/ON] key, etc.), perform a function

(e.g. turn the scanner on, change volume/contrast, etc.) or run a macro.

108 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Scancode Remapping

There are three different tables of scancode mappings: the Normal table, the Blue

table and the Orange table. The Normal table defines unmodified key presses; the

Blue table defines key presses that occur when the [BLUE] modifier is on; the

Orange table defines key presses that occur when the [ORANGE] modifier is on.

The default mappings of these scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three

tables using the Scancode Remapping tab.

The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the Scancodes in

hexidecimal. If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key, that virtual key is

displayed in the next column labelled ‘V-Key’. A virtual key that is ‘Shifted’ or

‘Unshifted’ is displayed in the third column labelled ‘Function’.

If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro, the first and second columns

remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key

number (e.g., Macro 2).

Adding A Remap

To add a new remapping:

•

Tap the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Scancode Remapping

The Remap Scancode dialog box is displayed.

•

Type the scan code in hexidecimal in the field labelled Scancode.

Note: The ‘Label’ field displays the default function of the scancode you

are remapping.

Virtual Key, Function And Macro

The radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to define to what the

scan code will be remapped to: Virtual Key, Function or Macro.

When Virtual Key is selected, you can choose to force [SHIFT] to be on or off when

the virtual key is sent. If No Force is selected, the shift state is dependent on whether

the shift state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent.

When Function is selected, a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box.

When Macro is selected, the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the

dialog box.

•

Choose Virtual Key, Function or Macro.

Choose a function from the Function list, and tap on OK.

Editing A Scancode Remap

•

In the Scancode Remapping tab, tap on the remap you want to edit.

Tap on the Edit button, and make the appropriate changes.

Tap on OK to save your changes.

110 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Lock Sequence

Removing A Remap

•

In the Scancode Remapping tab, highlight the scancode you want to delete,

and tap on the Remove button.

•

Tap on OK.

6.3.6 Lock Sequence

The Lock Sequence tab allows you to lock the hand-held keyboard to prevent keys

from being pressed accidentally when, for example, the unit is inserted in a holster.

•

To lock the keyboard, tap in the checkbox next to Enable key lock sequence.

Tap in the checkbox next to Keyboard locked at startup.

In the Key sequence dropdown menu, choose the key sequence you need to

type to unlock the keyboard.

Note: It is useful to leave the ‘Show popup message’ enabled (default) so that

anyone attempting to use the WORKABOUT PRO keyboard will see the

key sequence they will need to enter to unlock the keyboard displayed on

the screen.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Input

A locked keyboard icon is displayed in the softkey bar when the keyboard is locked.

Locked Keyboard

Icon

•

Type the key sequence to unlock the keyboard.

6.4 Input

This icon provides access to text input options you can use to tailor the soft

keyboard, block recognizer, letter recognizer and transcriber along with voice

recording options.

6.4.1 Input Method Tab

A dropdown menu next to Input method allows you to tailor your methods of input–

Block Recognizer, Keyboard, Letter Recognizer and Transcriber.

112 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Input Method Tab

Block Recognizer

Block Recognizer teaches you how to conform your handwriting to what the hand-

held can recognize.

Important: Refer to “Block Recognizer And Letter Recognizer” on page 69

for additional details.

Keyboard Options

This screen is displayed when you choose Keyboard in the Input method drop-down

menu. You can use it to customize the soft keyboard. You can choose Large Keys or

Small Keys to increase or decrease the size of the keys displayed on the soft

keyboard.

If you enable Use gestures for the following keys –these keys are removed from the

soft keyboard. Gestures are handwriting shortcuts for the keyboard keys.

Letter Recognizer Options

Letter Recognizer teaches you how to conform your handwriting to what the hand-

held can recognize.

Important: Refer to “Block Recognizer And Letter Recognizer” on page 69

for additional details.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Input Method Tab

To display additional letter recognition options, tap on the Options button in the

Letter Recognizer screen.

Figure 6.2 Letter Recognizer Quick Settings

These options allow the Letter Recognizer to better interpret any specialized strokes

and accents you may wish to use.

Transcriber Options

When you choose Transcriber as the input method, three tabs of options are

available to you–Quick Settings, Inking and Advanced.

Quick Settings

The Quick Settings tab allows you choose the writing direction–the icons indicate

direction. In addition, you can choose to enable or disable the display of the Intro

screen and the sound each time you launch the Transcriber.

114 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Input Method Tab

Inking

In the Inking tab, you are presented with a number of options. Recognition Delay

allows you to determine the time delay between writing something on the

Transcriber screen and its recognition into printed text.

Enabling Add space after automatically adds a space after each word you write.

The Pen option allows you to choose the line Width and Colour. Finally, tapping

on Match Letter Shapes to your writing displays a screen in which you can learn

how best to form letters to help the hand-held to recognize the most often

used characters.

Advanced

In this tab, Shorthand allows you to create a shortened word that the Transcriber

will recognize and expand into a complete word automatically. You can also insert

data such as a date or run a program.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Options–Additional Choices

6.4.1.1 Word Completion

This tab speeds the writing process regardless of which input method you

choose. When you begin entering a word, this option displays what it assumes

is the complete word. You can tap on the word presented rather than typing it in

its entirety.

6.4.2 Options–Additional Choices

This tab offers a few choices including choosing a voice recording format, zoom

percentage for writing and typing, automatic capitalization of the first letter in a

sentence and automatic scrolling when you’ve reached the bottom of the screen.

116 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Lock

6.5 Lock

To protect the data stored in your WORKBOUT PRO, you can assign a password

that must be entered each time the unit is switched on.

•

Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the Lock icon.

Warning:

It is critical that you store your password in a safe place. If you

forget it, a ‘clean start’ must be performed. A clean start returns

the hand-held to factory settings. Only the data stored in a CF or

SD memory card are preserved.

•

Tap in the checkbox next to Prompt if device unused to turn on password

protection.

Choose the amount of time that the unit can remain idle before you are

prompted to enter your password.

In the Password type dropdown menu, choose the type of password you

prefer to assign. Simple PIN allows you to enter a minimum of four numeric

characters. Strong alphanumeric requires a minimum of 7 characters and

must contain at least three of the following: uppercase and lowercase alpha

characters, numbers and punctuation.

•

Tap on the Hint tab to enter a word or phrase that will remind you of your

password. The WORKABOUT PRO will display the hint after the wrong

password is entered five times.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Menus

•

Tap on OK. A dialog box asks whether or not you want to save you pass-

word settings. Tap on YES to save your password assignment.

6.6 Menus

Tapping on Start>Settings>Menu icon displays options to customise menus.

6.6.1 Start Menu Tab

This tab allows you to define the items that will be listed in your Start menu.

•

In the Start Menu tab, tap on the items you want to appear in your Start menu.

The checked items will be listed in your Start menu.

6.7 Owner Information

This icon allows you to add your personal information to the WORKABOUT PRO.

Some of this information will be displayed in the desktop Today screen.

Important: Refer to “Ownership Information” on page 51 for details about

this option.

118 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Sound & Notifications

6.8 Sound & Notifications

This icon allows you to specify when your WORKABOUT PRO will emit sounds.

6.8.1 Sounds

•

Tap in the checkboxes and radio buttons to enable the event(s) that will

cause your unit to emit a sound.

6.8.2 Notifications

This tab allows you to determine how you are notified about different events.

•

Choose an event from the Events drop-down menu.

Choose the type of reminder–a special sound, a message or a flashing light

–from the dropdown menu next to Play sound.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Today Screen

6.9 Today Screen

This icon allows you to tailor the appearance of the Today screen– the

desktop screen.

6.9.1 Appearance

This screen allows you to customize the background displayed on the Today screen.

•

Choose the background you want to use from the list.

6.9.2 Items

This tab allows you to choose and sort the items that will be listed in the

Today screen.

120 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

System Tab Settings

•

Tap in the checkbox to the left of the items you want displayed in the

Today screen.

To rearrange the list of items, highlight the item you want to move up or

down and tap on the Move Up or Move Down button. Keep in mind that

the Date cannot be moved.

6.10 System Tab Settings

To display the icons grouped in the System tab:

Tap on Start>Settings, and tap on the System tab.

•

6.11 About

Tapping on Start>Settings>System tab, and then the About icon displays a grouping

of tabs that provide device information.

Version Tab

This tab outlines the Windows Mobile 5.0 version, processor information, memory

size and a description of the expansion card, if one is in use.

Device ID Tab

This tab provides fields in which you can assign a Device name and Description

(optional) for the WORKABOUT PRO. This name is used by the WORKABOUT

PRO to identify itself to other devices.

Keep in mind that this must be a unique name across a network. If you are unable to

connect to a network because another device with the same name is already

connected, you’ll need to assign a new name here.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

About Device

Copyrights

The Copyright tab lists the copyright information for the software loaded on your

WORKABOUT PRO.

6.12 About Device

Tapping on the About Device icon under Settings>System tab provides access to

three tabs related to your WORKABOUT PRO. The Properties tab lists hardware

information related to your WORKABOUT PRO. The Copyright tab lists the

copyrights that apply to your hand-held. The Experience tab allows you to define

some aspects of how your hand-held behaves such as which icons are available to

you and so on. You can leave it at the default Microsoft settings, choose the Psion

Teklogix settings or create Custom settings.

6.13 Backlight

Tapping on Start>Settings>System tab followed by the Backlight icon allows you to

determine the power properties of the WORKABOUT PRO.

6.13.1 Battery Power

This tab allows you to tailor the unit’s backlight behaviour to best preserve

battery life.

•

To define how long the backlight should stay on when the WORKABOUT

PRO is not in use, tap in the checkbox to the left of Turn off backlight if

device is not used for.

122 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

External Power

•

Tap on the dropdown menu, and choose the number of seconds or minutes

the backlight will remain on when the hand-held is idle.

To Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped,

tap in the checkbox to the left of this option.

6.13.2 External Power

This tab determines the behaviour of the backlight when the hand-held is using

external rather than battery power. Refer to “Battery Power” on page 122 for details

about these options.

6.13.3 Intensity

This tab is used to adjust the light intensity of the display backlight and the keyboard

backlight. Sliding the bar to the left lowers the light intensity, and sliding it to the

right raises the intensity.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Certificates

6.14 Certificates

•

Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System tab.

Tap on the Certificates icon.

A public key is transmitted as part of a certificate. The certificates listed in the

Certificates tabs ensure that the submitted public key is, in fact, the public key that

belongs to the submitter. The hand-held checks that the certificate has been digitally

signed by a certification authority that the hand-held explicitly trusts.

Your WORKABOUT PRO has certificates already preinstalled in the unit. Two

types of certificates can be stored on your WORKABOUT PRO: personal

certificates that establish your identity and root certificates that establish the identity

of the servers with which you can connect.

Personal Tab

The Personal tab lists the name of the certificate issuer and the expiration date.

You can tap on an item in the list to view additional information about a

particular certificate.

•

To view more information about a personal certificate, tap on a certificate in the list.

To delete a certificate, tap and hold the stylus on the item you want to delete

until a pop-up menu is displayed. Tap on the Delete command.

124 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Choosing A Certificate

Root Certificates

•

To view details about a certificate—who issued the certificate, to whom it

was issued, the issue date and the expiry date—tap on a certificate in the list.

•

To delete a certificate, tap and hold the stylus on a certificate.

In the pop-up menu, tap on the Delete command.

6.14.1 Choosing A Certificate

Normally, certificates already configured for your network are chosen automatically

by the WORKABOUT PRO. If a certificate cannot be chosen automatically, you

must choose it from the Certificates list.

•

To choose a certificate, tap the desired certificate. Your WORKABOUT

PRO will connect automatically.

6.15 Clock & Alarms

Located under Start>Settings>System tab, the Clock & Alarm icon allows you to set

the current date and time, and it allows you to set up to three alarms.

Important: Refer to “Today’s Date, Clock And Alarm” on page 49 for details

about setting up these options.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

COM Port Manager

6.16 COM Port Manager

The COM Port Manager dialog box lists the device names and COM port mappings

stored in the registry for the currently active and for dynamic devices like port

replicators, USB serial dongles and virtual ports.

The COM Port Manager allows you to edit the COM port mappings and add new

ports for Bluetooth external connections.

Note: A grey box to the left of a Device name indicates that this is a fixed port;

the COM Port assignment cannot be changed.

For those ports that can be changed, each COM Port has a dropdown menu.

•

Tap on COM# in the Ports column to display a menu from which you can

choose the COM Port you want to assign.

If you assign a conflicting port, an asterisk * is displayed to the left of device name

indicating that this port has already been assigned.

A double-dash “---” in the Port column indicates that a COM port has not been

assigned. Tapping on the dropdown menu allows you to assign a port.

126 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Error Reporting

6.17 Error Reporting

Error Reporting allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts.

6.18 GPS – Global Positioning System

With a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver, you can locate your exact

position on a map. However, even without a GPS receiver, several different

mapping programs can run on your hand-held.

•

Tap on Start>Settings>System>GPS.

•

Tap on the GPS program port dropdown menu and choose the communica-

tion (COM) port that the GPS software will use to communicate with the

GPS receiver.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

GPS – Global Positioning System

Note: Your WORKBOUT PRO may automatically detect the GPS receiver that

you are using and enter the settings in the Hardware tab. If not, you’ll

need to enter this information yourself. You can find this information in

the user manual of the GPS receiver.

•

Tap on the Hardware tab, and choose a GPS hardware port and the

appropriate Baud rate.

Windows Mobile 5.0 automatically manages access to the GPS receiver. However,

some programs may not work with automatic configuration. If this is the case:

•

Tap on the Access tab, and disable Manage GPS automatically (recom-

mended).

You can go to www.microsoft.com/pocketstreets if a map-viewing program is not

included with your hand-held, and copy the file to your hand-held.

128 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Manage Triggers

6.19 Manage Triggers

Manage Triggers allows you to configure how bar code scanners and other devices

such as RFID readers are triggered. You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger

button for both single- and double-click, and the double-click time.

•

Tap on Start>Settings>Manage Triggers.

6.19.1 Trigger Mappings

A trigger mapping is an association between a particular key on the keyboard and a

driver or application, the module(s)– sometimes referred to as “trigger

consumer(s)”–of the trigger source. Along with keyboard keys, trigger sources can

also be grip triggers, external hardware triggers or software-based. When the

specified key is pressed, the trigger consumer (for example, a decoded scanner) is

sent a message.

Important: It is not possible to have two or more identical mappings—for

example [F1] cannot be mapped to the Non-Decoded Scanner

twice—even if the trigger type is different.

A keyboard key that is used as a trigger source will no longer gen-

erate key data or perform its normal function. For example, if the

space button is used as a trigger source, it will not be able to send

space characters to applications.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Trigger Mappings

Double-Click

When a key is pressed and released, then pressed again within the configured time

(between 0 to 1000 milliseconds), a double-click occurs. See also “Trigger Press

Type” on page 132.

Show All Modules

By default, the trigger mapping list only shows active mappings. Mappings for

drivers or applications that are not currently active are not normally displayed. By

checking this checkbox, all mappings, both active and inactive, are displayed.

Add

Tapping this button brings up the Add mapping dialog (see below), so that you can

add new trigger mappings.

Edit

Tapping this button brings up the Edit mapping dialog, so that you can edit existing

trigger mappings.

Remove

Tapping this button removes an existing mapping.

The OK button in the top right of the Manage Triggers screen saves all changes

made. If the [ESC] key is pressed, all changes made will be discarded.

130 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Trigger Mappings

6.19.1.1 Add And Edit Trigger Mapping

•

Tap on Add to add a new trigger map, or on Edit to edit an existing

trigger map.

Trigger Key

This dropdown list allows you to specify the source of the trigger events, such as the

Grip Trigger, Left Scan, etc., for the trigger module selected.

Notes: It is possible to map the same source to different modules (trigger con-

sumers—for example, to both the Imager and Non-Decoded Scanner. If

so, both devices/operations will occur simultaneously. This is not recom-

mended in most cases, especially with devices such as Imagers or RFID

Readers.

It is also possible to map different sources to the same module (trigger

consumer)—for example, two different trigger keys can be mapped to the

RFID File System.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Memory

Add Key

Only existing trigger sources are shown in the Source combo-box. To add a new

source to this list, tap on the Add Key button. A dialog box pops up, allowing you to

select the keyboard key to use as a trigger source.

Trigger Press Type

You can enable either an Up/Down or Double Click response to a trigger press.

Normally, when a trigger (keyboard key, etc.) is pressed and released, a “trigger

down” event is sent to the “owner”—that is, the application receiving the trigger

press information—followed by a “trigger up”. If Double Click is chosen in this

menu, when the trigger is pressed, released, and then pressed again, a “double-click”

event will occur. If a mapping with the Up/down type has also been configured for

the same source, it will only receive the first set of trigger events.

Module To Trigger

This identifies the driver or application receiving the trigger presses.

Show All Modules

By default, inactive owners are not shown. By checking this checkbox, all owners,

both active and inactive, are displayed.

6.20 Memory

This applet allows you to view memory use, storage card memory allocation, and it

allows you to manage opened programs.

132 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Main Tab

6.20.1 Main Tab

This tab indicates the memory allocated for file and data storage and for

program storage.

6.20.2 Storage Card

The Storage Card screen indicates the total storage card or RAM disk memory

along with the amount in use.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Running Programs

6.20.3 Running Programs

Running Programs behaves like the task manager found on your desktop PC,

allowing you to activate or stop any running programs.

•

Highlight an application(s).

To end an application, tap on the Stop button. Tap on Stop All if you want

to shut down all running applications, or

To activate an application, tap on the Activate button.

6.21 Power Icon

This icon allows you to view and manage battery use.

6.21.1 Battery Tab

This tab allows you to view the remaining battery capacity of the main battery and

the internal, backup battery.

134 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Advanced Tab

6.21.2 Advanced Tab

The Advanced tab allows you to manage battery consumption.

On Battery Power

When the WORKABOUT PRO is operating on battery power, this option allows

you to determine how long the unit will remain on when it is not in use.

•

Tap in the checkbox to the left of On battery power to enable this option.

Tap in the dropdown menu to choose the number of minutes your unit can

remain idle before it shuts down.

On External Power

When the hand-held is drawing external rather than battery power, this option

allows you to determine the number of minutes the unit will remain on when not

in use.

•

Tap in the checkbox to the left of On external power to enable this option.

Tap in the dropdown menu to choose the number of minutes your unit can

remain idle before it shuts down.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Battery Details

6.21.3 Battery Details

This tab lists the specifications and battery capacity status of the battery installed in

the WORKABOUT PRO. This is a view-only screen.

6.21.4 Card Slots

When you enable one or more of the options listed in this tab, power is supplied to

the enabled slot(s). Tapping on the Apply button activates your choices.

136 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Built-In Devices

6.21.5 Built-In Devices

This tab allows you to enable power to the device(s) installed in your unit. Keep in

mind that the content of this screen varies depending on the devices installed in your

hand-held. Tapping on OK activates your selections.

6.21.6 Suspend Threshold

This applet allows you to determine the amount of battery power that you want to

reserve in the main battery to protect the data stored in the WORKABOUT PRO.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Suspend Threshold

6.21.6.1 Suspend Threshold And Estimated Battery Backup

The Estimated Battery Backup is the amount of battery power that is reserved to

protect data until a charged battery can be installed in the hand-held. When the main

battery capacity is depleted up to the Estimated Battery Backup reserve specified in

the Suspend Threshold tab, the hand-held shuts off automatically and uses the

reserve power to preserve the data stored on the WORKABOUT PRO. Once the

hand-held shuts down, it cannot be switched on until a fresh battery is installed, or

the unit is inserted in a docking station or cradle.

•

Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the right to increase the battery

capacity reserved for backup purposes. Data will be preserved to a

maximum of 124 hours. The default value assigned for a standard

2000mAh battery is 99 hours.

•

Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the left to decrease the power

reserved for backup purposes; this increases the hand-held’s operating time

– the amount of time the hand-held will operate before shutting down – but

reduces the power reserved for backup purposes to a minimum of 24 hours.

The backup battery draws a trickle charge from the reserved main battery power to

maintain the data even after the unit power is shut down. It will protect the data

stored in the WORKABOUT PRO while the main battery is swapped for a fully

charged one.

Important: Once the main battery is removed, the backup battery will pre-

serve the data stored on the WORKABOUT PRO for approxi-

mately 5 minutes. It is critical that you install a charged main

battery before this time elapses.

138 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Wakeup Keys Tab

6.21.7 Wakeup Keys Tab

This option allows you to define which key can be pressed to wake the hand-held

from a suspend state.

6.22 Regional Settings

To display the Regional Settings screen, tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the

System tab followed by the Regional Settings icon.

•

Tap on the dropdown menu to choose your language and region.

Once you’ve selected a language and region, you may need to adjust the way

numbers, currency, the time and the date appear in your WORKABOUT PRO.

•

Tap on the tab associated with each of the items and choose how each item

will be displayed on your WORKABOUT PRO.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Remove Programs

6.23 Remove Programs

Tapping on the Remove Programs icon displays a screen listing the programs that

can be removed from your unit.

•

To remove a program, highlight it and then click on the Remove button.

6.24 Screen Icon

This icon allows you to align (calibrate) your touchscreen, turn ClearType on and

off and adjust the size of the text displayed on the WORKABOUT PRO screen.

•

Tap Start>Settings>System tab, and then tap on the Screen icon.

Important: Refer to “Aligning (Calibrating) The Touchscreen” on page 37

for details about this option.

140 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Scanner Settings

6.25 Scanner Settings

The Teklogix Scanners icon in the Settings menu provides access to dialog boxes

in which you can tailor bar code options and choose the bar codes your scanner

will recognize.

•

Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System tab followed by the

Teklogix Scanner icon.

Scanner Menu

The dropdown menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose from

one of the following scanner types used with your hand-held: Decoded (internal),

Decoded (HHP), Decoded (Intermec ISCP) and Imager.

The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the bar codes it

supports.

Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable only those

codes that are required by the application.

Keep in mind that some bar code types are only available when an internal imaging

scanner is installed. All internal scanners can be configured using the Barcode

dialog boxes.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

6.25.1 Decoded (Internal) Scanners

6.25.1.1 Options — Decoded (Internal) Scanner

Dot Time (msec)

The value selected for “Dot Time (msec)” determines (in milliseconds) how long

the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep.

When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can

enter a value of 0 msec, 200 msec or 400 msec. A value of 0 (zero) disables the

target dot.

Aim Duration

This parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the

scanner laser begins sweeping. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box

is displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 30 (0 to 3 sec.). A value of 0

(zero) disables the aiming-dot.

Laser On Time

The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on

when the scan button or trigger is pressed.

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a

value between 5and 99, each number representing 0.1seconds.

142 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

6.25.1.2 Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options

Continuous Scan Mode

Setting this parameter to ‘on’ keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long

as the scanner button is pressed and held down.

Minimum Cancel Time

The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is

turned off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a

minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled

when the user quickly triggers on/off.

Low Power Timeout

To extend laser life, you can select the length of time the scanner remains active

following a successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a

bar code is scanned – a successful decode restores normal blinking.

When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can

choose a value of 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min or 3 min.

Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continu-

ous On and the hand-held is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low

Power Timeout’ is not used.

Parameter Scanning

Setting this parameter to on enables decoding of parameter bar codes.

Linear Security Level

This parameter allows you to select the security level appropriate for your bar code

quality. There are four levels of decode security for linear code types (e.g., Code 39,

Interleaved 2 of 5). Higher security levels should be selected for decreasing levels of

bar code quality. As security levels increase, the scanner’s decode speed decreases.

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a

value from 1 to 4.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

“Linear security level 1” specifies that the following code types must be

successfully read twice before being decoded:

Code Type

Length

Codabar

MSI Plessey

D 5 of 5

All

4 or less

8 or less

I 2 of 5

“Linear security level 2” specifies that all types of codes must be successfully read

twice before being decoded.

“Linear security level 3” specifies that code types other than the following must be

successfully read twice before being decoded. The following codes must be read

three times:

Code Type

MSI Plessey

D 2 of 5

Length

4 or less

8 or less

I 2 of 5

“Linear security level 4” requires that all code types be successfully read three times

before being decoded.

Bi-Direction Redundancy

Note: This parameter is only valid if a “Linear Security Level” is enabled.

When this parameter is enabled, a bar code must be successfully scanned in both

directions (forward and reverse) before being decoded.

6.25.1.3 Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options

Scanning Mode

When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can

choose one of the following scanning modes: Smart Raster, Always Raster,

Programmable Raster, Slab Pattern, Cyclone Pattern or Semi-Omni Pattern.

Raster Height And Raster Expand Rate

These parameter determine the laser pattern’s height and rate of expansion.

144 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

Note: These parameters are only used when either Programmable Raster or

Always Raster is assigned to the “2D Scanning Mode” parameter.

“2D Raster Height” and “2D Raster Expand Rate” are intended

for very specific applications and are usually not required for normal

scanning purposes.

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a

value from 1to 15.

6.25.1.4 Data Options — Decoded (Internal) Scanner

Transmit Code ID Char

A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single

character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the

prefix and the decoded symbol.

When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can

choose a transmit code: None, AIM or Symbol.

Scan Data Format

This parameter allows you to change the scan data transmission format. Double-

tapping on “Scan Data Format” displays the following options from which you can

choose a data format: data (as-is), data [S1], data [S2], data [S1][S2], [P] data, [P]

data [S1], [P] data [S2] and [P] data [S1][S2].

Prefix [P], Suffix [S1] And Suffix [S2]

A prefix and/or one or two suffixes may be appended to scan data for use in data

editing.

When you double-tap on these parameters, a dialog box is displayed in which you

can enter a value from 0 to 255.

Delete Char Set ECIs

Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to delete any escape sequences

representing Character Set ECIs – Extended Channel Interpretations (also known as

GLIs) from its buffer before transmission.

When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from PDF417 and

MicroPDF417 bar codes containing Character Set ECIs, even when the ECI

Protocol is disabled.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

ECI Decoder

Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to interpret any Extended Channel

Interpretations (ECIs) supported by the scanner. This parameter has no effect on

symbols that were not encoded using ECIs.

If this parameter is set to off and a symbol that was encoded using an ECI escape is

scanned, the scanner transmits the ECI escape followed by the uninterpreted data.

6.25.1.5 Code 39

Enabled

Setting this parameter to on enables “Code 39”.

Enable Trioptic Code 39

Note: “Trioptic Code 39” and “Full ASCII” should not be enabled simulta-

neously. The scanner does not automatically discriminate between these

two symbologies.

Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters. Setting this parameter to

on allows this type of symbology to be recognized.

Convert To Code 32

Note: “Code 39” must be enabled in order for this parameter to function.

Setting this parameter to on allows the scanner to convert the bar code from “Code

39” to “Code 32”.

Code 32 Prefix

Note: “Convert to Code 32” must be enabled in order for this parameter to

function.

When this parameter is enabled, the prefix character “A” is added to all “Code 32”

bar codes.

Set Length L1 And Set Length L2

Lengths for “Code 39” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One

discrete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of

characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).

146 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths

where you can define the code length that will be decoded by your scanner.

Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a

selected length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those

codes containing two selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode

a code type within a specified range from 1 to 55.

Check Digit Verification

When this parameter is enabled (set to on), the integrity of a “Code 39” symbol is

checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.

Note: Only those “Code 39” symbols that include a Mod 43 check digit are

decoded when this parameter is enabled.

Transmit Check Digit

If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must to enabled.

Full ASCII

If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters.

The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an

equivalent ASCII character.

Decode Performance

If this parameter is enabled, one of three decode levels can be chosen in the “Decode

Performance Level” parameter.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

Decode Perf. Level

This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or “aggressiveness” for

Code 39 symbols. Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required

bar code orientation – this is useful when scanning very long and/or truncated bar

codes. Keep in mind that increased levels reduce decode security.

When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can

enter a decode performance level of between 1 and 3.

Field Size/Chars

Field Size

The field size is the length of the field after the first character is stripped and

the prefix and suffix characters are added. If the field size is non-zero, only

bar codes of that length are passed through.

Prefix Char

This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Press

the key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The

ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.

Suffix Char

This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Press the

key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The

ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.

Strip Leading

This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the

beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.

Note: For Code 39 bar codes, the “AIAG Strip” is performed before the

“Strip Leading”.

Strip Trailing

The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be

removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.

148 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

6.25.1.6 Code 128

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 128”.

Enable GS1-128/GS1 US

Previously UPC/EAN and UCC, these types of bar codes include group separators

and start codes.

Enable ISBT 128

To successfully scan this variation, “Enable ISBT 128” must be set to on.

Decode Performance

If this parameter is set to on, one of three decode levels assigned to the “Decode

Performance Level” parameter can be selected.

Decode Perf. Level

This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or “aggressiveness” for

Code 128 symbols. Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required

bar code orientation – this is useful when scanning very long and/or truncated bar

codes. Keep in mind that increased levels reduce decode security.

When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can

enter a decode performance level of between 1and 3.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.1.7 EAN 13

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.

Prefix/Suffix

Prefix Char

This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Press

the key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The

ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

Suffix Char

This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Press the

key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The

ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.

Strip Leading

This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the

beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.

Note: The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character.

For example, if [BKSP] is pressed, the usual action for that key

is performed.

Strip Trailing

The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be

removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.

6.25.1.8 EAN 8

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.

EAN-8 Zero Extend

When this parameter is enabled, five leading zeros are added to decoded EAN-8

symbols, making them compatible in format to EAN-13 symbols. Disabling this

parameter returns EAN-8 symbols to their normal format.

Prefix/Suffix

Refer to page 149 for details.

6.25.1.9 UPC A

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC A”.

UPC-A, Check Digit

If you enable this parameter, the check digit is included with the decoded bar

code data.

150 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

UPC-A, Preamble

When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed where you can

choose one of three options for lead-in characters for UPC-A symbols transmitted to

the host device: System Char – system character transmitted with the data, Country

code and System Char – both the country code (“0” for USA) and system character

are transmitted with the data or None – no preamble is transmitted. The lead-in

characters are considered part of the symbol.

Prefix/Suffix Chars

Refer to page 149 for details.

6.25.1.10 UPC E

Enabled UPC-E

Set this parameter to on to allow “UPC E” bar code scans.

Enabled UPC-E1

Set this parameter to on to allow “UPC-E1” (zero suppressed) bar code scans.

UPC-E And UPC-E1 Check Digit

If you enable one or both of these parameters, a check digit is included with the

decoded bar code data.

UPC-E And UPC-E1 Preamble

When you double-tap on one of these parameters, a dialog box is displayed where

you can choose one of three options for lead-in characters for UPC-E and UPC-E1

symbols transmitted to the host device: System Char – system character transmitted

with the data, Country code and System Char – both the country code (“0” for

USA) and system character are transmitted with the data or None – no preamble is

transmitted. The lead-in characters are considered part of the symbol.

Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A

This parameter converts UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format

before transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC-A format and is affected

by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A

This parameter converts UPC-E1 (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format

before transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC-A format and is affected

by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).

Prefix/Suffix

Refer to page 149 for details.

6.25.1.11 UPC/EAN Shared Settings

The parameters you set here are a shared across all available UPC and EAN

bar codes.

Enable Bookland EAN

Setting this parameter to on allows your scanner to recognize “Bookland EAN”

bar codes.

Supplementals

'Supplementals” are additionally appended characters (2 or 5).

Double-tapping this parameter displays a list of options. If Ignore is chosen,

UPC/EAN is decoded and the supplemental characters are ignored. If Decode is

chosen, UPC/EAN symbols are decoded with supplementals. Autodiscriminate

works in conjunction with the Supp. Redundancy parameter.

Supp. Redundancy

With Autodiscriminate selected in the Supplementals parameter, “Supp.

Redundancy” adjusts the number of times a symbol without supplementals is

decoded before transmission.

When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can

enter a value between 2 and 20. A value of 5 or above is recommended when

Autodiscriminate is selected and you are decoding a mix of UPC/EAN symbols with

and without supplementals.

152 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

Security Level

This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge UPC/EAN bar

codes. Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can

choose a level from 0 to 3. Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads, but

they also increase the time it takes to decode the bar code.

Linear Decode

“Linear Decode” applies to code types containing two adjacent blocks (e.g., UPC-

A, EAN-8, EAN-13). When enabled (set to on), a bar code is transmitted only when

both the left and right blocks are successfully decoded within one laser scan. This

option should be enabled when bar codes are in proximity to each other.

2D UPC Half Block Stitching

Setting this parameter to on enables “UPC Half Block Stitching” for the SE 3223

omnidirectional engine only.

6.25.1.12 Code 93

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 93” or off to disable it.

Set Length L1 And Set Length L2

Lengths for “Code 93” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One

discrete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of

characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths

where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.

Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a

selected length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those

codes containing two selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode

a code type within a specified range from 4 to 55.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

6.25.1.13 Codabar

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Codabar” or off to disable it.

Set Length L1 And Set Length L2

Lengths for “Codabar” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One

discrete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of

characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths

where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.

Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a

selected length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those

codes containing two selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode

a code type within a specified range from 5 to 55.

CLSI Editing

When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters

and inserts a space after the first, fifth, and tenth characters of a 14-character

Codabar symbol.

Note: Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.

NOTIS Editing

When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters from decoded

Codabar symbol.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.1.14 MSI Plessey

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “MSI Plessey”.

154 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

Set Length L1 And Set Length L2

Lengths for “MSI Plessey” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One

discrete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of

characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths

where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.

Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a

selected length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those

codes containing two selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode

a code type within a specified range from 6 to 55.

Check Digits

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose

One or Two check digit(s).

If this parameter is set to One, it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit. If

“Check Digits” is set to Two, it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits.

Note: If Two check digits is selected, an MSI Plessey “Check Digit Algorithm:

must also be selected. See below for details.

Transmit Check Digit

If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the bar

code data.

Check Digit Algorithm

When the Two MSI Plessey check digits option is selected, an additional verification

is required to ensure integrity. Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog

box n which you can choose the algorithm to be used: MOD 10/MOD 11 or

MOD 10/MOD 10.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.1.15 Interleaved 2 of 5

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5” .

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

Set Length L1 And Set Length L2

Lengths for “Interleaved 2 of 5” can be set for Any length, Length within a range,

One discrete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the

number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths

where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.

Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a

selected length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those

codes containing two selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode

a code type within a specified range from 4 to 14.

Check Digit Verification

When enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of an I 2 of 5 symbol to

ensure it complies with a specified algorithm – either USS (Uniform Symbology

Specification) or OPCC (Optical Product Code Council).

Transmit Check Digit

If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the bar code data.

Convert To EAN 13

If this parameter is enabled, the I 2 of 5 bar code is converted to EAN 13.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.1.16 Discrete 2 of 5

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.

Set Length L1 And Set Length L2

Lengths for “Discrete 2 of 5” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One

discrete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of

characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths

where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.

156 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a

selected length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those

codes containing two selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode

a code type within a specified range from 1 to 12.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.1.17 RSS Code

Enable

Setting this parameter to on enables “2D RSS Code” scanning capability.

Enable RSS-14 (Reduced Space Symbology)

RSS-14 code can be either purely linear or split in half with one half stacked on top

of the other half. Stacking the code reduces the bar code length, and providing the

nominal height of the code is maintained, it can be omni-directionally scanned.

Enable RSS Limited

“RSS-Limited” is restricted, in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs (global trade

item number) that begin with either a 0 or a 1. It is not stackable and is not designed

to be read omni-directionally.

Enable RSS Expanded

“RSS Expanded” uses the same application identifiers as UCC/EAN-128 codes but

it can be split into sections and stacked several rows high, reducing the length of the

symbol, while increasing the capacity of data that can be stored. “RSS Expanded”

code can be omni-directionally scanned.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.1.18 Composite

Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of

symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled.

In addition, “Center Bar Code Only” must be disabled.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

A composite symbol includes multi-row 2D components making it compatible with

linear and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners.

The options available for this parameter represent multi-level components of a

composite symbol.

Enable CC-C And Enable CC-AB

To activate these components, set these parameters to on.

Enable TLC-39

This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear code. Setting

this parameter to on enables this parameter.

6.25.1.19 PDF-417

Enable

Setting this parameter to on enables PDF-417 two dimensional (2D) coding.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.1.20 Micro PDF-417

Enable

Setting this parameter to on enables “Micro PDF-417” bar code scanning. Micro

PDF-417 is a multi-row symbology that is useful for applications requiring greater

area efficiency but lower data capacity than PDF-417.

Code 128 Emulation

When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF-

417 symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols.

If Code 128 Emulation is enabled, the following Micro PDF-417 symbols are

transmitted with one of the following prefixes:

]C1 if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915

]C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909

]C0 if the first codeword is 910 or 911

158 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

If Code 128 Emulation is set to off, the Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted

with one of the following prefixes:

]L3 if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915

]L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909

]L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2 Decoded (HHP)

6.25.2.1 Options — Decoded (HHP) Scanner

Laser On Time

The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on

when the scan button or trigger is pressed.

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a

value from 1 to 10.

6.25.2.2 Decoded (HHP) Advanced Options

Continuous Scan Mode

Setting this parameter to on keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as

the scanner button is pressed and held down.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

Minimum Cancel Time

The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is

turned off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a

minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled

when the user quickly triggers on/off.

Low Power Timeout

To extend laser life, you can select the length of time the scanner remains active

following a successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a

bar code is scanned – a successful decode restores normal blinking.

When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can

choose a value of 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min or 3 min.

Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continu-

ous On and the hand-held is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low

Power Timeout’ is not used.

6.25.2.3 Code 39

Enabled

Setting this parameter to on enables “Code 39”.

Strip Start/Stop Chars

Codabar uses the characters A, B, C, and D as start and stop characters. Thus, the

first and last digits of a Codabar message must be A, B, C, or D, and the body of the

message should not contain these characters. Setting this parameter to on strips the

start and stop characters from this bar code.

Check Char

When this parameter is set to Validate only, the integrity of a “Code 39” symbol is

checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.

If “Check Char” is set to Validate and Transmit, the check character is validated and

transmitted with the data.

Setting this parameter to None disables this function.

160 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

Minimum And Maximum Length

Minimum and Maximum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 48. The

length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters),

including check digit(s).

Append

If this parameter enabled, any Code 39 bar code that contains a space as the first

character will be “stored in memory”. Once a Code 39 barcode containing a non-

space first character is scanned, this bar code will be appended to the bar codes

containing the spaces and the imager will transmit the ALL the data. The spaces are

then removed.

Pharmaceutical

This is a numeric (0-9) fixed length barcode used by Italian pharmacies. It is also

referred to as Code 32 Pharmacode and is a form of Code 39.

Full ASCII

If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters.

The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an

equivalent ASCII character.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.4 Trioptic Code

This code is used for labeling magnetic storage media.

Note: If you are scanning Code 32 Pharmaceutical codes, Trioptic Code must

be off.

6.25.2.5 Code 128

Enabled

Setting this parameter to on enables “Code 128”.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

ISBT Concatenation

These codes are not concatenated by default. You need to set this parameter to on to

send concatenated code.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 0

to 80.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.6 EAN 13 Settings

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.

Check Digit

If you enable this parameter, a check digit is included with the decoded bar

code data.

Addendum Add-on 2 And Addendum Add-on 5

An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code.

Enabling these parameters defines the length of the addendum bar code to either 2

or 5 characters.

Addendum Required

When this parameter is set to on, the scanner does not accept the main bar code

without an addendum.

Addendum Separator

“Addendum Separator” is a space that is added between the EAN 13 bar code and

the Add-on code/Addenda. When this parameter is set to on, the scanner does not

accept the main bar code without an addendum.

162 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

ISBN Translate

When this parameter (International Standard Book Number) is enabled, the first 3

characters (‘978’) are ignored and the checksum (0.9, ‘X’) is calculated on the

remaining characters.

Prefix/Suffix

Refer to page 149 for details.

6.25.2.7 EAN 8

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.

Check Digit

If you enable this parameter, a check digit is included with the decoded bar

code data.

Addendum Add-on 2 And Addendum Add-on 5

An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code.

Enabling these parameters defines the length of the addendum bar code to either

2 or 5 characters.

Addendum Required

When this parameter is set to on, the scanner does not accept the main bar code

without an addendum.

Addendum Separator

Addendum Separator is a space that is added between the EAN 13 bar code and the

Add-on code/Addenda. When this parameter is set to on, the scanner does not accept

the main bar code without an addendum.

Prefix/Suffix

Refer to page 149 for details.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

6.25.2.8 UPC A Settings

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC A” bar code scanning recognition.

Check Digit

If you enable this parameter, a check digit is included with the decoded bar

code data.

Transmit Number System

If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded

bar code data.

Addendum Add-on 2 And Addendum Add-on 5

An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code.

Enabling these parameters defines the length of the addendum bar code to either

2 or 5 characters.

Addendum Required

When this parameter is set to on, the scanner does not accept the main bar code

without an addendum.

Addendum Separator

“Addendum Separator” is a space that is added between the UPC A bar code and the

Add-on code/Addenda. When this parameter is set to on, the scanner does not accept

the main bar code without an addendum.

Prefix/Suffix

Refer to page 149 for details.

6.25.2.9 UPC E Settings

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC E”.

Enabled UPC-E1

Set this parameter to on to allow “UPC-E1” (zero suppressed) bar code scans.

164 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

Expand

This parameter expands the UPC E code to a 12 digit UPC-A format.

Check Digit

If you enable this parameter, a check digit is included with the decoded bar

code data.

Transmit Number System

If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded

bar code data.

Addendum Add-on 2 And Addendum Add-on 5

An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code.

Enabling these parameters defines the length of the addendum bar code to either

2 or 5 characters.

Addendum Required

When this parameter is set to on, the scanner does not accept the main bar code

without an addendum.

Addendum Separator

“Addendum Separator” is a space that is added between the UPC E bar code and the

Add-on code/Addenda. When this parameter is set to on, the scanner does not accept

the main bar code without an addendum.

Prefix/Suffix

Refer to page 149 for details.

6.25.2.10 UPC/EAN Shared Settings

Extended Coupon Code

This parameter specifies whether or not the imager will read only UPC-A/EAN-13

bar codes that have addenda.

Note: The 2 or 5 digit addenda must be turned on/off, depending on the desired

behavior.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

6.25.2.11 Code 93

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 93”.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 0

to 80.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.12 Codabar

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Codabar”.

Start/Stop Transmit

Codabar can use the following sets of characters as start and stop characters:

a, b, c, d

A, B, C, D

a, b, c, d, /, t, n, *, e

DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4

Thus, when a set is chosen, the first and last digits of a Codabar message must be

one of those characters and the body of the message should not contain these

characters. Setting this parameter to off strips the start and stop characters from this

bar code.

Check Char

When this parameter is set to Validate only, the integrity of a “Code 39” symbol is

checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.

If “Check Char” is set to Validate and Transmit, the check character is validated and

transmitted with the data.

Setting this parameter to None disables this function.

166 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

Concatenation

“Codabar” supports symbol concatenation. When you enable Concatenation, the

imager looks for a Codabar symbol with a “D” start character that is adjacent to a

symbol with a “D” stop character. In this case, the two messages are concatenated

into one with the “D” characters omitted.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 2

to 60.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.13 MSI Plessey

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable MSI.

Enable Plessey

Set this parameter to on to enable Plessey.

Check Char

When this parameter is set to Validate only, the integrity of the symbol is checked to

ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.

If “Check Char” is set to Validate and Transmit, the check character is validated and

transmitted with the data.

Setting this parameter to None disables this function.

Minimum And Maximum Length

These parameters apply to MSI bar codes. The length of a code refers to the number

of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-

tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum

and maximum allowable code lengths – 4 to 48.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

Plessey Minimum And Plessey Maximum Length

These parameters apply to Plessey bar codes.The length of a code refers to the

number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).

Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the

minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 4 to 48.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.14 Code 11

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 11”.

Check Digits

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose

One Check Digit or Two check digits.

If this parameter is set to One Check Digit, it is assumed that the last digit is a

check digit. If it is set to Two Check Digits, it is assumed that the last two digits

are check digits.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 80.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.15 Interleaved 2 of 5

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.

168 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

Check Digit

When this parameter is set to Validate only, the integrity of a symbol is checked to

ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.

If “Check Digit” is set to Validate and Transmit, the check digit is validated and

transmitted with the data.

Setting this parameter to None disables this function.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 80.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.16 Matrix 2 of 5

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Matrix 2 of 5”.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 80.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.17 IATA 2 of 5

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “IATA 2 of 5”.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 48.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.18 Discrete 2 of 5

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 48.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.19 Telepen

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Telepen”.

Output

If you choose AIM Output, the imager reads symbols with start/stop pattern 1 and

decodes them as standard full ASCII (start/stop pattern 1). If you choose Original

Output, the imager reads symbols with start/stop pattern 1 and decodes them as

compressed numeric with optional full ASCII (start/stop pattern 2).

170 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 60.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.20 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)

Enable

Setting this parameter to on enables “RSS Code” scanning capability.

Enable RSS Limited

‘RSS-Limited” is restricted, in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs (global trade

item number) that begin with either a 0 or a 1. It is not stackable and is not designed

to be read omni-directionally.

Enable RSS Expanded

“RSS Expanded” uses the same application identifiers as UCC/EAN-128 codes but

they can be split into sections and stacked several rows high, reducing the length of

the symbol, while increasing the capacity of data that can be stored. “RSS

Expanded” code can be omni-directionally scanned.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 74.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

6.25.2.21 PosiCode (Reduced Space Symbology)

Enable

Setting this parameter to on enables “PosiCode” scanning capability.

PosiCode

“PosiCode” is a “position” based symbology. A position based symbology de-

couples the widths of the bars from their positions. The centers of the bars are

specified to be laid out on a grid of equally spaced parallel lines. The distance

between these grid lines is called the G-dimension and is analogous to the X-

dimension of conventional bar codes.

There are two variations of this code: PosiCode A, and PosiCode B. The options

available with this parameter allow to choose A and B, A and B and Limited A or

A and B and Limited B.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 80.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.22 Composite

Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of

symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled.

A composite symbol includes multi-row 2D components making it compatible with

linear and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners.

The options available for this parameter represent multi-level components of a

composite symbol.

GS1 128

“GS1 128” is the GS1 implementation of the Code 128 barcode specification. The

former correct name was UCC/EAN-128.

172 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

“GS1-128” uses a series of Application Identifiers to include additional data such as

best before dates, batch numbers, quantities, weights and many other attributes

needed by the user.

EAN/UCC 128 Emulation

The options in this parameter allow you to turn this emulation on or off, or to enable

RSS Emulation.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 2435.

6.25.2.23 TLC-39

This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear code.

Enabled

Setting this parameter to on enables this parameter.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.24 PDF-417

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “PDF-417”.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 2750.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

6.25.2.25 Micro PDF-417

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Micro PDF-417”.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 366.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.26 Code 16K

The “Code 16K” bar code is a multiple-row bar code that can encode the full ASCII

character set below ASCII 128. It uses existing UPC and Code 128 character set

patterns. Up to 77 full ASCII characters or 154 numeric characters can be encoded

into 2 to 16 rows. Each row is divided by a separator bar. The top and bottom of the

symbol also have separator bars that extend to the ends of the minimum quiet zones.

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 16K”.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 160.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

174 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

6.25.2.27 Code 49

The “Code 49” bar code is a multiple-row bar code that can encode the full ASCII

character set below ASCII 128. Up to 49 alphanumeric characters or 81 numeric

characters can be encoded into two to eight rows. Each row is divided by a separator

bar. The top and bottom of the symbol also have separator bars that extend to the

ends of the minimum quiet zones.

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 49”.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 81.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.28 Codablock

Enable

Set this parameter to on to enable “Codablock”.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 2048.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.29 2D Data Matrix

Enable

Set this parameter to on to enable “2D Data Matrix”.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 1500.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.30 2D QR Code

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “2D QR Code”.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 3500.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.31 2D Maxicode

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “2D Maxicode”.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 150.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

176 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

6.25.2.32 2D Aztec

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “2D Aztec”.

Aztec Runes

Aztec Runes, the smallest type of Aztec Code symbol, has the ability to encode a

very short license plate message.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1

to 3750.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.33 Postal: PlaNET

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: PlaNET”.

Check Digit

If enabled, the check digit will be transmitted at the end of the scanned data.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.34 Postal: PostNET

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: PostNET”.

Check Digit

If enabled, the check digit will be transmitted at the end of the scanned data.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.35 Postal: Australian

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Australian”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.36 Postal: Canadian

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Canadian”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.37 Postal: China

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: China”.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 2

to 80.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.38 Postal: Japanese

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Japanese”.

178 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (HHP)

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.39 Postal: Kix

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Kix”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.40 Postal: Korean

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Korean”.

Minimum And Maximum Length

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable

characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a

screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 2

to 48.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.2.41 Postal: Royal

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Royal”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

6.25.3 Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

•

Tap on the Scanner dropdown menu, and choose Decoded (Intermec ISCP).

6.25.3.1 Options — Decoded (Intermec ISCP) Scanner

Laser On Time

The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on

when the scan button or trigger is pressed.

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a

value between 1 and 10 seconds.

6.25.3.2 Advanced Options — Decoded (Intermec ISCP) Scanner

Continuous Scan Mode

Setting this parameter to ‘on’ keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long

as the scanner button is pressed and held down.

Minimum Cancel Time

The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is

turned off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a

minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled

when the user quickly triggers on/off.

180 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

Low Power Timeout

To extend laser life, you can select the length of time the scanner remains active

following a successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a

bar code is scanned – a successful decode restores normal blinking.

When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can

choose a value of 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min or 3 min.

Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continu-

ous On and the hand-held is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low

Power Timeout’ is not used.

Parameter Scanning

Setting this parameter to Enabled allows decoding of parameter bar codes.

Same Read Validate

The data is only transmitted after repeated reads give the same result. The

value assigned at this parameter determines the number of reads required, from

0 to 10 times.

Same Read Timeout

Prevents the same bar code from being read more than once. The value assigned

determines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec.

Diff Read Timeout

Prevents unwanted reading of other bar codes on the same label. The value assigned

determines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec.

6.25.3.3 Code 39

Enable

Setting this parameter to on enables “Code 39”.

Full ASCII

If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape

characters. The combination of an escape character and the next character

is converted to an equivalent ASCII character.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

Reading Range

Determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned.

The default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance.

Start/Stop Transmit

Setting this parameter to on enables the transmission of start and stop characters,

which are usually not transmitted. Code 39 can start and end with either a * or a $

character (see also next parameter Accepted Start Char).

Accepted Start Char

This parameter allows the user the option of using one of the two start/stop

characters or both ($ char, * char, $ and * char).

Check Digit Verification

Uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of

the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the

data is not transmitted. The available options are: Disabled, MOD 43 Check, French

CIP, or Italian CIP.

Notes: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes contain-

ing 7 characters.

Italian CIP (Italian pharmaceutical) is also known as Code 32. It is trans-

mitted as a standard Code 39 if checksum is not validated.

Transmit Check Digit

If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.

Minimum Length

Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code

refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including

check digit(s).

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

182 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

6.25.3.4 Code 128

Enable

Setting this parameter to on enables “Code 128”.

GS1-128

“GS1-128” is the GS1 implementation of the Code 128 barcode specification. The

former correct name was UCC/EAN-128.

GS1-128 Identifier

“GS1-128 Identifier” allows the AIM ID " ]C1" for EAN 128 to be transmitted or

removed. By default, this identifier is transmitted if EAN 128 is enabled.

GTIN Compliant

GTIN (global trade item number) processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14-character

EAN/UCC GTIN. To use GTIN processing, you must activate the EAN 128

symbology.

Important: When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated, it is not

possible to read normal EAN 128 Codes.

FNC1 Conversion

“FNC1 Conversion” allows the embedded FNC1 character to be converted to

another character for applications that cannot use the default <GS> Group Separator

or hex (1d).

Double-tapping on this option displays a dialog box listing the allowable

range – 0 to 255.

Enable ISBT 128

To successfully scan this type of bar code (International Society of Blood

Transfusion), this option must be set to on. If you enable this type of bar code, Code

128/EAN 128 is deactivated to avoid any confusion.

ISBT Concat Transmit

The codes are not concatenated by default. You need to choose one of the options

provided for this parameter to send concatenated code. Choosing Only

Concatenated Codes transmits only concatenated codes—single codes will not be

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

transmitted. Choosing Concatenated or Single transmits single codes or

concatenated codes. If only one code of a pair is read, that code will be transmitted

as a single code. If both codes in a pair are detected, they will be concatenated

provided that ISBT Concat Any Pair (see below) is enabled.

ISBT Concat Any Pair

Enabling this parameter causes all code pairs that can be, to be concatenated even if

they do not comply with Section 4.1 of the “ISBT 128 Bar Code Symbology and

Application Specification for Labeling of Whole Blood and Blood Components”

(June 2000, Version 1.2.1).

Reading Range

Determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned.

The default setting Extended, allows for increased reading distance.

Check Digit Verification

The available options for this parameter are Disabled or French CIP. This parameter

uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of

the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the

data is not transmitted.

Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes contain-

ing 7 characters.

Minimum Length

Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code

refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including

check digit(s).

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.3.5 EAN 13 Settings

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.

184 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

ISBN Conversion

When this parameter (International Standard Book Number) is enabled, the first 3

characters (‘978’) are ignored and the checksum (0.9, ‘X’) is calculated on the

remaining characters.

Transmit Check Digit

If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.

Prefix/Suffix

Refer to page 149 for details.

6.25.3.6 EAN 8

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.

Transmit Check Digit

If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.

Convert To EAN 13

If this parameter is enabled, an EAN 8 bar code is converted to EAN 13.

Prefix/Suffix

Refer to page 149 for details.

6.25.3.7 UPC A Settings

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC A” bar code scanning recognition.

Transmit Check Digit

If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.

Transmit Number System

If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded

bar code data.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

Convert To EAN 13

If this parameter is enabled, a UPC A bar code is converted to EAN 13.

Prefix/Suffix

Refer to page 149 for details.

6.25.3.8 UPC E Settings

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC E”.

Enable UPC-E1

Set this parameter to on to allow “UPC-E1” (zero suppressed) bar code scans.

Transmit Check Digit

If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.

Transmit Number System

If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded

bar code data.

Convert To UPC-A

This parameter converts UPC E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC A format

before transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC A format and is affected

by UPC A programming selections (e.g. Check Digit).

Prefix/Suffix

Refer to page 149 for details.

6.25.3.9 UPC/EAN Shared Settings

The setting assigned to the “Addendum” parameter associated with this option is

shared across all UPC and EAN bar codes.

186 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

Addendum

An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code.

This parameter provides two options: Not Required but Transmitted if Read or

Required and Transmitted.

•

Double-tap on Addendum to display a dialog box listing your options.

Highlight an item, and tap on OK.

When “Addendum” is set to Not Required but Transmitted if Read, the scanner

searches for an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When

the parameter is set to Required and Transmitted, the scanner does not accept the

main bar code without an addendum.

Addendum Add-on 2 And Addendum Add-on 5

Enabling these parameters sets the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or

5 characters.

GTIN Compliant

GTIN (global trade item number) processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14-character

EAN/UCC GTIN. To use GTIN processing, you must activate the EAN 128

symbology.

Important: When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated, it is not

possible to read normal EAN 128 Codes.

Reading Range

This parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be

successfully scanned. The default setting, Extended, allows for increased

reading distance.

6.25.3.10 Code 93

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 93”.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

Minimum Length

Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code

refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including

check digit(s).

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.3.11 Codabar

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Codabar”.

Start/Stop Transmit

Codabar can use the following sets of characters as start and stop characters:

a, b, c, d

A, B, C, D

a, b, c, d, /, t, n, *, e

DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4

Thus, when a set is chosen, the first and last digits of a Codabar message must be

one of those characters and the body of the message should not contain these

characters. Setting this parameter to Not Transmitted strips the start and stop

characters from this bar code.

CLSI Library System

When enabled, spaces are inserted after characters 1, 5, 10 in the 14-character label

(used in the USA by libraries using the CLSI system).

Check Digit Verification

When enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of a symbol to ensure it complies

with a specified algorithm – either USS (Uniform Symbology Specification) or

OPCC (Optical Product Code Council).

Transmit Check Digit

If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.

188 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

Set Length L1, Set Length L2, And Set Length L3

Lengths for “Codabar” can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the

number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).

Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the

code length that will be recognized by your scanner.

Length Mode

You can choose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1,L2,L3 as Fixed Length.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.3.12 MSI Plessey

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “MSI”.

Enable Plessy

Set this parameter to on to enable “Plessy”.

Check Digit Verification

The available options for this parameter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10

Check. This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to

ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not

contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted.

Transmit Check Digit

If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.

Plessy Transmit Check Digit

If the check digit is to be transmitted with the Plessy data, this parameter must

be enabled.

Minimum Length

Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code

refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including

check digit(s).

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

Plessy Minimum Length

Minimum lengths for the Plessy bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a

code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including

check digit(s).

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.3.13 Code 11

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 11”.

Check Digit Verification

The available options for this parameter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10

Check.This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to

ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not

contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted.

Transmit Check Digit

If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.

Minimum Length

Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code

refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including

check digit(s).

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.3.14 Interleaved 2 of 5

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.

190 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

Reading Range

This parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be

successfully scanned. The default setting, Extended, allows for increased

reading distance.

Check Digit Verification

The available options for this parameter are Disabled, MOD 10 Check and French

CIP. “Check Digit Verification” uses the specified algorithm of the option you've

chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does

not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted.

Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes contain-

ing 7 characters.

Transmit Check Digit

If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.

Set Length L1, Set Length L2, And Set Length L3

Lengths for “Interleaved 2 of 5” can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code

refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including

check digit(s).

Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the

code length that will be recognized by your scanner.

Length Mode

You can chose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1,L2,L3 as Fixed Length.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.3.15 Matrix 2 of 5

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Matrix 2 of 5”.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

Minimum Length

Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code

refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including

check digit(s).

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.3.16 Discrete 2 of 5

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.

Standard 2 of 5 Format

This parameter allows you to choose a standard format – either Identicon (6

start/stop bars) or Computer Identics (4 start/stop bars).

Check Digit Verification

The available options for this parameter are Disabled and MOD 10 Check. “Check

Digit Verification” uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to

ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not

contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted.

Transmit Check Digit

If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.

Set Length L1, Set Length L2, And Set Length L3

Lengths for “Discrete 2 of 5” can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to

the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).

Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the

code length that will be recognized by your scanner.

Length Mode

You can chose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1,L2,L3 as Fixed Length.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

192 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

6.25.3.17 Telepen

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Telepen”.

Format

This parameter allows you to set the bar code character format to either ASCII

or Numeric.

Minimum Length

Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code

refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including

check digit(s).

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.3.18 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)

Enable

Setting this parameter to on enables “RSS Code” scanning capability.

Enable RSS-14

RSS-14 code can be either purely linear or split in half with one half stacked on top

of the other half. Stacking the code reduces the bar code length, and providing the

nominal height of the code is maintained, it can be omni-directionally scanned.

Enable RSS Limited

“RSS-Limited” is restricted, in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs (global trade

item number) that begin with either a 0 or a 1. It is not stackable and is not designed

to be read omni-directionally.

Enable RSS Expanded

“RSS Expanded” uses the same application identifiers as UCC/EAN-128 codes but

they can be split into sections and stacked several rows high, reducing the length of

the symbol, while increasing the capacity of data that can be stored. “RSS

Expanded” code can be omni-directionally scanned.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.3.19 PDF-417

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “PDF-417”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.3.20 Micro PDF-417

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Micro PDF-417”.

Code 128 Emulation

When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF-

417 symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols.

If Code 128 Emulation is enabled, the following Micro PDF-417 symbols are

transmitted with one of the following prefixes:

]C1 if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915

]C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909

]C0 if the first codeword is 910 or 911

If Code 128 Emulation is set to off, the Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted

with one of the following prefixes:

]L3 if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915

]L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909

]L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

194 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Imager

6.25.3.21 Codablock

Enable Codablock A

Set this parameter to on to enable “Codablock type A”.

Enable Codablock F

Set this parameter to on to enable “Codablock type F”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.4 Imager

•

Tap on the Scanner dropdown menu, and choose Imager.

6.25.4.1 Options – Imager

TekImager Enabled

Setting this option to on enables the imager installed in your hand-held.

Continuous Scan Mode

Setting this parameter to on keeps image capture active and continuously decoding

as long as the scanner button is pressed and held down.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Imager

Center Bar Code Only

Note: This parameter must be disabled when reading Composite bar codes.

When more than one bar code is visible in a single snap shot, this parameter allows

you to specify that only the centre image within the imager framing marker be read.

When this parameter is set to on, the target dot is pointed at the centre image and

only that image is returned.

Max Number Barcodes

This parameter specifies the maximum number of bar codes the imager will attempt

to decode in an image. A maximum of 6 bar codes can be decoded at one time.

Barcodes Must Decode

This parameter specifies the minimum number of bar codes that the imager must

decode in order to report success.

Note: This number must be less than the number of bar codes assigned to

“Max Number Barcodes”. The driver validates and reassigns the value

if necessary.

Window Width

“Window Width” determines the width of the captured image in pixels.

Note: The driver will validate and reassign the value assigned to this parameter,

if necessary; the driver will also use the Window Width value to horizon-

tally center the image in the field of view.

Window Height

This parameter determines the height of the captured image in pixels.

Note: The driver will validate and reassign the value assigned to this parameter,

if necessary; the driver will also use “Window Height” value to vertically

center the image in the field of view.

Dot Time (msec)

The value selected for “Dot Time (msec)” determines (in milliseconds) how long

the targeting dot remains on before the scanner begins capturing images. When you

double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a

value of between 0 and 3000. A value of 0 disables the target dot.

196 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Imager

6.25.4.2 Advanced Options – Imager

Important: Do not adjust the advanced options without first consulting Psion

Teklogix technical support.

Factory Defaults On Reboot

The value assigned to this parameter determines whether or not the driver will

restore the factory defaults to the imager device on the next reboot.

Note: The driver will default the imager device on a ‘clean’ reset, regardless of

the value of this parameter.

Min Scan Duration

This parameter defines the minimum amount of time in seconds that the imager will

scan when the trigger is pressed and held down without successful decode.

Note: The actual scan duration when the trigger is pressed relies on the value

assigned to Captures Per HW Trigger, below.

Captures Per HW Trigger

The value assigned to this parameter determines the number of captures the imager

device will take while the imager's internal hardware trigger is held down.

Note: This parameter, together with “Min Scan Duration”, determines the

actual scan duration. When the scan trigger is pressed and held down, the

driver starts a timer based on the value of “Min Scan Duration” and also

sends a command to emulate the hardware trigger. When completed, if the

time has not yet expired, it will send another command to the imager

device, forcing the imager to flash again using the value assigned to

“Captures Per HW Trigger”.

Auto Exposure

Important: This parameter value should only be changed by qualified Psion

Teklogix personnel. It should be left at the default value – ‘on’.

Setting this parameter to on allows the imager to make automatic gain, integration

and illumination adjustments based on ambient light before capturing the bar code.

If the adjustment is insufficient, further adjustments are made automatically before

another image is captured.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Imager

Fast Converge

Note: “Auto Exposure” must be set to ‘on’ in order for this parameter

to function.

Keep in mind that while this parameter can improve imager performance,

“Fast Converge” increases battery power consumption.

Setting this parameter to on speeds the “Auto Exposure” process. It allows the

imager to rapidly snap a number of bar code capture attempts while finding ideal

values for gain, integration and illumination.

Max Gain, Max Integration And Max Illumination

Important: These parameter values should only be changed by qualified

Psion Teklogix personnel.

These parameters represent internal values used by the 2D imager. The “Auto

Exposure” parameter automatically adjusts the “Max Gain”, “Max Integration” and

“Max Illumination” parameters to produce the best bar code read. Keep in mind that

“Auto Exposure” must be set to on in order for these parameter values to be

automatically adjusted.

Double-tapping on any of these parameters displays an associated dialog box in

which an allowable range is displayed: Max Gain – 357 to 7920, Max Integration –

0 to 65535, Max Illumination – 0 to 7.

Decoder Timeout

The decoder is a set of algorithms that examine the image and attempt to find the bar

codes, and then turn the pixels into data that the computer can use—this process

takes time. “Decoder Timeout” limits the amount of time the decoder will spend

attempting to decode an image, and forces it to stop and grab a new image, which

will probably be easier to decode.

Note: When decoding multiple bar codes in one image, the value assigned to

‘Decoder Timeout’ should be increased to 200ms/extra bar code after the first.

198 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Imager

Adaptive Windowing

“Adaptive Windowing” is an advanced technique used to speed up bar code

recognition in certain applications. This parameter automatically reduces the size of

the window to the user-programmed window size when it successfully decodes

(which reduces decode time the next time it is used), but increases it to the full size

window (1280x1024 for SX5303) on a failed decode.

Note: This feature assumes that you have reached an understanding about how

the device operates in your application, and that, after a learning period,

operators will get used to using the imager in one particular way. It also

assumes that a trained operator will usually only have near miss scenarios.

Constant Illumination

“Constant Illumination” is used to reduce the intrusiveness of the device’s

illumination on the observer. Instead of the illumination turning on and off every

time the device attempts a decode (2-4 times per second), the illumination stays on

from the time the trigger is pulled until a decode is successful. This feature is useful

in low light environments, since it will also reduce the distraction that the

illumination can have on nearby coworkers.

6.25.4.3 Code 39 Settings

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 39”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.4.4 Code 128 Settings

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 128”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Imager

6.25.4.5 EAN 13

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.

Addendum

An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code.

This parameter provides three options: Disabled, Optional and Required.

Depending on the value chosen for this parameter, an addendum is recognized

or ignored.

•

Double-tap on Addendum to display a dialog box listing your options.

Highlight an item, and tap on OK.

When “Addendum” is set to Disabled,the scanner does not recognize an

addendum. If this parameter is set to Optional,the scanner searches for

an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the

parameter is set to Required ,the scanner does not accept the main bar code

without an addendum.

Note: Setting “Addendum” to ‘Optional’ reduces performance. It should only

be chosen if at least some of the bar codes being read have addendums.

Prefix/Suffix

Refer to page 149 for details.

6.25.4.6 EAN 8

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.

Addendum

Refer to “Addendum” on page 200.

Prefix/Suffix

Refer to page 149 for details.

200 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Imager

6.25.4.7 UPC A

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC A”.

Addendum

Refer to “Addendum” on page 200.

Prefix/Suffix

Refer to page 149 for details.

6.25.4.8 UPC E

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC E”.

Addendum

Refer to “Addendum” on page 200.

Prefix/Suffix

Refer to page 149 for details.

6.25.4.9 Code 93

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 93”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.4.10 Codabar

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Codabar”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 201

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Imager

6.25.4.11 Interleaved 2 of 5

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.4.12 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)

Enable

Setting this parameter to on enables “RSS Code” scanning capability.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.4.13 Composite

Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of

symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled.

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Composite” bar codes.

6.25.4.14 PDF-417

Enable

Setting this parameter to on enables PDF-417 two dimensional (2D) coding.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

202 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Imager

6.25.4.15 Micro PDF-417

Enable

Setting this parameter to on enables “Micro PDF-417” bar code scanning. Micro

PDF-417 is a multi-row symbology that is useful for applications requiring greater

area efficiency but lower data capacity than PDF-417.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.4.16 2D Data Matrix

Enable

Set this parameter to on to enable “Data Matrix”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.4.17 2D QR Code

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “2D QR Code”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.4.18 2D Maxicode

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “2D Maxicode”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.4.19 2D Aztec

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Aztec”.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 203

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Imager

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.4.20 Postal: PlaNET

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: PlaNET”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.4.21 Postal: PostNET

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: PostNET”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.4.22 Postal: Australian

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Australian”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.4.23 Postal: Japanese

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Japanese”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

204 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Options Tab

6.25.4.24 Postal: Korean

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Korean”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.4.25 Postal: Royal

Enabled

Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Royal”.

Field Size/Char

Refer to page 148 for details.

6.25.5 Options Tab

This tab allows you to tailor the double-click parameters and the display options

associated with your scanner.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 205

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Options Tab

6.25.5.1 Double Click Parameters

Click Time (msec)

This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click.

If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this

time, it is considered a double-click. The allowable range is 0 to 1000. A value of

zero disables this feature.

A double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is

assigned in the “Click Data” parameter. When a value is not assigned for the “Click

Data”, double-clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the

“Dot Time” parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep. If a value is assigned for

the “Click Data” parameter, double-clicking the scanner trigger inserts the “Click

Data” value rather than initiating a scan.

Click Data

For both integrated and external scanners, this parameter determines which

character is sent to the application installed in your hand-held following a double-

click. A dialog box appears, asking that you press the key you want to insert. The

ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.

6.25.5.2 Display Parameters

Scan Result

When this parameter is enabled, the type of bar code and the result of the scan

appear on the screen. Note that this information is only displayed after a successful

decode and is visible only while the scanner trigger is pressed. When the trigger is

released, this information is cleared from the screen.

Scan Indicator

When this parameter is enabled, the laser warning logo appears on the display

whenever the scanner is activated.

Scan Result Time (sec)

The value assigned to the “Scan Result Time (sec)” parameter determines how long

the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen. Time is measured in

seconds, and a value of “0” (zero) disables the parameter. When you choose this

option, a dialog box appears where you can enter a value.

206 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Translations Tab

Note: To remove the scan result from the screen before the “Result Time” has

expired, point the scanner away from the bar code and press the trigger.

Good Scan Beep And Bad Scan Beep

These parameters determine whether or not the hand-held emits an audible scanner

‘beep’ when a good (successful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed. Set

these parameters to either on to enable the beeper or off to disable it.

Soft Scan Timeout

This parameter is used by the SDK “Scan” function (soft-scan: starting a scan

session via the SDK function, instead of a physical user trigger press). The value

assigned to this parameter determines the soft-scan timeout from 1 to 10 sec.

(default is 3 sec.).

Scan Log File

If this parameter is enabled, the input barcode and the modified/translated output bar

code are logged in the file \Flash Disk\ScanLog.txt. Keep in mind that if the “Scan

Log File” is enabled, there is a slight performance effect when performing multiple

scans since the log file is written to persistent storage.

6.25.6 Translations Tab

The Translations tab allows you to define up to 10 cases, each consisting of up to 10

rules in sequential order. Only one case will be applied to a bar code and a case will

only be applied if all rules specified in the case are successful – if a rule within a

case fails, the entire case fails.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 207

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Translations Tab

•

In the Translation tab, tap on the Case # to create rules.

•

Tap on the No rule dropdown menu to display the rules.

208 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Translations Tab

When you choose a rule, an associated screen is displayed in which you can define

the rule.

6.25.6.1 Case Rules

The case rules are defined as follows:

•

No rule – ignored.

Search and replace – replaces all instances of the match string. (Note that

this rule cannot fail.)

•

Match at index – matches the match string at a specified index.

Match and replace at index – matches the match string at a specified index

and replaces/changes it.

•

Replace at index – replaces/changes unspecified data in a given range.

Add barcode prefix/suffix – adds a global prefix or suffix.

Verify barcode size – verifies the bar code size. This rule should generally

be assigned first, before creating subsequent rules.

Note: Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken

into account when creating subsequent rules. For example, if the bar code

size is important, it should be checked before any rules that might change

the size are applied.

Translation information about the status of each case/rule is displayed in the scan

log file (see “Scan Log File” on page 207) when enabled. This is useful if a case

fails, and you are trying to determine why a rule is failing.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 209

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Ports

6.25.7 Ports

While you cannot configure the scanner, you can configure communications with a

serial decoded scanner using the options in this tab.

Use these settings to ensure that the communication ports on the WORKABOUT

PRO match the settings of the serial devices to which they are connected. If the

settings do not match exactly, the devices may not function. Note that some devices

can auto-detect serial port settings (such as baud rate), and in this case the

WORKABOUT PRO will dictate the settings. Baud rates often have a direct impact

on performance – they should be set as high as possible while still ensuring reliable

communication.

Note: The COM numbers are assigned in Start>Settings>System>COM

Port Manager.

210 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Ports

6.25.7.1 Port Replicator Port A (COM5)

Enabled

This parameter allows you to turn this port on (enable) and off.

Baud

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a pop-up window in which you can

choose an appropriate baud rate.

Data Bits

This parameter determines the number of data bits included in each asynchronous

data byte. Most devices use 8 bit data bytes. Double-tapping on this option displays

a pop-up window in which you can choose either 7 or 8 data bits.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 211

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Ports

Parity

This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going

through the tether port. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in

which you can choose the appropriate “Parity”.

6.25.7.2 Port Replicator Port B (COM6)

For details about these parameters, refer to the descriptions under the heading “Port

Replicator Port A (COM5)” beginning on page 211.

212 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Total Recall

6.25.7.3 Port Replicator Port B (COM7)

For details about these parameters, refer to the descriptions under the heading “Port

Replicator Port A (COM5)” beginning on page 211.

6.26 Total Recall

Total Recall is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to back up/restore applications and

settings. Keep in mind that to protect your data from erasure during a ‘clean start’,

the Total Recall profile must be stored on a SD/MMC card or externally to the

device on a USB memory stick or on a PC.

Note: In Windows Mobile 5.0, the registry and installed programs are stored in

the Flash file system and are not lost on reset. However, a clean start will

reset not only the registry settings to factory defaults, but will also erase

any files or applications stored or installed on the built-in Flash file sys-

tem, including any Total Recall profiles. This is why any data that needs

to be protected must be stored on a SD/MMC card or externally to the

device on a USB memory stick or on a PC.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 213

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Creating A Backup Profile

•

Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Total Recall icon.

In the dropdown menu, you can choose: Create Backup Profile, Restore Selected

Profile, View Selected Profile Data, and Delete Selected Profile. Keep in mind that

until a profile is created, only one option is available–Create Backup Profile.

6.26.1 Creating A Backup Profile

•

Tap on the Next button to begin the process.

Profile Information

This dialog box allows you to choose the Profile Type and the Profile Location – the

storage destination for the profile you are creating.

•

To begin, type a name for the profile in the field labelled Profile Name.

214 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Creating A Backup Profile

•

Next, choose the type of profile you want to create:

- For this device only–creates a backup that is manually restored by

the operator.

- AutoRestore for this device only–creates a profile that automati-

cally restores itself following a clean start.

- AutoRestore for this and other devices–creates a profile that auto-

matically restores after resuming from a clean start, but it will not

contain the touchscreen calibration coordinates or the Wireless

radio settings.

•

Under Profile Location, choose the location where you want your Total

Recall profile stored – for example, an SD/MMC card.

Tap on Next to display the next dialog box–Add Files.

Add Files

By default, All Files is selected so that all installed or copied files, database entries,

and the Registry will be saved. You can, however, limit the backup to databases, the

registry and/or Selected Files.

•

Tap on the Next button to view your selections.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 215

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Creating A Backup Profile

View Selections

Depending on what you have selected for inclusion in your profile, you can view a

list of all files, selected files, databases, and/or the registry.

•

If you’re satisfied with the items in the profile, tap on Next.

Performing The Backup

•

Tap on Backup to begin the process and create a profile.

When the backup is finished, a dialog box is presented stating that the backup has

been completed successfully.

•

Tap on Finish to exit Total Recall.

216 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Restoring A Profile

6.26.2 Restoring A Profile

To manually restore a profile:

•

Choose Restore Selected Profile from the dropdown menu, and choose the

Profile Name you want to restore.

•

In the next screen, tap on Restore to restore your profile.

6.27 Connections Tab

This tab is used to setup connections using Bluetooth, 802.11 radios, and you can

also set up Wireless WAN connections.

•

Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab to display your connection

options.

Navigation Bar

Tap on these connectivity hotkeys

to display Notification Bubbles

Notification Bubble

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 217

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Beam

Navigation Bar Connectivity Hotkeys

Some of the connectivity icons in the Navigation Bar along the top of the screen are

hotkeys that offer shortcuts to connection setups. Tapping on a hotkey displays a

bubble that provides information about your connections and provides a shortcut to

the Wireless Manager applet where you can set up your connections.

Automatic Network Detection

If a wireless network is available when you switch on your unit, a notification

bubble may appear letting you know which networks have been found. You can

choose a network from here.

Tapping on Connect in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen will automatically

connect to a network that’s already been set up. Tapping on Settings in the network

bubble will launch the Wireless Manager applet.

If you prefer not see this notification bubble, you can tap on the Menu button in the

softkey bar, and choose not to display the notification bubble.

6.28 Beam

Beam is not available with the WORKABOUT PRO. This unit is not equipped with

an IrDA port.

218 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Bluetooth Setup

6.29 Bluetooth Setup

Bluetooth is a short-range wireless technology (approximately 10 meters) that

enables data communication between digital devices and is intended for Personal

Area Networks (PAN). It also provides the capability to use a Bluetooth-enabled

cellular phone as a data modem, exchanging information with other Bluetooth

devices and providing network access.

6.29.1 Bluetooth Mode

•

Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the

Bluetooth icon.

When Turn on bluetooth is enabled (a checkmark is displayed in the checkbox),

Bluetooth features are available. If this option is disabled, you cannot send or

receive information using Bluetooth.

When Make this device discoverable to other devices is enabled, other Bluetooth

devices within range (approximately 10 meters) can detect your WORKABOUT

PRO and can establish a bond or use a Bluetooth service. Note that other devices

can detect your unit whether or not a bond has been created.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 219

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Scanning For A New Device

6.29.2 Scanning For A New Device

•

Tap on the Devices tab.

To add a new device:

•

Tap on Add new device....

The WORKABOUT PRO scans for a Bluetooth device within a 10 meter range.

Any Bluetooth devices within range appear in the Bluetooth list box

•

Highlight the device you want to add.

220 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Bluetooth COM Ports

•

Type your Passcode. Tap on Next.

In the Display Name screen, edit the name of the device. This is optional.

Tap on Finish.

Note: To connect to a Bluetooth-equipped device that’s already been added, tap

on the item in Bluetooth list box.

6.29.3 Bluetooth COM Ports

Incoming Port

The Bluetooth COM Ports dialog box allows you to assign a COM port number. If a

port number has not been assigned, tapping on New Incoming Port allows you to

choose a COM port number. If a port number already exists that you’d like to

change, tap and hold the stylus on Incoming Port (COM #) to display a pop-up

menu. Choose Edit and assign a new COM port number.

Note: If the port number you choose has already been assigned (see “COM Port

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 221

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Active Connections List

Manager” on page 126), a message appears indicating that the COM

port you’ve chosen cannot be created. Choose another COM number.

Outgoing Port

When you connect the WORKABOUT PRO to another device, New Outgoing Port

is listed in this dialog box. Tapping on this option allows you to assign an outgoing

COM port number. Follow the directions described in “Incoming Port” on page 221

to choose a COM port.

6.29.4 Active Connections List

This tab displays the currently active Bluetooth connections, listing the device

name(s). The type of link is also included with the device name(s). Keep in mind

that the information listed in this tab is ‘view only’; it cannot be edited.

222 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

About Tab

6.29.5 About Tab

The About tab displays information about the Bluetooth module, such as the

manufacturer name, local address and version. Like the Active tab, this information

cannot be edited.

6.29.6 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone

Once you’ve completed the Bluetooth settings, you can go ahead and set up

communication through your Bluetooth-equipped phone.

1. Before you begin, make certain that the Bluetooth phone is turned on,

that the Bluetooth radios in your WORKABOUT PRO and phone are

enabled (turned on), and that the hand-held and phone are within 10

metres of each other. Both should be discoverable.

2. Tap on Start>Settings and then tap on the Connections tab.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 223

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

The Bluetooth GPRS Phone

3. Tap on the Connections icon. Tap on Add a new modem connection.

4. Type a name for the connection.

5. Tap on the Select a modem dropdown menu, and choose Bluetooth.

Tap on Next.

6. Make certain that the phone is discoverable. Some phones also need to

be pairable in order to accept a bonding request. Refer to your phone

documentation for additional information.

7. If the phone appears in the My Connections list, skip to step 13.

8. In the list, tap the phone and then tap on the Next button.

9. In the PIN screen, type a personal identification number (PIN)–you can

enter up to 16 characters.

10. Enter the same PIN on the phone.

11. If you wish, you can edit the name of the phone in the Name field.

12. Tap on the Finish button.

13. In the My Connections list, tap on the phone and then on Next.

14. Enter the dial-up phone number for this connection, and tap on Next.

15. In the User name, Password and Domain fields, enter the logon infor-

mation for this connection, and tap on Finish.

You can begin using the Bluetooth phone connection, for example, to send and

receive e-mail, browse the Internet with Internet Explorer, and so on.

224 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Connections – Connecting To The Internet

6.30 Connections – Connecting To The Internet

To activate a connection, make certain that any necessary equipment is installed in

your hand-held such as a radio.

You’ll need the following information from your ISP to make an internet

connection: ISP server phone number, user name and password.

1. Tap Start>Settings, and then tap on the Connections tab.

2. Tap on the Connections icon.

3. Under My ISP, tap on Add a new modem connection.

4. In the Select a modem dropdown menu, choose a modem connection.

If you haven’t already created a modem connection, refer to “Modem

Connection Setup” on page 226.

5. To connect to the Internet, launch the program you want to use. For

example, launch Internet Explorer on your WORKABOUT PRO to

browse the Internet. Your hand-held automatically connects.

Note: To set up a network card or wireless network connection to your ISP, add

a new connection under My Work Network.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 225

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Modem Connection Setup

6.30.1 Modem Connection Setup

Before you begin, you’ll need the following information from your ISP or network

administrator: telephone number, user name, password, domain name and TCP/IP

settings.

If your WORKABOUT PRO does not have access to a mobile phone network,

insert a modem card in the unit.

1. Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Con-

nections icon.

2. To create a new connection in either My ISP or My Work Network, tap

on Add a new modem connection.

3. In the Make New Connection screen, type a name for the connection.

4. In the dropdown menu below Select a modem, tap on your

modem type.

Note: If your modem is not listed in the dropdown menu, choose Hayes Compat-

ible on COM1.

226 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Modem Connection Setup

5. Tap on the Next button.

6. In the next screen, enter the phone number exactly as you want it

dialed. If, for example, you need to dial 9 for an outside line, enter 9 at

the beginning of the phone number.

7. Tap on the Next button.

8. Type the User Name, Password and Domain Name as provided by

your ISP or network administrator.

Note: Generally, you will not need to change any of the Advanced settings.

For information about the Advanced settings, refer to“Advanced Modem

Settings” on page 228.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 227

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Modem Connection Setup

Changes to Advanced settings are only required in the following instances:

To change the baud rate settings, dialing string commands or credit

card options.

To change port settings.

To enter TCP/IP settings because the server to which you are connecting

does not dynamically assign addresses.

9. Tap on the Finish button.

If you need to edit the Advanced settings, refer to “Advanced Modem Set-

tings” in the next section.

6.30.1.1 Advanced Modem Settings

General Tab

Baud Rate

•

In the Baud rate dropdown menu, choose a new baud rate. Check your

modem documentation for the appropriate baud rate.

Wait For Dial Tone Before Dialing

•

To speed connection when using a modem, disable this option–tap in the

checkbox to the left of this option.

Wait For Credit Card

•

If you’re paying for calls with a credit card, enter the number of seconds

you want the WORKABOUT PRO to wait for a credit card prompt.

228 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Modem Connection Setup

Extra Dial-String Modem Commands

•

Type your credit card number in this field.

Cancel If Not Connected In

•

Tap in the checkbox next to this option to enable this option to make certain

that the WORKABOUT PRO does not stay online too long while waiting to

connect with a network.

Enter the number of seconds after which the call will be cancelled.

Note: By default, you WORKABOUT PRO cancels the call if a connection is not

made after two minutes.

Port Settings Tab

Important: These settings should not be changed unless instructed by your

ISP or network administrator.

Data Bits

This parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port.

Possible values are: 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.

Parity

This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going

through the port. The options are: none, odd, even, mark and space.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 229

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Modem Connection Setup

Stop Bits

This parameter specifies the number of stop bits–1, 1.5, 2–used for asynchronous

communication.

Flow Control

This parameter selects the type of flow control used in your hand-held computer.

The WORKABOUT PRO can perform Software or Hardware handshaking, or you

can choose None.

Terminal

This option is similar to the HyperTerminal program capabilities on your PC.

TCP/IP Settings Tab

Important: If your server assigns IP addresses dynamically, you will not need

to change these settings. If you need to make changes, contact

your ISP or network administrator for addresses.

230 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Wireless Power Icon

Server Settings Tab

Important: If your server assigns IP addresses dynamically, you will not need

to change these settings.

Servers requiring assigned IP addresses may also need a way to map computer

names to IP addresses. The WORKABOUT PRO supports a variety of name

resolution options: DNS, Alt DNS, WINS and Alt WINS.

Your ISP or network administrator can determine which name resolution you need,

and can also provide the server address. In addition, you will want to ask if alternate

addresses are available. An alternate address may allow you to connect when the

primary server is not available.

6.31 Wireless Power Icon

While you can access network card settings through the Wi-Fi icon, and you can

access Bluetooth settings through the Bluetooth icon, the Wireless Power icon acts

as a connection manager, providing access to all these types of network connections.

Note: The Wireless Manager icon, as the name implies, also provides connec-

tion management. However, if you need to disable all connections (Flight

Mode), the Wireless Manager icon will not be available. The Wireless

Power icon, on the other hand, is always visible even when you disable all

network connections.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 231

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Flight Mode – Disabling Wireless Components

•

Tap on Start>Settings>Connections>Wireless Power icon.

6.31.1 Flight Mode – Disabling Wireless Components

To disable all wireless components when, for example, you are taking your hand-

held onto a plane where wireless connections need to be shut down:

•

Tap on the Disable All button.

To enable wireless components:

Tap on Enable All.

To disable a particular radio connection rather than all connections:

•

Highlight an Available (enabled) radio listed in this dialog box, and then tap

on the Disable button.

6.31.2 Setting Up A Network Card

Network (802.11) cards are used to connect to a network so that you can browse the

Internet, download e-mail and so on. You can connect to an existing network or you

can set up a new connection on your WORKABOUT PRO.

Note: For detailed information about setting up a new network, refer to

Chapter 5,“Connecting To A LAN With 802.11”.

Keep in mind that the WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with context sensitive Help

Files. If you find that you’re unsure how to proceed with a network connection at

any point during setup, tap on the question mark icon in the navigation bar at the top

of the screen.

232 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Network Adaptors

6.31.3 Network Adaptors

Important: For RA2041 (Summit) CF card adaptor setup details, refer to

“Setting Up A RA2041 Radio–Summit Client Utility” on page 73.

When the network card is inserted in your unit for the first time, the Network

Settings screen is displayed automatically so that you can configure the card. If it

does not appear, or if you want to change settings:

•

Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab and then on the Wire-

less Power icon.

In the Wireless Power dialog box, highlight the radio with which you want

to work, and then tap on the Settings button.

Tap on the Network Adapters tab.

•

If you need to specify server information, double-tap on the appropriate

adaptor, and then tap on the Name Servers tab.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 233

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Changing Network Card Settings

Note: Because most networks use DHCP, you should not need to change these

settings unless instructed to do so by your network administrator.

•

If necessary, use a network cable to connect the network card to your

network. Refer to your the documentation shipped with your network card

for details.

To activate the connection, launch the desired program (e.g., Internet

Explorer). The WORKABOUT PRO will connect automatically.

6.31.4 Changing Network Card Settings

•

If you use your network card in two locations like work and home, you’ll

need to change the network to which the network card connects.

•

Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab and then, on the Wire-

less Power icon.

•

In the Wireless Power dialog box, tap on the Settings button under Wi-Fi.

Tap on the Network Adapters tab.

In the dropdown menu below My network card connects to, choose either

The Internet or Work.

6.31.5 VPN Connection Setup

A VPN connection provides a secure connection to servers through the Internet.

Before you begin, you need the following information from your network

administrator: password, domain name, TCP/IP settings and a host name or IP

address of the VPN server.

•

Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the

Connections icon.

•

Under My Work Network, tap on Add a new VPN server connection.

In the Name field, type a name for this connection.

In Host name/IP, type the VPN server name or IP address.

Tap on the VPN type radio button next to the type of authentication for your

WORKABOUT PRO: IPSec/L2TP or PPTP. Your network administrator

will let you know which option applies to your unit.

•

Tap on Next.

234 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Managing An Existing Connection

•

Choose the type of authentication in this screen. If you choose A pre-shared

key, type the key provided by your network administrator.

•

Tap on Next.

Type your user name, password and domain name. If a domain name was

not provided to you, try the connection without entering a domain name.

Note: Normally, you will not need to change any advanced settings. You will

need to make changes only under only the following circumstances:

The server to which you are connecting does not dynamically assign

addresses, and TCP/IP settings need to be entered.

Server DNS or WINS settings need to be changed.

If you need to edit the Advanced settings, refer to “Advanced Modem Set-

tings” on page 228 for details about this tab.

•

Tap on Finish.

Launch a program like Internet Explorer to activate the connection. The

VPN connection will start automatically.

6.31.6 Managing An Existing Connection

Once you’ve defined a connection, a new option appears in the first Connections

screen–Manage existing connections.

6.31.6.1 Editing A Connection

•

Tap on Settings>Connections tab. Tap on the Connections icon.

•

Tap on Manage existing connections.

Tap here

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 235

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Managing An Existing Connection

•

To launch a connection from this screen, press and hold the stylus on the

connection you want to activate. Choose Connect from the pop-up menu.

To delete a connection, press and hold the stylus on the connection you

want to delete. Choose Delete from the pop-up menu.

Note: You can also create a new connection by tapping on the New button. To

make changes to the settings for this connection, tap on Edit.

6.31.6.2 Changing A Connection Setting Name

Your WORKABOUT PRO has two sets of connection settings: My ISP and My

Work Network. If you want to change one or both of these options to something

more familiar to you, follow these steps.

•

Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Con-

nections icon.

•

Under My Work Network or My ISP, tap on Manage existing connections.

Tap on the General tab.

•

Type the name you prefer in the field below Enter a name for these settings.

Tap on OK.

236 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Selecting A Network

6.31.7 Selecting A Network

Important: Normally, you will not need to change these settings. Contact your

ISP or network administrator before making any changes.

Private networks are used for work-related activities. Internet networks are used for

home connection to your ISP. The My Work Network settings are used for private

network connections (corporate networks), while My ISP settings are used for

Internet network connections.

When you use programs such as Messaging or Internet Explorer, your

WORKABOUT PRO automatically connects using private network settings under

My Work Network or Internet settings under My ISP, depending on specifications.

You can determine how your WORKABOUT PRO connects.

•

Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connec-

tions icon.

•

Tap on the Advanced tab.

•

Tap on Select Networks.

In the appropriate lists, choose My ISP or My Work Network.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 237

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Proxy Server Setup

6.31.8 Proxy Server Setup

Note: If you are connected to your ISP or private network during synchroniza-

tion, the WORKABOUT PRO will download the appropriate settings dur-

ing synchronization from your PC. If these settings are not on your PC, or

if they need to be changed, you’ll need to set up the proxy server connec-

tion manually.

To set up the proxy server connection manually, you’ll need the following

information: proxy server name, server type, port, type of Socks protocol used and

the user name and password.

•

Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connec-

tions icon.

•

Under My Work Network, tap on Set up my proxy server.

•

Add a checkmark next to This network connects to the Internet and This

network uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet.

•

In the Proxy server field, type the proxy server name.

Tap on OK to save your changes.

Note: If you need to change advanced settings such as a port number or proxy

server type, you’ll need to tap on the Advanced button rather than tap-

ping on OK. Advanced settings are described in “Changing Advanced

Proxy Server Settings” on page 239.

238 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Wireless Statistics

6.31.8.1 Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings

•

To change advanced settings such as the port number or proxy server type,

tap on the Advanced button.

•

Tap on the proxy type you want to change. For the appropriate server type,

type the proxy server name and port.

Tap on OK.

6.32 Wireless Statistics

•

Tap on Start>Settings>Connections>Wireless Statistics icon to

display the communication statistics of your wireless connection

along with the radio card name, MAC address, driver version and NDIS

Compliance information.

•

Tap on the Zero button to reset the statistics.

6.33 Wireless WAN

A WORKABOUT PRO equipped with a GSM/GPRS, CDMA/1xRTT or UMTS

radio provides wide area networking capabilities.

6.33.1 Softkey Bar Icons

Wireless WAN icons in the softkey bar indicate the status of your wide area network

connection. Note that these icons are only visible when a GSM/GPRS,

CDMA/1xRTT or UMTS radio is installed in the unit, and the interface is enabled.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 239

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Establishing A Connection

The letter in the signal strength icon (G for GSM/GPRS, U for UMTS and X for

CDMA/1xRTT) indicates that a packet data service is available and initialized.

Keep in mind that the signal strength icon is displayed without a letter if packet data

service is not available or if it is available but not yet initialized.

User interaction is required (e.g. the user is required to enter a PIN).

A non-recoverable (fatal) error has occurred.

GSM/GPRS Status Indicators

Signal strength is between 1% and 20%.

Signal strength is between 21% and 40%.

Signal strength is between 41% and 60%.

Signal strength is between 61% and 80%.

Signal strength is between 81% and 100%.

A GPRS packet data connection is active.

CDMA/1xRTT

Signal strength is between 1% and 20%.

Signal strength is between 21% and 40%.

Signal strength is between 41% and 60%.

Signal strength is between 61% and 80%.

Signal strength is between 81% and 100%.

A CDMA/1xRTT packet data connection is active.

6.33.2 Establishing A Connection

240 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Disconnecting From A Network

•

Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab followed by the Wireless

WAN icon.

Note: If you are prompted to enter a PIN, refer to “Entering A PIN” on page

242 for details.

The Status field indicates when the unit is ready to connect–the Connect Data

button is enabled.

•

Tap on the Connect Data button.

The progress of the connection is tracked in the Status field.

•

PPP link to modem active

Authenticating user

User authenticated

Connected

Note: Keep in mind that these states may be displayed fairly quickly if the

progress of the connection is rapid.

When the connection state reaches PPP link to modem active, the softkey bar icon

changes to indicate an active connection. The Connect Data button changes,

displaying Disconnect.

6.33.3 Disconnecting From A Network

To disconnect from the network:

•

Tap on the Disconnect button, and then on OK.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 241

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Advanced Information

When the WORKABOUT PRO network connection is severed, the Status field

displays Ready to Connect.

A unit equipped with a GSM/GPRS expansion board displays the signal strength in

the main Wireless WAN screen, even while a connection is active. Units equipped

with certain other modems (e.g. Sierra Wireless UMTS and CDMA modems,

Novatel UMTS modems) do not display the signal strength while a connection is

active.The Rx bytes and Tx bytes fields estimate the amount of data transmitted and

received, respectively.

6.33.3.1 Shutting Down The Wireless WAN User Interface

While it is not usual to shut down the GSM/GPRS user interface, you can

accomplish this by tapping on the File menu and choosing the Exit command in the

Wireless WAN screen.

Note: Once you’ve shut down the user interface, you can only enable the radio

by tapping on the Wireless WAN icon to display the dialog box.

6.33.4 Advanced Information

In most cases, when a GSM/GPRS radio and SIM are installed in your hand-held,

setup is automatic. Follow the steps outlined under the heading “Establishing A

Connection” on page 240 to make a connection. The information in this section is

for advanced setup purposes.

6.33.4.1 Entering A PIN

If a PIN is required, a PIN entry dialog box is displayed.

•

Type your PIN, and press [ENTER].

Note: If you exceed the number of allowable attempts, a PUK entry window is

brought to the foreground. You’ll need to enter a new PIN number.

242 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Advanced Information

Once the correct PIN or PUK is entered or if none was required, the modem is

instructed to perform a GSM network registration followed by a GPRS attach. The

main Wireless WAN dialog box reflects the progress of the initialization.

•

Searching for modem

Initializing modem

SIM is ready

Searching for network

Registered on network

Searching for packet data

Ready to connect

If the modem loses the connection to the GSM network, the following states are

repeated: Searching for network, Registered on network, Searching for packet data

and Ready to connect.

6.33.4.2 Error States

The following temporary error states–states that may disappear without interaction–

may be displayed:

•

Emergency calls only

The modem has found a network but is not allowed to register (e.g. no

roaming agreement between networks). The modem keeps searching for

another network.

•

No network found

A network is not currently available. The modem continues searching for a

network.

•

Packet data not available

The current network does not support packet data.

Packet data not allowed

The modem is not allowed to use packet data on the current network (e.g.

no packet data roaming agreement between network; a roaming agreement

for voice may still be in place). It is also possible that you do not have a

subscription for packet data at all.

The remaining error states are permanent:

SIM is missing

•

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 243

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Tools Menu

The SIM card is missing. After the SIM has been inserted a reset may be

required.

•

SIM failure

The SIM card is permanently disabled (e.g. because the wrong PUK has

been entered too many times). A new SIM is needed.

Modem failure

The modem did not respond to commands as expected. If a reset does not

clear this condition, the modem may need to be replaced.

NDIS error

An internal software error has occurred. If a reset does not clear this condi-

tion, Psion Teklogix technical support may need to investigate further.

6.33.5 Tools Menu

The Tools menu in the main Wireless WAN dialog box offers some additional,

advanced setup features.

6.33.5.1 Data Connection Configuration

Enable Automatic Connect

If the Enable automatic connect checkbox is checked (unchecked by default), the

Wireless WAN user interface will attempt to establish a packet data connection

whenever packet data is available (e.g. after resume from suspend without further

user interaction).

244 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Tools Menu

To activate the automatic connection mode:

Tap on the OK button.

•

While automatic connection mode is enabled, the Connect Data button in the main

Wireless LAN dialog box changes to Disable Auto.

To close the currently active connection (if any) and disable the automatic

connection mode:

•

Tap on Disable Auto.

Important: Automatic connection mode should not be used if applications

other than the Wireless WAN user interface (e.g. Connection

Manager) are expected to open and close connections.

If the automatic connection mode is enabled and another applica-

tion closes the packet data connection, the WWAN user interface

will immediately try to re-establish the connection.

Use Virtual Serial Port

If Use virtual serial port is enabled, packet data connections are established through

the virtual serial port of the WWAN driver rather than through the WWAN driver

directly. This checkbox should only be checked if certain third-party VPN (Virtual

Private Network) clients are used that do not work correctly otherwise. The default

setting is disabled (unchecked).

Note: The connection setup takes longer through the virtual serial port.

Enable Automatic Configuration

In most cases, the data connection is configured automatically and no user

interaction is required. This is true even if multiple SIM cards from different

operators are used with the same device. The connection parameters are adjusted

automatically when a new SIM card is detected (this may require a reset). The

connection parameters are retrieved from a database.

Manual configuration should be necessary only if:

•

One or more parameters in the database are incorrect or a new operator is

not yet in the database. (The database should be corrected for subsequent

software releases.)

•

An operator has assigned individual packet data user names and passwords.

A very large site has their own APN. Such connections always have to be

configured manually.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 245

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Tools Menu

•

A customer has subscribed for a static IP address. By definition this must be

configured manually.

Important: For CDMA/1xRTT, automatic configuration is not available –

connections must be configured manually. Under APN, the

packet service access number must be entered (typically “#777”).

In the following section, all the parameters that need to be configured for a

connection (such as APN, user name, password, DNS server addresses etc.) are

referred to as a profile. Every profile is identified by an arbitrary, unique name. The

profile named Default is special in that it is always present and can neither be edited

nor deleted. (A sample dialog box is presented on the page following.) The Default

profile uses parameters from a built-in database. The home network (the network

that issued the SIM) is used for the database look-up. While there can be many

configured profiles, only one profile can be active at any time.

If connection profiles are configured manually then the Enable automatic

configuration: checkbox should normally be unchecked.

In one particular use case, manually configured profiles may be combined with

automatic configuration. If multiple SIM cards are used with the same device, each

SIM card being from a different operator and some or all of them requiring a

manually set up profile, automatic configuration may be used to automatically pick

the correct manually configured profile for each SIM card. For this to work each

profile has to be configured while the corresponding SIM card is inserted in the

device and initialized (i.e. the status is at least SIM is ready).

The Select profile drop-down list in the data configuration profile selects which

profile a subsequent action applies to. A profile named Default is always present

and contains the current parameters from the database. The following actions are

available:

Show

The parameters for the selected profile are displayed when you tap on this button.

For the Default profile, the publicly known password is shown – otherwise, the

password is hidden.

Edit

The parameters of the selected profile can be edited when you choose the Edit

button. Keep in mind that you cannot edit the Default profile.

246 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Tools Menu

Delete

The selected profile is deleted. You cannot delete the Default profile.

Activate

When this button is chosen, the selected profile is made the active profile.

Activation is possible only if the Enable automatic configuration: checkbox is

unchecked.

New

Tapping on the New button allows you to create a new profile.

The name of the newly created profile must be different from all existing profiles.

Also, the name cannot be Default. When the New Data Profile dialog box is

opened, a proposal for a unique name is filled in the corresponding entry field. If a

manually configured profile has a secret password and unauthorized access to the

device is a concern even after the SIM PIN has been entered, the password should

not be entered in the New Data Profile dialog box and the Prompt user for

password checkbox should be checked instead. In this case, you will be prompted

for the password each time a connection is initiated (the Connect Data button in the

main Wireless WAN dialog box is selected).

Reset

The Reset button in the New Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes resets all entry

fields to the values they had when the dialog box was opened.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 247

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Tools Menu

Advanced IP

The Advanced IP button in the Show Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes opens

another dialog box that allows you to configure a static IP address as well as the IP

addresses for the primary and secondary DNS and WINS resolvers.

6.33.5.2 Security Configuration

The Security Configuration dialog box is called up through the Tools menu.

Note: Security configuration is not available with CDMA modems.

The Security Configuration dialog box allows you to enable, disable and change the

PIN. You will need the current PIN to make any of these changes. The PIN must be

enabled in order to be changed. (If the PIN is disabled, the New PIN entry field is

greyed out.)

Note: Keep in mind that some network operators do not allow the SIM PIN to be

disabled. A new PIN must consist of 4 to 8 numeric digits.

The Require PIN on resume checkbox is independent of the aforementioned

settings. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. While the checkbox remains

unchecked, any PIN entered on startup or through the Security Configuration dialog

box and submitted successfully to the modem is stored in memory for as long as the

device is not rebooted. This stored PIN is then used without further user interaction

whenever the modem requires a PIN (such as resume after suspend or modem

removal). The stored PIN is also automatically entered in the Current PIN text box

whenever the Security Configuration dialog box is called up.

248 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Tools Menu

If unauthorized access to the device is a concern, the Require PIN on resume

checkbox should be checked. In this case, you will be prompted whenever a PIN is

required and the PIN is not stored.

6.33.5.3 Network Configuration

Note: Network configuration is not available with CDMA modems.

In the main Wireless WAN screen:

•

Tap on the Tools menu, and choose Network.

By default the GSM radio modem automatically chooses from the available and

allowed networks (allowed networks are the home network and all other networks

with which the home network has a roaming agreement). You may find there are

some situations in which you want to override this default behaviour. For example,

you may want to disable roaming if you find yourself in a border area where the

home network is not available but a foreign roaming partner is available. Abroad,

you may find that an available network does not have packet data roaming

agreements. In this case, you’ll need to manually select the network which you

know to support packet data roaming.

Automatic network selection is enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking

Enable automatic network select in the Network dialog box. When automatic

network selection is disabled, you must select a network manually.

Available networks can also be viewed without changing any settings. Scanning for

available networks is a lengthy operation – a progress bar is shown while the scan is

active. For every network that is found, the network name, country, status and

numeric network identifier (MCC/MNC, Mobile Country Code followed by the

Mobile Network Code) is displayed.

Note: Your home network operator will need to let you know which other net-

works have roaming agreements. Even when a network is listed with an

‘Available’ status, it does not necessarily follow that it can be used or that

the roaming agreement covers packet data.

A status of ‘Forbidden’ indicates that the network cannot be used. If you

choose a network that is not covered by a roaming agreement, the status in

the main WWAN dialog box changes to ‘Emergency calls only’, ‘No net-

work found’, ‘GPRS not available’ or ‘GPRS not allowed’.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 249

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Tools Menu

6.33.5.4 Driver Mode Configuration

By default, the Wireless WAN driver is enabled (the Enable driver checkbox is

checked). The driver must be disabled in order to access the modem directly (e.g.

dial-up data, fax, or in order to manually submit AT commands to the modem for

development, testing, approvals, etc.). In most cases, the Virtual WWAN serial port

can be used and it is not necessary to disable the WWAN driver. If the Enable driver

checkbox is not checked, the driver is shut down as soon as the OK button in the

Driver Mode dialog box tapped.

If, on the other hand, the Wireless WAN driver is not running and the Enable driver

checkbox is checked, the Wireless WAN driver is started as soon the Driver Mode

dialog box is closed using the OK button.

Note: When the driver is not running, no network status or signal strength can

be displayed.

Since all currently supported modems are automatically detected, the Enable

automatic port detection checkbox should always be checked. If this checkbox is

not checked, a serial port can be selected manually. This experimental feature allows

the driver to be used with an internal GSM modem that was not recognized by the

automatic detection or an external GSM modem connected to a serial port of the

computer through USB or through Bluetooth. An external modem connected to a

serial port must support 115.2kbit/s, 8bit, no parity and hardware flow control.

250 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

Tools Menu

6.33.5.5 Modem Information

The fields in this dialog box cannot be edited – they only display information about

the WORKABOUT PRO modem. If the network operator has not programmed a

user’s phone number into the SIM, the Phone field remains empty. The modem

serial number is called IMEI for GSM modems and ESN for CDMA modems.

The SIM ID is sometimes referred to as the ICC ID (International Charge Card

Identifier). Not all modems support the retrieval of the SIM ID. In particular, the

Novatel Merlin UMTS modems and the Option Globetrotter modems do not

support SIM ID retrieval.

If the main menu shows an error status, at least partial modem information may

be available.

Modem Power Modes

The power mode of the modem is controlled through the Power icon rather than

through the Wireless WAN user interface.

To adjust PC Card and CF card modems settings:

•

Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System tab followed by the

Power icon.

•

Tap on the Card Slots tab.

If the checkbox for a modem is unchecked, power is not applied to the modem and a

driver is not loaded (neither the serial port driver nor the Wireless WAN driver). If

the checkbox is checked, power is applied to the modem and the drivers are loaded

when the hand-held is turned on. Power is removed from the modem when the

WORKABOUT PRO enters suspend mode.

To enable a modem module that is built into the unit:

•

Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System tab followed by the

Power icon.

For a modem module that is built into the WORKABOUT PRO, the settings can be

found under the Built-in Devices tab. In this case, one of the following power modes

can be selected:

•

Disabled – No power is applied to the modem and no driver is loaded.

Enabled – Off in Suspend

Power is applied to the modem and the drivers are loaded when the hand-

held is turned on. Power is removed from the modem when the terminal

enters suspend mode.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 251

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

SMS Menu

•

Enabled – Always On

When the WORKABOUT PRO enters suspend mode, the modem remains

powered indefinitely.

•

Enabled – Keep on for 5 min

Enabled – Keep on for 15 min

Enabled – Keep on for 30 min

Enabled – Keep on for 1 hour

Enabled – Keep on for 2 hours

When the hand-held enters suspend mode, the modem remains powered. If

the WORKABOUT PRO is not turned on again during the configured time,

the unit briefly wakes up from suspend mode, shuts down the modem, and

enters suspend mode again. The default mode is Enabled - Keep on for 1

hour.

At the cost of a slightly increased power consumption in suspend mode, the modes

where the modem remains powered during suspend mode have several advantages.

When the hand-held wakes from suspend mode, the modem is ready immediately;

modem or network initialization is not required. A packet data session can thus

remain active during suspend mode. In these modes, the modem is also able to wake

up the hand-held if the network status changes, or there is a new incoming SMS.

6.33.6 SMS Menu

SMS functions are accessed through the SMS menu. For modems that support a

SIM card, the SIM initialization typically takes longer than the network initializa-

tion, resulting in a noticeable delay before the SMS functions become available.

252 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

SMS Menu

6.33.6.1 New SMS

Tapping on New opens a dialog box for sending a new SMS message. The

recipient's phone number (to be entered in the To field) can consist of the digits 0

through 9, as well as the * and # characters, optionally preceded by one + character,

indicating an international number (i.e. the country code follows immediately after

the + character).

By checking the Store message in Outbox field, a new message can be stored in the

Outbox before being sent. If no storage space is available or the modem does not

support the storage of outgoing messages, this checkbox is disabled.

6.33.6.2 Inbox

Tapping on Inbox opens the list of received messages. Reading 50 messages, for

example, from the SIM can take about 30 seconds. By default the list of messages

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 253

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

SMS Menu

is sorted with the most recently received message first. The list can be sorted by

any other column by clicking on the corresponding column heading.

Clicking the same column heading twice reverses the sort order. Pressing any

letter or digit moves the highlight to the next message whose address begins with

that letter or number.

Note: The date and time formats can be changed through the Regional Settings

in the Control Panel. For a new date or time format to take effect, the

Inbox has to be closed and re-opened.

The Open button opens the selected message in a new window such that the entire

message can be read including the original formatting (line breaks are replaced by

spaces in the Inbox message list). Pressing the Reply button opens the new

message dialog as described above, except the destination phone number is

already filled in. Pressing the Delete button erases the message.

6.33.6.3 Outbox

Tapping on Outbox opens a list of sent messages. Otherwise the Outbox behaves

exactly as the Inbox described above. The date and time when a message was sent is

not available for GSM modems.

254 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6: Settings

SMS Menu

6.33.6.4 SMS Configuration

Tapping on SMS Configuration opens the SMS configuration dialog. The SMS

Centre Address follows the same rules as the recipient's phone number in the New

message dialog. The Message Validity Period parameter is sent to the SMS Centre

with each message sent subsequently and instructs the SMS Centre on how long it

should attempt to deliver the message to the recipient (the SMS Centre may impose

an upper limit on the validity period regardless of the setting).

Note: Only certain discrete validity period values can be sent and thus, the

validity period is rounded to the nearest allowed value. The next time the

SMS configuration dialog is opened, the rounded value is shown.

The user interface tries to keep the SMS storage location available for a new

incoming message if the Delete oldest message when full checkbox is checked. In

this case, when a new message arrives and the SMS storage becomes full, the oldest

received message is deleted. If any string is entered as the Message Suppression

Prefix, messages beginning with that string will not be shown in either the Inbox or

Outbox. In this way, messages intended for another application running on the same

device can be hidden.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 255

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROGRAMS

7.1 Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

7.2 ActiveSync® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

7.2.1 Synchronization Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

7.2.2 ActiveSync Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

7.2.3 Scheduling Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

7.2.4 Connecting To The Internet With ActiveSync. . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

7.3 Calculator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

7.4 Demo Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

7.5 Demo Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

7.6 Download Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

7.7 Excel Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

7.7.1 Workbook Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

7.7.2 Adding, Deleting And Renaming Worksheet s . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

7.7.3 Entering Data In A Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

7.7.4 Working With Cells, Rows and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

7.7.5 Creating Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

7.8 File Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

7.9 Internet Sharing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

7.10 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

7.10.1 Creating A Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

7.10.2 Converting Handwritten Notes To Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

7.10.3 Renaming A Note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

7.10.4 Recording Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

7.10.5 Synchronizing A Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

7.11 Pictures & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

7.11.1 Moving Photos To The WORKBOUT PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

7.11.2 Opening A Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

257

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

7.11.3 Deleting A Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 77

7.11.4 Editing A Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 78

7.11.5 Creating A Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 78

7.12 Pocket MSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 78

7.12.1 Setting Up Y o ur MSN Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 78

7.12.2 First-Time Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 79

7.12.3 Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 79

7.12.4 Adding Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 80

7.12.5 Blocking And Unblocking A Contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 81

7.12.6 Changing Your Contact Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281

7.13 Summit Client Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 81

7.14 Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 82

7.14.1 Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 82

7.14.2 Browsing Web Site s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 82

7.15 Messaging–The Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 83

7.15.1 Folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 84

7.15.2 Synchronizing E-mail With Outlook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 84

7.15.3 Changing Synchronization Setting s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 86

7.15.4 Creating a New Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 87

7.16 Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 87

7.17 Terminal Services Client. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 87

7.17.1 Connecting To A Terminal Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 87

7.17.2 Moving Around Terminal Services Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 88

7.17.3 Improving Display Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 88

7.17.4 Improving Browser Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 89

7.17.5 Disconnecting Without Ending A Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289

7.17.6 Ending A Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289

7.18 Word Mobile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289

7.18.1 Creating A New Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290

7.18.2 Data Entry Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

7.18.3 Sharing Documents With Your PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

258 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Games

The Programs menu provides access to all the applications available on your

WORKABOUT PRO.

•

Tap on Start>Programs to display this screen.

Tapping on an icon in this screen launches the associated applet.

Figure 7.1 Programs Tabs

7.1 Games

Your WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with a few standard games–Bubble Breaker

and Solitaire–should you feel the need to pass the time.

7.2 ActiveSync

ActiveSync®–Microsoft PC connectivity software–can be used to connect the

WORKABOUT PRO to PCs running this software. By connecting the hand-held to a

PC through your desktop docking station and running ActiveSync on the PC, you can

view WORKABOUT PRO files, drag and drop files between the hand-held and the

PC, connect to the Internet, and so on.

ActiveSync 4.2 can be installed from the Getting Started CD included with your

WORKABOUT PRO.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 259

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Synchronization Wizard

7.2.1 Synchronization Wizard

If your corporation has a Microsoft Exchange Server with Exchange Server

ActiveSync installed, you can use the Synchronization Wizard to synchronize your

WORKABOUT PRO with the server. When you connect the WORKABOUT PRO

to your PC, a screen is displayed to help you synchronize your device.

Keep in mind that you can only synchronize items with one or the other–for

example, if you sync your Inbox with the server, you cannot sync it with your PC.

Follow the steps outlined to synchronize your unit with your PC.

•

If you want to limit synchronization directly with your PC rather than a

server, tap on the Cancel button in this screen. The WORKABOUT PRO

will be synchronized with your PC.

260 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

ActiveSync Options

7.2.2 ActiveSync Options

•

In the ActiveSync program on your PC, tap on Tools>Options to display

the Sync Options tab.

•

Tap in the checkboxes to choose the types of information you want Active-

Sync to synchronize.

7.2.3 Scheduling Synchronization

To choose when your data will be synchronized:

•

Tap on the Schedule tab in the Options dialog box.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 261

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Connecting To The Internet With ActiveSync

•

Tap on the drop-down menu next to Peak times to determine how often

ActiveSync will synchronize during the busiest e-mail traffic times and next

to Off peak times for slower e-mail times.

7.2.4 Connecting To The Internet With ActiveSync

If your PC is connected to the Internet and your WORKABOUT PRO is connected

to your PC with ActiveSync, then your WORKABOUT PRO is connected to

the Internet.

To connect to the Internet with ActiveSync:

•

Make certain that your PC is connected to the Internet.

Connect your WORKABOUT PRO to your PC.

On your WORKABOUT PRO, check your connection by tapping

Start>Programs>ActiveSync to make certain it says Connected, or

On your PC, the ActiveSync Details screen should say Connected.

7.3 Calculator

Tapping on Start>Programs>Calculator displays a standard calculator with regular

functions.

•

Use your stylus to tap the calculator buttons.

7.4 Demo Imager

The Demo Imager icon is used to test simple image-capturing and to display bar

code data and bar code statistics on the same screen with image data and

information. Keep in mind that if an imager is not installed in your unit, the Demo

Imager dialog box is not displayed.

7.5 Demo Scanner

The Demo Scanner icon is used to test how the hand-held reads and writes bar

codes. The Demo Scanner dialog box contains buttons at the bottom of the dialog

box that allow you to Scan, Reset or change bar code Settings.

262 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Download Agent

7.6 Download Agent

This option is not supported on the WORKABOUT PRO.

7.7 Excel Mobile

Excel Mobile is an abridged version of Microsoft Excel, an electronic spreadsheet

program. If you’re familiar the Excel application on your PC, you’ll be able to

navigate Excel Mobile.

In addition to providing the tools to manipulate text and numeric values like

statistics, percentages, using formulas that perform calculations, and so on, this

program can also include graphics such as pie charts.

Excel Mobile allows you to copy Excel workbooks from your PC onto your

WORKABOUT PRO and update them while you’re away from your desk.

•

Tap on Start>Programs>Excel Mobile. A blank workbook is displayed.

•

If a list of workbooks is displayed rather than a new sheet, you’ll need to

create a new workbook. To create a workbook:

In Excel Mobile, tap the Menu>New.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 263

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Workbook Components

7.7.1 Workbook Components

Columns

Address of selected text

Rows

Entry bar

Cell

Selected cell

Status bar

Toolbar

Menu bar

Formula drop-down menu

Sheet1 drop-down menu

•

If the toolbar is not visible, tap on the View>Toolbar.

By default, a new workbook has three worksheets in it. Each worksheet has 256

columns and 16,384 rows.

7.7.2 Adding, Deleting And Renaming Worksheets

To add, remove or rename a worksheet from within a workbook:

•

Tap on Menu>Format>Modify Sheets.

•

Tap on the sheet you want to modify in the left column.

264 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Entering Data In A Worksheet

•

Tap Rename to assign a new name, Insert to add a new worksheet, Delete

to remove the worksheet, and Move Up or Move Down to change the order

of the worksheets.

7.7.3 Entering Data In A Worksheet

•

Tap on the cell in which you want to type text or numbers. A border appears

around the cell.

•

Begin typing text or numbers. As you type, a blinking cursor is displayed in

the entry bar at the top of the screen. This is where the data appears before it

is placed in a cell.

The data you type appears in the ‘entry bar’

before being placed in the ‘selected cell’.

Entry bar

Selected cell

•

Tap the check mark to the left of the entry bar, press [ENTER] either on the

soft keyboard or on the WORKABOUT PRO keyboard to place the data

into the cell.

Cancelling An Entry

•

Tap on the ‘x’ button to the left of the entry bar.

Editing Cell Text Or Numbers

•

Tap at the end of the data in the entry bar, and then change the text using the

text entry method you prefer–soft keyboard, WORKABOUT PRO key-

board, and so on.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 265

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Working With Cells, Rows and Columns

Entering Symbols

To enter symbols like hatch symbol (#) or to change the character set:

•

Tap on Menu>Insert>Symbol.

In the Insert Symbol dialog box, choose the font you would prefer to use.

In the Subset drop-down menu, choose the character set you’d like to use.

7.7.4 Working With Cells, Rows and Columns

Excel offers a number of formatting and editing tools to help you create a profes-

sional and accurate spreadsheet.

Formatting Cells

•

Tap on the cell you want to format, or select a group of cells by dragging the

stylus across them.

•

Tap on Menu>Format>Cells.

With this dialog box, you can change the cell size (in pixels), and format the display

of numbers, alignment, fonts and borders.

•

In the tabs at the bottom of the screen, choose the specific cell characteris-

tics you want to change.

266 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Working With Cells, Rows and Columns

Inserting Rows And Columns

To insert a cell, row or column:

•

Tap a cell in the workbook next to which you want to insert a cell, row

or column.

•

Tap Menu>Insert>Cells, or

Tap and hold the stylus on a cell. In the pop-up menu, choose Insert Cells.

The Insert Cells screen appears.

•

Tap in one of the radio buttons:

Deleting Cells, Rows And Columns

•

Tap a cell that you want to delete, or if you want to delete an entire row or

column, tap on a cell in the row or column you want to delete.

•

Tap on Menu>Edit>Delete Cells, or

Press and hold the stylus on a cell, and tap on Delete in the pop-up menu,

and choose and option from the Delete Cells dialog box.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 267

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Creating Formulas

7.7.5 Creating Formulas

A formula is an equation beginning with an = sign that performs operations on

your data. The operations can be mathematical and can use numbers, text or

cell addresses.

You can enter formulas manually, or you can use the Insert function command that

lists a collection of standard formulas.

Inserting Formulas Manually

In this example, the total expense

will appear in the selected cell,

next to ‘Total’.

•

Tap the stylus in the cell where you want the result of the formula to appear.

Tap the stylus in the entry bar, and begin the formula by typing an

equal sign ‘=’.

Figure 7.2 Beginning A Formula Manually

268 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Creating Formulas

In the example above, the objective is to add the expenses together, placing the total

in the cell next to Total.

•

Tap the stylus in cell B1–the cell containing the value, 100–the value B1

appears in the entry bar.

•

Since in this example, we want to add values together, tap the stylus on the

plus sign ‘+’ in the soft keyboard–tap the [CAPS] key in the soft keyboard

to display this symbol.

•

Tap the stylus in cell B2–the cell containing the value, 200.

Tap on the check mark icon to the left of the entry bar. The total of cells B1

and B2 are displayed in the cell that you selected at the outset – the cell

labelled Total.

Figure 7.3 Formula Results

Note: Formulas are automatically recalculated whenever any changes are made

to the cells where the formula is applied.

Using The Insert Function Command

•

Tap the cell in which you want the result of the formula to appear.

•

To display the Insert Function dialog box, tap on Menu>Insert>Function,

Tap on the fx button to the left of the entry bar. (If this button is not visible,

tap the stylus in the entry bar.)

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 269

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Creating Formulas

•

Tap on the formula you want to use–for this example, the SUM formula

was used–‘SUM(number1,number2,...)’, and tap on OK.

Important: The formula is displayed in the entry bar of the worksheet. This

formula is a model. The information in the parentheses must be

replaced by your data.

Figure 7.4 Inserting A Function

In this example, in the parentheses, the SUM function sample indicates that numbers

(or cell coordinates) be separated by commas.

•

In the entry bar, delete the example information between the parentheses–in

this example, (number1,number2...). Leave the parenthesis themselves

in place.

•

With the cursor positioned between the parentheses, tap the stylus on the

first cell you want to include in this formula, and then type a comma.

270 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

File Explorer

•

Tap the stylus on the next cell you want included in the formula – remember

to separate each entry with a comma.

When you’re done, tap on the check mark to the left of the entry bar.

The formula is calculated and the total is entered in the cell you selected at the outset.

7.8 File Explorer

Windows Mobile 5.0 files are stored in folders and sub-folders that are accessible

through File Explorer. You can open, save, rename, copy and paste files in the same

manner as you would on any desktop PC.

Important: Refer to “Managing Files And Folders” on page 59 for details

about this program.

7.9 Internet Sharing

This option is not supported for the WORKABOUT PRO.

7.10 Notes

The Notes application is an electronic notepad you can use to jot down your ideas

quickly. You can enter text using the soft keyboard, the WORKABOUT PRO

keyboard, or you can write on the screen using your stylus. You can also record

a message.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 271

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Creating A Note

Notes can also be shared through e-mail and synchronization with your PC.

•

Tap on Start>Programs>Notes to launch this application.

If a blank Note like the sample screen here is not displayed, tap on New in

the softkey bar.

7.10.1 Creating A Note

•

Choose an entry mode for your note.

To enter text with the soft keyboard, Transcriber or the Block or Letter Rec-

ognizer, tap the stylus on the arrow to the right on the soft keyboard icon

to choose your text input method.

To use your stylus to handwrite on the screen, tap on the pen icon

Important: Refer to “Entering Text” on page 66 for text entry details.

•

Compose your note using the method you’ve chosen.

Tap on OK when you’re done.

Your note is automatically saved. The file name is the first line of the note if you

used the keyboard–otherwise, it’s named Note1, Note2 and so on.

7.10.2 Converting Handwritten Notes To Text

When you use the pen tool, you can write notes in your own handwriting and keep

them as is, if you like. You can also teach the WORKABOUT PRO to recognize

your handwriting and convert it into printed text.

272 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Converting Handwritten Notes To Text

To convert handwriting into text:

• Tap on the pen tool

and compose a note using your stylus.

•

Tap on Menu>Tools>Recognize.

The text in the note is converted from handwritten to printed text.

Note: To convert only a specific portion of your handwritten note into printed

type, tap the stylus just before the first letter of the text, pause for a sec-

ond, and then drag your stylus across the text you want to select. Then,

tap on Tools>Recognize to convert only the highlighted text.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 273

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Renaming A Note

Failed Conversions

The Recognize tool sometimes gets the conversion wrong. If some words are not

converted properly:

•

Press and hold the stylus on the incorrectly converted word.

In the pop-up menu, choose Alternative to display a list of possible alterna-

tives to the incorrectly converted word. Your handwritten version is dis-

played along the top of the menu.

Figure 7.5 Incorrect Conversions

Tap on the correct word in the list.

•

If the correct word is not listed, as is the case in the sample screen above,

tap on the soft keyboard icon

the correct word.

to display the soft keyboard, and type

7.10.3 Renaming A Note

•

Press and hold the stylus on the file name in the Notes screen that you want

to rename. In the pop-up menu, choose Rename/Move, or

Tap the file name to select it, and tap on Menu>Rename/Move.

•

In the Name field, type the new name, and tap OK.

7.10.4 Recording Notes

It’s sometimes easier to record a note than to write it down just to make certain that

you’ve captured an idea before it drifts away. To make an audio recording:

•

Tap on New to open a fresh note.

274 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Recording Notes

•

Tap on Menu>View Recording Toolbar.

Volume

Skip to end

Skip to beginning

Record

Stop

Play

Progress

Indicator

•

Tap on the Record button–a beep alerts you that your device is now ready

to record.

Begin speaking into the microphone on the WORKABOUT PRO, or move

the hand-held to within a few feet of the source of the sound you want

to record.

•

Tap on the Stop button when you’ve completed your recording.

Tap on OK to save the note.

A speaker icon is displayed in the note indicating the presence of a recording within

the note.

•

To play the recorded note, tap on the speaker icon.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 275

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Synchronizing A Note

7.10.5 Synchronizing A Note

Like Messaging, Tasks, Contacts and so on, the Notes program can be synchronized

with Outlook on your PC. In this way, all notes, recordings and drawings created in the

Notes program are copied to your PC and can be edited in Outlook’s Notes module.

To synchronize Notes with Outlook:

•

Connect your WORKABOUT PRO to your PC.

In the ActiveSync screen on your PC, tap on the Tools>Options menu to

display the Options tab.

Figure 7.6 PC Sync Options Tab

Make certain that Notes is selected in this tab, and tap on OK.

•

When you next synchronize your WORKABOUT PRO with ActiveSync, all your

notes are copied to your PC.

7.11 Pictures & Videos

Pictures & Videos is a photo and video viewing program. This program also

provides a number of tools that allow you to crop, adjust picture contrast and

brightness, zoom in and out of photos and save your adjustments.

276 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Moving Photos To The WORKBOUT PRO

Important: The Pictures & Videos program can only display .bmp or .jpg for-

mats. Photos in other formats will need to be converted on your

PC before they are transferred to the WORKABOUT PRO.

7.11.1 Moving Photos To The WORKBOUT PRO

•

Connect your device to your PC with ActiveSync.

On your PC, using Windows Explorer (right-click My Computer and click

on Explorer), drag photos from their folder to the Mobile Device, My Pic-

tures folder.

7.11.2 Opening A Photo

•

Tap on Start>Programs>Pictures & Videos. You’ll see a thumbnail of

your photos.

Note: If you’ve stored your photos on a storage card, you’ll need to tap on the

storage card icon to display your photos.

•

Tap on a thumbnail to open a photo.

7.11.3 Deleting A Photo

•

Press and hold the stylus on the thumbnail photo you want to delete to

display a pop-up menu. Tap on Delete.

•

Confirm your choice when prompted.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 277

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Editing A Photo

7.11.4 Editing A Photo

•

Tap a thumbnail photo to open it.

Tap on Menu>Edit.

The Rotate command is now displayed in the softkey bar. Additional editing tools

are now listed in the Menu.

7.11.5 Creating A Slide Show

To view a slide show:

•

Tap on the Menu>Play Slide Show.

The slide show begins–in slide show mode, photos are displayed for about five

seconds, one after the other.

•

To display the slide show tool bar, tap anywhere on the photo.

Pause

Play

Flip View

7.12 Pocket MSN

Pocket MSN is a subscription-based service that provides access to MSN Hotmail,

MSN Messenger, and MSN Mobile web content.

7.12.1 Setting Up Your MSN Account

To use Pocket MSN, you’ll need an Internet connection and a Passport account to

log into MSN’s messaging servers.

278 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

First-Time Startup

Note: MSN and Hotmail e-mail addresses are valid Passports accounts.

•

Set up a connection on your mobile device such as a modem or wireless

connection. Refer to “Connections Tab” beginning on page 217 for details.

•

Set up an MSN Hotmail or Passport account.

To set up an MSN account, go to http://www.passport.com.

To set up a hotmail account, go to http://www.hotmail.com.

Important: You must register and pay a one-time fee in order to activate

Pocket MSN. Keep in mind also that this application is not avail-

able everywhere–you may not be able to subscribe to this service

in your region. Go the http://mobile.msn.com to determine if you

can subscribe to Pocket MSN.

7.12.2 First-Time Startup

When you first use Pocket MSN, you are prompted to provide your account

information for which you can either use a Hotmail or Passport account.

To use Pocket MSN, you must connect your WORKABOUT PRO to the Internet.

7.12.3 Getting Started

•

Tap Start>Programs, and then tap on the Pocket MSN icon, or tap on the

Pocket MSN icon in the Today screen.

•

Tap on an option, for example, MSN Messenger. In the subsequent screen,

tap on Sign In.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 279

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Adding Contacts

The MSN - Sign In dialog box is displayed.

•

Type your E-mail address–your MSN Passport or Hotmail e-mail account.

In the Password field, type your MSN Passport or Hotmail password.

Tap on Sign In.

7.12.4 Adding Contacts

The people you plan to chat with are known as your contacts in Pocket MSN.

Important: These contacts are not to be confused with those identified in the

Contacts program. MSN Messenger contacts are stored on MSN’s

servers, not on your device–you cannot view them unless you’re

online and signed in. Contacts created in the Contacts program

are synchronized with Outlook’s Contacts module.

You cannot send an instant message to someone until you’ve added that person as a

contact in MSN Messenger. To add a contact:

•

Tap on Menu>Add a Contact.

Type the contact’s full MSN Messenger sign-in name.

Tap on Next.

You’ll see a “Success!” message if the contact is accepted. If the contact information

was rejected, the Add A Contact dialog box is displayed once again.

Your contact is listed on the main MSN Messenger screen whenever you sign in to

the service.

280 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Blocking And Unblocking A Contact

7.12.5 Blocking And Unblocking A Contact

To block a contact:

•

In the startup MSN Messenger screen, press and hold the stylus on a contact

whose messages you want to block.

•

Choose Block in the pop-up menu.

On the MSN Messenger screen, you’ll see a red slash through the icon next to this

contact’s name. Blocked contacts do not know they’ve been blocked. To them, your

status will always be ‘not online’.

To unblock a contact:

•

In the startup MSN Messenger screen, press and hold the stylus on a con-

tact’s name.

•

Choose Unblock in the pop-up menu.

7.12.6 Changing Your Contact Status

To change your contact status:

•

Tap on Menu>My Status.

When you’re signed in but unable (or unwilling) to reply to messages,

choose a status such as Away or Busy.

•

Choose Appear Offline if you want to see your contacts even though it will

appear to them that you’re not signed in.

7.13 Summit Client Utility

The SCU provides the utilities you will need to configure the Summit 802.11g

Compact Flash radio module, model number RA2041 so that it can communicate

through a wireless LAN network effectively and securely. Refer to “Setting Up A

RA2041 Radio–Summit Client Utility” on page 73 for details.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 281

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

7.14 Search

•

Tap Start>Programs, and then tap on the Search icon.

•

In the Search for field, type the item for which you’re looking.

To narrow your search, tap on the Type dropdown menu and choose from a list of

pre-existing programs. To search through all files, leave this option at All Data.

7.14.1 Internet Explorer

You can connect to Internet Explorer in two ways: by connecting the WORK-

ABOUT PRO directly to the Internet or by connecting through your PC while the

hand-held is attached via ActiveSync (see “ActiveSync®” on page 259).

7.14.2 Browsing Web Sites

There is little difference between the standard Internet Explorer found on your PC

and that found on your WORKABOUT PRO, sometimes referred to as Pocket

Internet Explorer. You can enter URLs, set a ‘home page’, turn images on and off,

e-mail links to friends, and so on.

282 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Messaging–The Inbox

To go to a web site:

•

Connect your WORKABOUT PRO to the Internet. (Refer to “Connecting

To The Internet With ActiveSync” on page 262 for details.)

•

Tap on Start>Programs>Internet Explorer to open Internet Explorer.

Internet Explorer is also available from the Today screen.

•

Tap on the address bar–the field near the top of the screen where URLs are

entered–to highlight the current URL.

Type a new URL in the address bar.

Tapping on the softkeys in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen display

Internet Explorer commands like those you find on your PC.

7.15 Messaging–The Inbox

The Messaging program is used to send and receive e-mail on your WORKABOUT

PRO. To send and receive e-mail, you’ll need to synchronize your PC or connect to

a Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3) or Internet Message Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4)

mail server.

For each of these methods, you need to set up an e-mail account with one

exception–Outlook e-mail accounts are set up by default.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 283

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Folders

7.15.1 Folders

If you use an Outlook e-mail account, messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are

automatically synchronized with your WORKABOUT PRO. You can use

ActiveSync on your PC to synchronize additional folders. The folders and messages

you move are mirrored on the server.

For POP3 accounts, if you move e-mail messages to a folder you create, the link

between the messages on the WORKABOUT PRO and the copies on the mail

server are broken. When you next connect, the mail server will recognize that the

messages are missing from the WORKABOUT PRO Inbox folder and delete them

from the server, preventing duplication of messages. Keep in mind however that you

will not have further access to messages that you moved to folders from anywhere

except with the hand-held.

For IMAP4 accounts, the folders you create and the messages you move are

reflected on the server, making messages available any time whether you connect to

your mail server from your WORKABOUT PRO or your PC.

7.15.2 Synchronizing E-mail With Outlook

By synchronizing the WORKABOUT PRO Messaging program with Outlook on

your PC, your e-mail is available on both the hand-held and on your PC.

Note: Synchronizing e-mail does not require that the WORKABOUT PRO have

an independent connection to the Internet.

284 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Synchronizing E-mail With Outlook

•

In ActiveSync on your PC, tap on Tools>Options in the tool bar at the top

of the screen.

•

Make certain that a check mark is displayed in the checkbox next to E-mail.

Tap on OK.

Once you check E-mail for synchronization, Outlook e-mail messages are

synchronized as part of the general synchronization process. The next time you

synchronize with ActiveSync, the e-mail in Outlook on your PC will be transferred

to the Messaging program on your WORKABOUT PRO.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 285

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Changing Synchronization Settings

7.15.3 Changing Synchronization Settings

•

In ActiveSync on your PC, double-tap the E-mail item in the Sync Options tab.

•

Tap on the Select Folder button.

•

Add a checkmark next to the folders in this screen that you want to synchro-

nize with your WORKABOUT PRO, and tap on OK.

286 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Creating a New Account

The E-mail Synchronization screen is displayed again.

•

If you want to accept file attachments, add a check mark next to Include file

attachments. To limit the size, tap on Only if smaller than, and specify a

size in the KB box.

•

Tap on OK.

7.15.4 Creating a New Account

•

Tap on Programs>Messaging icon. (Messaging may be available directly

from your Today screen.)

•

In the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen, tap on Menu>Tools>New

Account to display the E-mail Setup screen.

Detailed Help files are available for E-mail setup.

Tap on the question mark icon in the upper-right corner of the E-mail

Setup screen to display the steps you’ll need to create an e-mail account.

•

7.16 Tasks

This program helps you stay ahead of your schedule by managing your tasks,

appointments, and so on. For details about Tasks, refer to “Task Notification” on

page 52.

7.17 Terminal Services Client

This program allows you to log onto a PC that is running Terminal Services Client

or Remote Desktop so that you can use all the programs available on the PC while

working on your WORKABOUT PRO.

7.17.1 Connecting To A Terminal Server

•

Start a remote connect to the server using a modem or network card.

Important: Refer to “Modem Connection Setup” on page 226 and

“Wireless Power Icon” on page 231 for details about

these connections.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 287

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Moving Around Terminal Services Client

•

Tap on Start>Programs>Terminal Services Client.

•

If the Recent Servers list contains any servers to which you have recently

connected, tap on the server.

•

To connect to a new server, type the server’s name in the Server field.

If you are using applications that have been sized for use with the WORK-

ABOUT PRO, tap the stylus in the checkbox next to Limit size of server

desktop to fit on this screen.

•

Tap on the Connect button.

7.17.2 Moving Around Terminal Services Client

You may notice that the desktop PC’s screen is too large to fit in the WORKABOUT

PRO screen. If the scroll bars are displayed, you’ll see more than one set of scroll

bars on your hand-held. To avoid any confusion, it’s best to use the five directional

buttons at the bottom of the Terminal Services Client screen.

To better accommodate screen size, consider enabling in the checkbox next to Limit

size of server desktop to fit on this screen.

7.17.3 Improving Display Performance

To speed up display performance by reducing the time it takes to refresh a screen,

you can make a quick adjustment on your PC.

•

On your PC, choose Start>Settings>Control Panel.

Tap on the Display icon.

Disable the checkbox next to Transition effects for menus and tooltips.

288 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Improving Browser Performance

7.17.4 Improving Browser Performance

When you reduce the time taken to refresh a Web page, Internet Explorer

performance is improved.

•

On your PC, in Internet Explorer, choose Tools>Internet Options, and tap

on the Advanced tab.

Disable the check mark next to Use smooth scrolling.

7.17.5 Disconnecting Without Ending A Session

Important: These commands are accessed from the Start menu in the Termi-

nal Services screen used to access the PC’s commands. Do NOT

use the Start menu on your WORKABOUT PRO.

•

In the Terminal Services screen, tap on Start>Shutdown.

Tap on Disconnect.

7.17.6 Ending A Session

•

In the Terminal Services Client screen, tap on Start>Shutdown.

Tap on Log Off.

7.18 Word Mobile

If you’ve used Microsoft Word on your Mac or PC, Pocket Word will be familiar to

you. Keep in mind however that Word Mobile is designed for a small screen and

limited memory.

Keep in mind also that a Word document created on your PC can lose key

formatting features such as styles and tables if you make changes to it on your

WORKABOUT PRO.

•

Tap on Start>Programs>Word Mobile.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 289

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Creating A New Document

If you’ve already create a Word Mobile document, it will be listed in the Word

Mobile window.

•

Tap on New in the softkey bar to create a new Word document

7.18.1 Creating A New Document

The softkeys in the softkey bar provide the tools you’re already familiar with when

working with Microsoft Word on your desktop PC. Tapping on the View softkey

allows you to customize how the Word Mobile page is displayed on your screen –

you can enable or disable the formatting toolbar and word wrap, and you can also

zoom in and out. The Menu softkey contains a subset of tools that allow you to

create, format, edit and file your document.

290 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7: Programs

Data Entry Modes

7.18.2 Data Entry Modes

In addition to the soft keyboard, you can enter text using Block Recognizer, Letter

Recognizer or Transcriber. Refer to “Entering Text” on page 66 for details.

You can also use the WORKABOUT PRO keyboard for data entry.

7.18.3 Sharing Documents With Your PC

Documents created on a PC are recognized by your WORKABOUT PRO.

However, some formatting is lost when ActiveSync converts a Word document to a

Word Mobile document. This loss also occurs when you open a .doc file and change

it on the WORKBOUT PRO.

Important: To avoid translation problems, you can work on copies of .doc

files. In addition, keep in mind that you can use the Terminal Ser-

vices Client program to log onto a desktop PC that is also running

Terminal Services, and then you can use any program on your

PC, including Microsoft Word (rather than Word Mobile). Refer

to “Terminal Services Client” on page 287 for details.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 291

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EXPANSION M ODULES

8.1 Expansion Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

8.1.1 Imager And Laser Scanner Expansion Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . 295

8.1.2 Compact Flash Radios & Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

8.1.3 Wide Area Network Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

293

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8: Expansion Modules

Expansion Modules

8.1 Expansion Modules

Easily installed expansion modules such as 802.11 radios, internal scanners and

imagers available for the WORKABOUT PRO allow you to customise this hand-

held to meet your specific mobile computing requirements.

Each expansion module is shipped with a detailed instruction sheet that steps you

through the installation process. For imagers and scanners, these instruction sheets

also describe the steps you’ll need to take to enable the device.

The following expansion modules are available for your unit:

8.1.1 Imager And Laser Scanner Expansion Modules

•

SX5393 imager expansion module – Model No. WA9010

EV15 imager expansion module – Model No. WA9003-G1

SE 1223HP laser scanner expansion module –Model No. WA9000-G1

SE 1223LR laser scanner expansion module – Model No. WA9005-G1

SE 1223ALR laser scanner expansion module – Model No. WA9006

SE 955 laser scanner expansion module – Model No. WA9002-G1

HHP5180 imager expansion module – Model No. WA9012-G1

8.1.2 Compact Flash Radios & Kits

•

802.11g Compact Flash radio card – Model No. RA2040

802.11g Compact Flash radio card – Model No. RA2041

PC Card Expansion Module kit – Model No. WA9001-G1

8.1.3 Wide Area Network Radio

•

EDGE GSM radio – Model No. RA3025-G1

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 295

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PERIPHERAL D EVICES & A CCESSORIES

9.1 Carrying Accessorie s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 99

9.1.1 Attaching The Hand Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

9.1.2 Attaching The Pistol Grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

9.1.3 Protective Carrying Case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

9.1.3.1 Using The Swivel Belt Loop With The Carrying Case . . . . .3 02

9.1.4 Soft Shell Holster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

9.2 The Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

9.3 Chargers And Docking Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

9.3.1 Installation–Chargers And Docking Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

9.3.2 Power Consumption Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

9.3.3 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

9.3.4 Important Charger Safety Instruction s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 06

9.4 Desktop Docking Statio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 07

9.4.1 Charging A Battery Installed In The WORKABOUT PRO. . . . . . 308

9.4.2 Charging A Spare Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

9.4.3 Battery Charge Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

9.4.4 Charger LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

9.4.5 Troubleshooting The Charging Operation Of The Dock . . . . . . . 309

9.4.6 Desktop Docking Station Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

9.4.7 Linking A WORKABOUT PRO To A PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

9.4.7.1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync To Work With Files . . . . . . .3 10

9.4.8 Linking A WORKABOUT PRO To An Ethernet Network . . . . . . 311

9.4.8.1 Network Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

9.4.9 Troubleshooting The Docking Station Operations. . . . . . . . . . . 312

9.5 Single Battery Charger–Model #WA3001-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

9.5.1 Inserting A Battery In The Single Battery Charger . . . . . . . . . . 312

9.5.2 Battery Charge Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

9.5.3 Charge Indicators–The LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

297

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

9.6 Quad Battery Charger–Model #W A 3004-G 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 13

9.6.1 Charging Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 14

9.6.2 Battery Charge Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 14

9.6.3 Charge Indicators–The LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 14

9.6.4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 14

9.6.4.1 Excessive Charge Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

9.6.4.2 Indicator Flashing Re d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 14

9.6.4.3 Power LED Does Not Light Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

9.6.4.4 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installe d . . . . . . . 3 15

9.7 Quad Docking Station–Model #W A 4004-G1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 16

9.7.1 Quad Docking Station Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 16

9.7.2 Quad Indicator s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 17

9.7.3 Inserting A WORKABOUT In The Quad Docking Station . . . . . .3 17

9.7.4 Network Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 17

9.7.4.1 Network Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

9.7.5 Battery Charging–LED Behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 18

9.7.6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 18

9.7.6.1 Network Link Unsuccessful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

9.7.6.2 Hand-Held LED Does Not Light When Docked . . . . . . . 318

9.8 AC Wall Adaptor And Tether Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 19

9.9 Automotive Power Adapto r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 21

9.10 The Vehicle Cradle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 21

9.10.1 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 22

9.10.1.1 Mounting Templat e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 22

9.10.2 Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 23

9.10.3 Using The V e hicle Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 23

9.10.4 Maintaining The Vehicle Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323

9.10.5 Powered Cradle Installation In High Voltage Vehicles . . . . . . . .323

9.10.6 Powered Vehicle Cradle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

9.10.6.1 Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

9.10.7 The Port Replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

9.11 Bluetooth Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326

298 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Carrying Accessories

9.1 Carrying Accessories

There are a variety of carrying accessories to help the operator work safely and

comfortably with the WORKABOUT PRO.

Carrying Accessory

Model Number

WA6025 for WORKABOUT PRO C

WA6125 for WORKABOUT PRO S

Hand Strap

Pistol Grip

WA6001-G1

Pistol Grip for SX5393 Imager WA6002-G1

WA6091 for WORKABOUT PRO C

WA6190 for WORKABOUT PRO S

Protective Vinyl Case

Soft Shell Holster

WA6050

Table 9.1 Carrying Accessories

Important: Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure screws on

carrying accessories. These chemicals may damage the

plastic casing.

9.1.1 Attaching The Hand Strap

The hand strap can be attached to the back of the WORKABOUT PRO to provide a

secure means for operators to carry the hand-held.

The hand strap is attached to the back of unit using two Phillips head screws

provided with this accessory.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 299

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Attaching The Hand Strap

•

Use a Phillips screwdriver to attach the strap to the two threaded inserts on

the back of the WORKABOUT PRO, near the top of the unit

•

Stretch the hand strap toward the base of the WORKABOUT PRO, and

hook the bottom of the strap into the slot near the base of the battery pack.

300 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Attaching The Pistol Grip

9.1.2 Attaching The Pistol Grip

The pistol grip is attached to the four threaded inserts on the back of the WORK-

ABOUT PRO. Four Phillips head screws are provided with this accessory.

Note: Prior to installation, make sure the trigger mechanism is securely

snapped into the pistol grip body and that the trigger operates properly.

•

Position the pistol grip so that it fits snugly over the back of the unit and the

holes in the pistol grip are aligned with the threaded inserts on the back of

the WORKABOUT PRO.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 301

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Protective Carrying Case

•

Tighten the screws to a torque of 3 lbs-in (3kgf-cm) to secure the pistol grip

in place.

9.1.3 Protective Carrying Case

A carrying case is available for WORKABOUT PROs to shield the unit from

damage. It is equipped with a soft plastic window to protect the unit display and

keyboard. A variety of cases are available, depending on the type of end-cap

attached to your unit.

9.1.3.1 Using The Swivel Belt Loop With The Carrying Case

The WORKABOUT PRO carrying case is equipped with two rings onto which you

can attach a swivel belt loop so that you can hang the unit from your belt. If you

prefer, you can also attach a belt clip to this accessory so that you can clamp the unit

onto your waistband or belt. (rather than slide your belt through the belt loop).

Figure 9.1 Belt Loop And Belt Clip

•

Clip the two hooks on the belt strap to the bottom of the carrying case.

302 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Protective Carrying Case

•

Slide your belt through the belt loop.

Figure 9.2 Attaching The Belt Loop

Alternatively, you can attach a plastic clip to the swivel belt loop and clip it to your

waistband or belt.

Belt Clip

Figure 9.3 Belt Clip

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Soft Shell Holster

9.1.4 Soft Shell Holster

A soft shell holster with removable belt and swivel holster pad can be used to hang a

WORKABOUT PRO with a pistol grip from you waist

Soft Shell Holster

Swivel Holster Pad and

Removable Belt

Figure 9.4 Soft Shell Holster

Insert the belt in the swivel holster pad.

Attach the pad on either the left or right side of the holster case, depending

on whether you are left- or right-handed.

•

Fasten the belt comfortably around your waist. Slide the adjustable ring on

the belt to tighten the holster in place.

304 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

The Batteries

9.2 The Batteries

Note: Review “Specifications” on page 327 for detailed information.

The WORKABOUT PRO will operate with a Standard Lithium Ion battery pack, a

High-Capacity Lithium Ion battery pack or three AA alkaline batteries. If you are

using a Lithium Ion battery pack, it must first be charged.

In addition to the main battery, the hand-held is equipped with a rechargable coin

battery–a Maxell ML2032.

9.3 Chargers And Docking Stations

Important: Keep in mind when ordering a charger or docking station, you

must also order the appropriate power cord separately.

Psion Teklogix offers a variety of chargers and docking stations for the

WORKABOUT PRO. These include:

•

Single Battery Charger–Model No. WA3001-G1

Quad Battery Charger–Model No. WA3004-G1

Desktop Docking Station–Model No. WA4002-G1 for the WORKABOUT

PRO C, and Model No. WA4102-G1 for the WORKABOUT PRO S

Quad Docking Station–Model No. WA4004-G1

•

9.3.1 Installation–Chargers And Docking Stations

When installing a charger or docking station, consider the following guidelines.

•

Keep chargers and docking stations away from excessive dirt, dust and

contaminants.

•

Chargers will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range

of 0° C to 45 °C (32° F to 113° F). It is recommended that the charger or

docking station be operated at room temperature–between 18° C and 25° C

(64° F to 77° F) for maximum performance.

After unpacking your unit:

•

Visually inspect the charger for possible damage.

Install the IEC power cord and apply power.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 305

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Power Consumption Considerations

9.3.2 Power Consumption Considerations

Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying chargers and/or docking stations is

adequate for the load, especially if several chargers and docking stations are being

powered from the same circuit.

•

Quad charger–can consume up to 2A @ 120VAC or 1A @ 240VAC.

Quad docking station–can consume up to 3A @ 120VAC or 1.5A @

240VAC.

9.3.3 Operator Controls

WORKABOUT PRO docking stations and chargers have no operator controls or

power switches.

9.3.4 Important Charger Safety Instructions

•

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS–This manual contains important safety and

operating instructions for battery charger s.

Before using the battery charger, read all instructions and cautionary

markings on (1) battery charger, (2) battery, and (3) product using battery.

The mains power cord shall comply with national safety regulations of the country

where the equipment is to be sold.

Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by the battery charger

manufacturer may result in fire, electric shock, or personal injury.

To reduce risk of damage to the electric plug and cord when unplugging the

charger, pull the plug rather than the cord.

Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on, tripped over,

or otherwise subjected to damage or stress.

Do not operate the charger with a damaged cord or plug.

Replace immediately.

Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped, or other-

wise damaged in any way; it should be inspected by qualified service personnel.

Do not disassemble the charger; it should be repaired by qualified service person-

nel. Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or fire.

To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug the charger from the outlet before

attempting any maintenance or cleaning.

An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary. Use of an

improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock.

If an extension cord must be used, make sure:

•

The plug pins on the extension cord are the same number, size,

and shape as those on the charger.

306 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Desktop Docking Station

•

The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical

condition and that the wire size is larger than 16 AWG.

•

Do not expose the charger to rain or snow.

Do not place batteries in the charger if they are cold from extended

exposure to a freezer or outside temperatures below 10°C (50°F). Allow them to

warm up to room temperature for at least two hours.

•

Do not use the charger if, after an overnight charge, any of the batteries feel warmer

than the charger housing. The charger should be inspected by

qualified service personnel.

Do not use the charger if any of the batteries or the charger get more than luke-

warm. The equipment should be inspected by qualified personnel.

9.4 Desktop Docking Station

There are two desktop docking stations available–your choice depends on

which type of WORKABOUT PRO you are using.

•

Model number WA4002-G1: For use with the WORKABOUT PRO C

Model number WA4102-G1: For use with the WORKABOUT PRO S

WORKABOUT PRO

Charge Well

Docking Station

Connector Pins

LED Legend

Figure 9.5 Desktop Docking Station

Note: The desktop docking charger is shipped with its own user manual. It is

critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 307

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Charging A Battery Installed In The WORKABOUT PRO

The desktop docking station is designed to charge the battery installed in the

WORKABOUT PRO along with a spare battery pack.

Spare Battery

Charge Well

DC IN Socket

Figure 9.6 Back Of Desktop Docking Station

Important: This docking station can only be used to charge Psion Teklogix

approved Lithium-Ion batteries–specifically model numbers

WA3000-G1 and WA3006.

9.4.1 Charging A Battery Installed In The WORKABOUT PRO

•

Insert the DC power cable to the DC IN socket on the desktop docking

station. Plug the pronged end of the cable into an AC outlet.

•

Slide the hand-held into the docking station, making certain that the LIF

(Low Insertion Force) port on base of the WORKABOUT is securely

seated on the docking station connector pins. An icon is displayed briefly in

the navigation bar at the top of the hand-held screen indicating that the unit

is properly installed in the station–

the unit is switched on.

. This icon is only displayed when

The LED on the WORKABOUT PRO lights up indicating that the unit has external

power and battery charging will begin. It is safe to leave the unit in the desktop

docking station while it is not in use–the battery will not be overcharged.

9.4.2 Charging A Spare Battery

•

Insert the battery in the spare battery charge well at the back of the docking

station, aligning the contacts on the battery with the contacts in the spare

battery charge well.

308 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Battery Charge Duration

9.4.3 Battery Charge Duration

A fully discharged battery can take up to 5 hours to charge. The desktop docking

station stops applying power to the battery when it is fully charged–there is no risk

of overcharge if the battery remains in the charge well.

9.4.4 Charger LED Indicators

Figure 9.7 Battery Charge Status

The desktop docking station is equipped with a single dual-coloured LED indicator

in the lower-right corner of the front panel.

LED Behaviour

Icon

Charge Status

No battery detected in the slot.

Charge in progress.

Off

Solid Green

Battery charged to less than 80% of capac-

ity.

Fast Flashing Green

Battery charged to greater than 80% of

capacity.

Slow Flashing Green

Battery temperature outside of charge

Solid Red

range–

0° C to 50 °C.

Flashing Red

Battery is not charging. Battery fault.

Table 9.2 Desktop Battery Charger LED Behaviour

Note: Battery charging continues whether the hand-held is switched on or off.

9.4.5 Troubleshooting The Charging Operation Of The Dock

The quad battery charger troubleshooting section beginning on page 314 also

applies to the charging behaviour of the desktop docking station.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 309

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Desktop Docking Station Ports

9.4.6 Desktop Docking Station Ports

Host USB Port

Client USB Port

DC IN Socket

Figure 9.8 Back of Desktop Docking Station

The desktop docking station is equipped with two USB ports–a Host USB port to

connect peripherals such as a printer, keyboard, etc. and a Client USB to connect the

docking station to a PC.

9.4.7 Linking A WORKABOUT PRO To A PC

The desktop docking station can be connected to a PC so that you can exchange files

in the same way that you would between PC drives. A USB cable is included with

your docking station.

To link the WORKABOUT PRO to a PC:

•

Insert the hand-held in the desktop docking station.

Insert the USB cable into the docking station Client USB connector. Attach

the other end of the cable to a USB port on the PC.

You’ll need to install connectivity software on your PC before you can pass

information between the hand-held and the PC.

9.4.7.1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync To Work With Files

ActiveSync®–Microsoft PC connectivity software–can be used to connect the

WORKABOUT PRO to PCs running this software. You’ll be able to:

•

View WORKABOUT PRO files from Windows Explorer.

Drag and drop files between the WORKABOUT PRO and the PC in the

same way that you would between PC drives.

310 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Linking A WORKABOUT PRO To An Ethernet Network

•

Back up WORKABOUT PRO files to the PC, then restore them from the

PC to the hand-held again, if needed, and so on.

You can use the Getting Started CD included with your WORKABOUT PRO to

install ActiveSync.

9.4.8 Linking A WORKABOUT PRO To An Ethernet Network

An USB-Ethernet adaptor cable – model number WA4010-G1 – is used to connect

the WORKABOUT PRO to an Ethernet network through a desktop docking station.

Ethernet

Port

USB

Connector

Figure 9.9 USB-Ethernet Adaptor Cable

Insert the adaptor’s USB connector into the Host USB port on the desktop

docking station.

•

Connect your network Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the

adaptor cable.

9.4.8.1 Network Access

The hand-held unit automatically detects insertion into the desktop dock and loads

the appropriate drivers to communicate with the USB-Ethernet converters.

Network Addressing

The host application uses standard TCP/IP protocol to name, locate and

communicate with a specific WORKABOUT PRO on the network.

If a link is established between a WORKABOUT PRO and a host, the application

on the host and on the hand-held must have a recovery mechanism in the event that

the WORKABOUT PRO is removed from the dock, interrupting the link.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 311

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Troubleshooting The Docking Station Operations

9.4.9 Troubleshooting The Docking Station Operations

The indicators, applications and drivers required to use and monitor the desktop

docking station as a dock (as opposed to a charger) are installed on the

WORKABOUT PRO–no applications are present on the docking station itself.

9.5 Single Battery Charger–Model #WA3001-G1

Figure 9.10 Single Battery Charger

The single battery charger is designed to charge a single battery. It has a DC IN

socket and is equipped with one LED that indicates the status of the charge process.

9.5.1 Inserting A Battery In The Single Battery Charger

•

Insert the DC power plug into the charger. Plug the pronged end of the

power cable into an AC outlet.

•

Install the battery, aligning the contacts on the battery with the contacts in

the battery charge well.

9.5.2 Battery Charge Duration

It can take up to 4 hours to fully charge a battery. The single battery charger stops

applying power to the battery when it is fully charged–there is no risk of overcharge

if the battery remains in the charge well. The 75% charge indicator is handy if you

need a quick recharge–a quick charge often takes less than one hour.

312 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Charge Indicators–The LED

9.5.3 Charge Indicators–The LED

The LED on the top of the charger indicates battery charge progress.

LED Behaviour

Charge Status

No battery detected in the charge well.

Battery is fully charged.

Off

Solid green

Fast flashing green

Slow flashing green

Battery is charged to 75% of capacity.

Charge in progress.

Battery is outside ambient temperature range of

0° C to 45 °C (32° F to 113° F).

Solid red

Charge alarm indicating a charging circuit problem.

Refer to “Troubleshooting” on page 314 for details.

Flashing red

Flashing red then green

in a 3 second cycle

Power up test sequence.

Table 9.3 Single Battery LED Behaviour

Note: Battery charging continues whether the hand-held is switched on or off.

9.6 Quad Battery Charger–Model #WA3004-G1

Table 9.4 Quad Battery Charger

The quad battery charger is designed to charge up to four Lithium Ion batteries at

one time.

Note: The gang charger is shipped with a user manual. It is critical that this

manual be reviewed for additional information and updates.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 313

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Charging Batteries

9.6.1 Charging Batteries

•

Slide the battery into a charge well, aligning the contacts on the battery with

the contacts in the charge well.

9.6.2 Battery Charge Duration

A fully discharged battery can take up to 4 hours to charge. The quad battery charger

stops applying power to the battery when it is fully charged–there is no risk of

overcharge if the battery remains in the charge well. The 75% charge indicator is

handy if you need a quick recharge–a quick charge often takes less than one hour.

9.6.3 Charge Indicators–The LEDs

Each battery charge well is equipped with an LED to indicate the charge status of

the battery. When a battery is inserted in the charger, the colour and behaviour of the

LED associated with the charge well in use indicates the status of the charge. Refer

to Table 9.3 on page 313 for details.

9.6.4 Troubleshooting

9.6.4.1 Excessive Charge Duration

The charger is equipped with a recalibration function–a function that fully

discharges and then fully recharges the battery. This process is necessary to

recalibrate the battery capacity gauge internal to the battery. The charger attempts

recalibration when:

•

the battery capacity is at less than 30%, and

the battery has undergone more than 40 partial charge cycles since the last

full discharge.

The recalibration function extends the charge time by up to 2 hours.

9.6.4.2 Indicator Flashing Red

If the indicator flashes red:

•

Remove all batteries and disconnect the mains power cable.

Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again.

If any of the charge well LEDs continue to flash red, the charger is defective and

requires service. If all indicators are flashing red, there is a power supply problem

and the charger requires service.

314 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Troubleshooting

9.6.4.3 Power LED Does Not Light Up

•

Remove all batteries, and unplug the charger.

Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power.

Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger, and check it for damage.

Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet.

If the power LED still does not light up:

Unplug the mains cable, and check the fuse at the rear of the charger.

•

If the fuse appears to be intact, the charger requires service.

9.6.4.4 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed

•

Remove the battery, and clean the contacts on the battery and the

charge well.

•

Reinstall the battery, and check that it is fully seated in the charger well.

Inspect the charge well contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened,

twisted or broken).

•

Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger well.

Reconnect the mains power cable, and check that the charger well indicator

flashes at powerup.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 315

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Quad Docking Station–Model #WA4004-G1

9.7 Quad Docking Station–Model #WA4004-G1

Figure 9.11 Quad Docking Station

Note: The quad docking station is shipped with a docking manual. It is critical

that this manual be reviewed for additional information and updates.

The quad docking station permits each of four docked WORKABOUT PROs to

communicate with a 10/100 BaseT Ethernet network at greater than 2Mbps. It also

provides sufficient power to operate and fast charge the batteries in the units.

9.7.1 Quad Docking Station Setup

After unpacking the unit:

•

Visually inspect the unit for any damage.

Install the IEC power cord and apply power.

A green indicator in the lower-right corner of the front panel lights up to indicate

that power is present.

•

Attach a CAT5 RJ45 network patch cable (supplied) between your network

and the RJ45 jack on the rear of the dock.

A green LED is illuminated next to the RJ45 connector when a valid network link is

established.

316 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Quad Indicators

A user application must be loaded onto each WORKABOUT PRO that utilizes the

quad dock for communication. When the network is connected and this application

is loaded, the quad dock is ready for use.

9.7.2 Quad Indicators

The quad dock is equipped with a power indicator LED and RJ45 link and traffic

indicator LEDs. When a valid network link is established, a green LED is

illuminated next to the RJ45 connector.

9.7.3 Inserting A WORKABOUT In The Quad Docking Station

•

Slide the WORKABOUT PRO into the cradle portion of the quad dock

until lightly latched.

The hand-held detects that it is in a quad dock and momentarily displays the appropriate

. The LED on the hand-held unit

icon in the navigation bar at the top of the screen–

lights up to show it has external power and may start charging the battery.

Interaction with the WORKABOUT PRO while in the quad dock is a function of

the user application software used to communicate with the host network.

9.7.4 Network Access

The quad docking station has one 10/100 Ethernet port. You can insert up to four

hand-held units. The hand-helds are connected to an internal USB hub. The hand-

held unit automatically detects insertion into a quad docking station and loads the

appropriate drivers to communicate with the USB/Ethernet converters.

9.7.4.1 Network Addressing

Although the USB converters have fixed Ethernet MAC addresses, there is

generally no correlation between these addresses and a specific hand-held. The host

application uses standard TCP/IP protocol to name, locate and communicate with a

specific WORKABOUT PRO on the network.

If a link is established between a WORKABOUT PRO and a host, the application

on the host and on the hand-held must have a recovery mechanism in the event that

the WORKABOUT PRO is removed from the dock and the link is interrupted.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 317

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Battery Charging–LED Behaviour

9.7.5 Battery Charging–LED Behaviour

The quad docking station supplies DC power to enable the WORKABOUT PRO

internal fast charger. Charge status is displayed on the hand-held LED–the LED

turns red while the battery is being charged and turns green once the charge is

complete. If the battery is fully charged when the unit is inserted in the docking

station, the LED flashes red for less than a second and then turns green. Battery

charging continues whether the WORKABOUT PRO is switched on or off.

It can take up to 5 hours to fully charge the internal battery.

9.7.6 Troubleshooting

The indicators, applications and drivers required to use and monitor the docking

station are installed on the WORKABOUT PRO–no indicators or applications are

present on the docking station itself.

9.7.6.1 Network Link Unsuccessful

If a network link fails, the WORKABOUT PRO application alerts the operator that

the link was unsuccessful.

9.7.6.2 Hand-Held LED Does Not Light When Docked

•

Check that the quad docking station has power–is the Power LED on the

docking station illuminated?

•

Try inserting the WORKABOUT PRO in another well in the quad dock.

Check for dirt or contamination on the docking contacts at the bottom of the

WORKABOUT PRO. Wipe the contacts with a damp cloth if necessary.

•

Check the pogo pins inside the dock cradle for dirt. Gently wipe with a

damp cloth if they appear to be dirty or discoloured.

•

Check that the pogo pins are not bent or damaged.

Remove and reinsert the WORKABOUT PRO in the cradle, and check that

the latch is holding the unit in place (the pogo pins must be compressed for

proper contact).

•

Make certain that the battery installed in the WORKABOUT PRO is not

defective.

318 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

AC Wall Adaptor And Tether Cable

9.8 AC Wall Adaptor And Tether Cable

Adaptor Plugs

DC Power Plug

3-Point Tether Connector

Tether Cable

Universal AC Power Supply

Tether Port

DC IN Socket

Figure 9.12 WORKABOUT PRO AC Wall Adaptor And Tether Cable

Audio

Jack

Low Insertion

Force Port

(LIF)

Tether

Port

Figure 9.13 Bottom Of WORKABOUT PRO

Connecting an AC wall adaptor (WA3220-G1) and tether cable (CA1050-G1) to

your WORKABOUT PRO will supply AC power to your unit. The tether cable is

equipped with a tether port so that you can attach a peripheral device to the

hand-held while providing power. A power lead must be ordered separately.

•

Insert the tether connector into the tether port on your hand-held. Tighten

the screws to secure the cable in place.

•

Insert the DC power plug into the DC IN socket on the tether cable, connect

the AC power lead to the Universal AC Power Supply.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 319

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

AC Wall Adaptor And Tether Cable

•

Choose the adaptor plug that is suitable for use in your country. Slide the

adaptor plug into the Universal AC power supply, snapping it into place.

These two pieces, coupled, are referred to as an AC adaptor.

Figure 9.14 Inserting The Adaptor Plug

•

Plug the pronged end of the lead into an AC outlet.

320 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Automotive Power Adaptor

9.9 Automotive Power Adaptor

Fuse

Automotive Power Adaptor

Tether

Connector

Tether

Cable

DC Power Plug

Tether

Port

DC IN Socket

Figure 9.15 Automotive Adaptor

The automotive power adaptor, model number WA3112-G1, is an optional

accessory that allows you to power your WORKABOUT PRO through your vehicle

cigarette lighter.

•

Attach a tether cable to the base of the WORKABOUT PRO.

Insert the automotive lighter adaptor DC power plug into the DC IN socket

on the tether cable.

•

Insert the adaptor in your vehicle cigarette lighter outlet to power your unit.

9.10 The Vehicle Cradle

The vehicle cradle is a highly ruggedized, single station dock. Although it provides

quick insertion and removal, the cradle holds the WORKABOUT PRO securely

even when operated in high vibration environments.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 321

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations

Depending on the type of hand-held unit you are use, you can choose from the

following powered vehicle cradle models:

•

Vehicle Cradle for WORKABOUT PRO C – WA1010-G1

Vehicle Cradle for WORKABOUT PRO S – WA1110-G1

A port replicator option is available for powered vehicle cradles. Refer to “The Port

Replicator” on page 325 for details.

9.10.1 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations

Warning:

Before mounting a vehicle cradle in a vehicle, there are a number

of operator safety issues that require careful attention. An improp-

erly mounted cradle may result in one or more of the following:

operator injury, operator visibility obstruction, operator distraction

and/or poor ease of egress for the operator. Psion Teklogix strongly

recommends that you seek professional mounting advice from the

vehicle manufacturer.

Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consider-

ation, especially for separately tethered scanners and other devices

with loose cables. If you are unable to obtain suitable advice,

contact Psion Teklogix for assistance (see Appendix A: Support Ser-

vices And Worldwide Offices). Note also that for better protection,

the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll cage.

Pedestal mounts are recommended for all fixed mount locations because they offer

optimal operator access. In addition, for safety reasons, only pedestal mounts with

fully locking joints should be used in vehicles. Always adjust the pedestal for the

optimum viewing angle, and securely tighten the hex and wing screws.

The most effective way to mount the vehicle cradle is to use the four #8-32 threaded inserts

on the rear of the unit. Bolts must not extend more than 10mm (3/8") into the cradle.

To accommodate the service loop of the connector cable, leave a 4" clearance at the

bottom of the cradle. Leave a 7" (minimum) clearance at the top of the cradle to

allow easy removal of the hand-held. Also remember to leave at least a 3" clearance

at the sides of the cradle to allow activation of the release knobs. Refer to the

detailed assembly instructions that are packaged with the cradle when selecting a

mounting location.

9.10.1.1 Mounting Template

The vehicle cradle is shipped with detailed mounting instructions including a drill template.

322 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Wiring Guidelines

9.10.2 Wiring Guidelines

Before installing cables between the cradle and other devices, review the following:

•

Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring.

Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating and physical damage.

Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal.

Use plastic straps and tie-downs to secure cables and connectors in their

desired location, away from areas where they may get snagged or pulled.

•

Keep cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid and other

potential hazards.

Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may

damage the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle.

9.10.3 Using The Vehicle Cradle

If your WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with a shoulder strap or cover, these

accessories need to be removed before installing the unit in a vehicle cradle. There is

no need to remove handstraps, pistol grips or tethered devices from the unit.

•

Slide the WORKABOUT PRO into the cradle, and press firmly downward

until it locks into place. On a vehicle, it’s a good idea to pull up on the

WORKABOUT PRO to be certain that it is secure.

To remove the unit, press firmly on the RELEASE button on the front face

of the unit until it releases from it latch. The hand-held will be slightly

raised so that it can be removed.

9.10.4 Maintaining The Vehicle Cradle

Two latches in the cradle hold the WORKABOUT PRO firmly in place. Although

these latches are designed for robustness and endurance, they will wear over time

and will no longer lock the hand-held securely in the cradle. For replacement parts

and instructions contact Psion Teklogix. Partial disassembly is required.

9.10.5 Powered Cradle Installation In High Voltage Vehicles

Warning:

Voltages exceeding 60VDC are considered hazardous. For powered

cradle installations on vehicles with batteries above this voltage,

ensure the powered cradle power connector is mounted in a dry

location on the vehicle, or that the connector is insulated with an

appropriate waterproof material after installation. The connector

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 323

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Powered Vehicle Cradle Installation

must also be installed out of the vehicle operator’s reach. Exposing

an accessible power connector to water or other liquids could create

a hazardous situation resulting in serious injury or death.

Installation of powered cradles in vehicles that operate above 60VDC require

special consideration.

Due to the hazardous voltages present on these vehicles, it is necessary to ensure

that the powered cradle power supply cable connector is not accessible to the

vehicle operator, and does not get exposed to water or other liquids. This can be

accomplished in one of the following ways:

•

Ensure the power connector is installed in a dry location on the vehicle,

away from the vehicle operator’s reach (perhaps under a vehicle dash or in a

sealed housing).

•

Cover the power connector with a waterproof heat shrink material.

Wrap the connector securely with a waterproof electrical tape in an area out

of the vehicle operators reach.

All other installation requirements outlined in this document should also be

followed for High Voltage vehicles to insure safe installation and operation of the

powered cradle.

9.10.6 Powered Vehicle Cradle Installation

The powered cradle is designed to allow the WORKABOUT PRO to be powered by

a vehicle battery. The battery installed in the hand-held is also recharged by the

vehicle battery. This option accepts DC power sources ranging from 10 to 55V, with

optional pre-regulator.

The vehicle cradle can be ordered with the powered cradle option installed.

Warning:

Applying a voltage greater than that specified or reversing or

reversing polarity may result in permanent damage to the cradle

power option and will void the product warranty.

324 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

The Port Replicator

9.10.6.1 Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle

A 1.8 meter (6 foot) extension power cable (PN 13985) is supplied with your

powered vehicle cradle. This cable should be wired to a filtered, fused (maximum

10A) accessory supply on the vehicle. The power cradle draws no more than 8A

(less if the accessory supply is greater than 12V). Any additional wiring, connectors

or disconnects used should be rated for at least 10A.

The red lead of the power cable attaches to the positive vehicle supply. The black

lead connects to the negative supply–this should be connected to a proper terminal

block and not to the vehicle body. The power cradle is fully isolated and can be used

with both negative and positive chassis vehicles.

You may have the option of connecting power before or after the ‘key’ switch. It is

preferable to wire the power cradle after the key switch–that is, it cannot be turned

on without the key on. However, if the operator switches the key off repeatedly for

long periods during a shift, it may make more sense to wire the cradle before the

switch.

Keep in mind that the WORKABOUT PRO will continue to operate with or without

vehicle power as long as its battery has sufficient charge.

If an unfused power source must be used, a fuse assembly (PN 19440) must be

added to the extension power cable (the fuse and instructions are supplied with the

cable). Use only a 10A slow blow UL approved fuse in the fuse assembly.

9.10.7 The Port Replicator

The port replicator (Model# WA4005-G1) is an optional accessory that allows

tethered devices as well as mounted peripherals (e.g., bar code printers or weigh

scales) to be attached to the vehicle cradle. The replicator can be used with or

without the cradle power option.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 325

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Bluetooth Peripherals

The functionality of the WORKABOUT PRO tether port is replicated into RS-232

serial interfaces by the port replicator. It provides the user with 3 DB9 serial

interfaces as well as one Type B USB port (for connecting a Host device).

9.11 Bluetooth Peripherals

The WORKABOUT PRO C (a unit equipped with a colour display)–comes

equipped with a Bluetooth radio, making it is possible to communicate with a

variety of Bluetooth peripherals, including GSM/GPRS handsets, scanners, printers,

and so on.

The range of the Bluetooth radio is limited to approximately 5 meters.

Psion Teklogix provides built-in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below.

•

GSM/GPRS universal handset

Bluetooth printer

Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802.11g radios both operate in the 2.4GHz

band. Although the WORKABOUT PRO includes features to minimize

interference, performance of the system will not be optimal if you use both radios

simultaneously. Typically, when both radios operate in the hand-held at the same

time, they cannot transmit simultaneously–this has a negative impact on overall

system throughput. To minimize the impact on the backbone 802.11g network,

Psion Teklogix recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction

rates (such as printers and scanners).

Refer to “Bluetooth Setup” on page 219 for information about setting up your Blue-

tooth devices for communication. In addition, review the manual shipped with your

Bluetooth device to determine the method used to associate with the WORK-

ABOUT PRO host.

326 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATIONS

10.1 Hand-Held Computer Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

10.2 Radio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

10.3 Scanner Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

10.3.1 SE 1223H P , L R, ALR And SE 955HP Specifications . . . . . . . . 332

10.3.1.1 SE 1223HP Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 33

10.3.1.2 SE 1223LR Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 33

10.3.1.3 SE 1223ALR Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 34

10.3.1.4 SE 955HP Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 34

10.3.2 EV15 Imager Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

10.3.2.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 35

10.3.3 HHP5180 Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

10.3.3.1 HHP5180 Imager Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 36

10.3.4 SX5393 Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

10.3.4.1 SX5393 Imager Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 38

10.4 Battery Test Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

10.4.1 Standard Capacity–2000 mAh (Model W A 3000-G1) . . . . . . . . 338

10.4.1.1 Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 38

10.4.1.2 Standard Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 39

10.4.1.3 Environmental Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340

10.4.2 High Capacity–3000 mAh (Model WA3006) . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

10.4.2.1 Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

10.4.2.2 Standard Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342

10.4.2.3 Environmental Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343

10.4.3 Maxell ML2032 Rechargeable Coin Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

327

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10: Specifications

Hand-Held Computer Specifications

Note: Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change

without notice.

10.1 Hand-Held Computer Specifications

WORKABOUT PRO C Models

Size

•

Length: 8.7" (221mm)

Width: 3" (76mm) at grip area tapering to 3.6" (92mm) at display area.

Depth: 1.2" (31mm) at grip area tapering to 1.7" (44mm) at display area.

Weight

With battery: 16 oz. (454g); add 2.6 oz. (75g) with SE 1223HP scanner

expansion module; add 0.7 oz. (19g) with 802.11g CF card radio.

WORKABOUT PRO S Model

Size

•

Length: 7.5” (190mm)

Width: 2.9” (75mm) at grip area tapering to 3.8" (98mm) at display area

(including side scan buttons)

•

Depth: 1.2" (31mm) at grip area tapering to 1.7" (44mm) at display area

Weight

With battery: 16 oz. (454g); add 2.6 oz. (75g) with SE 1223HP scanner

expansion module; add 0.7 oz. (19g) with 802.11g CF card radio.

WORKABOUT PRO C And S Models

Operating System

Microsoft Windows Mobile 5.0

Processor

•

Intel Xscale PXA255

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 329

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10: Specifications

Hand-Held Computer Specifications

Power Management

•

3.7V Standard Capacity Li-ion rechargeable battery - up to 8 hours of operation.

3.7V High-Capacity Li-ion rechargeable battery - up to 12 hours of

operation.

•

Advanced Smart Battery w/ gas gauge.

Quick swap battery packs.

Built-in fast charger.

Rechargeable, user-replacable internal coin battery.

Also accepts 3 AA Alkaline batteries.

Communication

Ports

USB Host port on base for tethered USB devices

(printers, etc.)

Low Insertion Force Docking Station Port with:

- USB Device Port

- USB Host port

- Power in/out

Environmental

Operating Temperature

14°F to 122°F (-10°C to +50°C)

-13°F to 140°F (-25°C to +60°C)

IEC 529, classification IP54.

Storage Temperature

Rain And Dust Resistance

Humidity

5% - 95% RH non-condensing

Shock

Multiple 4 ft. (1.2m) drops to polished concrete.

Approvals

Safety

UL60950-1, CSA C22.2

No 60950-1

EMC

FCC Part 15 Class B

EN 55022

EN 55024

Laser

IEC 60825-1, Class 2

FDA 21 CFR 1040.10,

1040.11 Class II

1.1 on C & S models

E Mark

Bluetooth:

In-Vehicle Cradle

330 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10: Specifications

Radio Specifications

10.2 Radio Specifications

802.11g Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (Model Number RA2040)

Form Factor

Compact Flash

Antenna Port

Transmit Power

Frequency Range

Channels

Single U.FL jack, no diversity

20mW

2.400 - 2.4835GHz, all versions

1 - 11 for USA, Canada

1- 13 for EU countries

RX Sensitivity

Data Rates

(8% FER, 1024 bytes packet) =

-89dBm @ 1Mbps, -87dBm @ 11Mbps,

-83dBm @ 6Mbps, -72dBm @ 54Mbps

6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 & 54Mbps

802.11g Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (Model Number RA2041)

Form Factor

Antenna Port

Compact Flash

Two Hirose U.FL connectors for antenna

diversity

Transmit Power

Frequency Range

Channels

30mW

2.400 - 2.4897GHz

FCC: 11

ETSI: 13

TELEC: 13

RX Sensitivity

-96 dBm @ 1Mbps, -95 dBm @ 2Mbps, -94 dBm

@ 5.5Mbps, -94 dBm@ 6Mbps, -91 dBm @

9Mbps, -90 dBm @ 11Mbps, -88 dBm @ 12Mbps,

-86 dBm @ 18Mbps, -83 dBm @ 24Mbps, -78

dBm @ 36Mbps, -76 dBm @ 48Mbps, -75 dBm

@ 54Mbps

Data Rates

6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54Mbps

Bluetooth Radio

Embedded (USB interface)

Bluetooth Version

1.2 compliant (features Adaptive Frequency

Hopping for better co-existence with 802.11 radio)

2dBi peak

Chip Antenna

Transmit Power

Frequency Range

-3dBm (0.5mW) minimum, +4dBm (2.5mW) max

2.400 - 2.4835GHz

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 331

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10: Specifications

Scanner Specifications

RX Sensitivity

-80dBm max

(BER<=0.1%)

Data Rate

732.2kbps and 57.6kbps asymmetric,

433.9kbps symmetric

10.3 Scanner Specifications

10.3.1 SE 1223HP, LR, ALR And SE 955HP Specifications

Scan Engine

SE 1223HP

SE 1223LR

SE 1223ALR

SE 955HP

47° ± 3° default /

35° ± 3° reduced

104 (± 12)

Scan Angle

42º ± 2º

23º ± 2º

13º ± 2º

35 (± 5) scans/sec 35 (± 5) scans/sec 35 (± 5) scans/sec

(bi-directional)

Scan Rate

scans/sec

(bi-directional)

Scan Pattern

Wavelength

Linear

650nm

Linear

650nm

Linear

650nm

Linear

650nm

3.0-5.5 VDC ±

10%

Input Voltage

5.0 VDC ± 10%

Input Current

Standby Current 130 µA typical

Operating

Temperature

110 mA typical

115 mA typical

70 µA max.

-30º to 55ºC

-22ºF to 131ºF

Minimum 40%

115 mA typical

70 µA typical

-30°C to 55°C

-22ºF to 131ºF

Minimum 40%

65 mA typical

8 µA max

-20° to 60° C

-4° to 140° F

Minimum 25%

-40ºC to 60ºC

-40ºF to 140ºF

Minimum 20%

absolute dark/light absolute dark/light absolute dark/light absolute dark/light

Print Contrast

Dimensions

reflectance mea-

sured at 650 nm

reflectance mea-

sured at 650 nm

reflectance mea- reflectance mea-

sured at 650 nm sured at 650 nm

1.93 cm max. H x 1.93 cm max. H x 1.93 cm max. H x 1.21 cm H x 2.16

3.84 cm max. W x 3.84 cm max. W x 3.84 cm max. W x cm W x 1.55 cm

3.51 cm max. D

(max)

0.76 in. max. H x 0.76 in. max. H x 0.76 in. max. H x 0.47 in. H x 0.85

1.51 in. max. W x 1.51 in. max. W x 1.51 in. max. W x in. W x 0.61 in. D

1.38 in. max. D

UPC/EAN, Code UPC/EAN, Code UPC/EAN, Code

128, Code 39, 128, Code 39, Code 128, Code 39,

Code 93, I 2 of 5, 93, I 2 of 5, Dis-

1.38 in. max. D

(max)

UPC/EAN, Code

128, Code 39,

Code 93, I 2 of 5,

Discrete 2 of 5,

Codabar, MSI

Plessey

Code 93, I 2 of 5,

Discrete 2 of 5,

Codabar, MSI

Symbologies

Discrete 2 of 5,

Codabar, MSI

UCC/EAN 128,

crete 2 of 5,

Codabar, MSI

UCC/EAN 128,

TriOptic Code 39 TriOptic Code 39 TriOptic Code 39

332 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10: Specifications

SE 1223HP, LR, ALR And SE 955HP Specifications

10.3.1.1 SE 1223HP Decode Zone

4,844 Lux to 86,112 Lux

Minimum

Maximum

range

Width of field

range

Mil Size

Inches

2.75

2.25

1.75

Inches

1.25

Inches

7.5

0.5

15.75

UPC

12.5

3.75

10.3.1.2 SE 1223LR Decode Zone

4,844 Lux to 86,112 Lux

Minimum

Maximum

Width of field

range

Mil Size

Inches

7.5

120

200

240

70 reflective

100 reflective

High quality symbols in normal room light.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 333

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10: Specifications

EV15 Imager Specifications

10.3.1.3 SE 1223ALR Decode Zone

4,844 Lux to 86,112 Lux

Minimum

range

Maximum

range

Width of field

Mil Size

Inches

UPC

115

250

360

70 reflective

100 reflective

114

125

High quality symbols in normal room light.

10.3.1.4 SE 955HP Decode Zone

Decode Zone Typical

4 mil

5 mil

1.0 in. - 5.5 in. / 2.54 cm - 13.97 cm

1.25 in. - 8 in. / 3.18 cm - 20.32 cm

1.5 in. - 13.25 in. / 3.81 cm - 33.66 cm

1.5 in. - 17.5 in. / 3.81 cm - 44.45 cm

1.5 in. - 23.5 in. / 3.81 cm - 59.69 cm

1.5 in. - 29.5 in. / 3.81 cm - 74.93 cm

1.75 in. - 35.5 in. / 4.45 cm - 90.17 cm

* - 40 in. / * - 101.6 cm

7.5 mil

10 mil

UPC 100%

15 mil

20 mil

40 mil

55 mil

* - 55 in. / * - 139.7 cm

* dependent on width of bar code

10.3.2 EV15 Imager Specifications

Parameter

EV15

Light Source

Scan Angle

617nm Highly Visible LED

40º

Minimum Print Contrast

Min x. Dimension

Minimum 25%

0.1 mm (4 mils)

334 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10: Specifications

HHP5180 Imager

Parameter

Reading Distance

EV15

Up to 90cm (35 in)

UPC (E&A), EAN, RSS, Code 39, Code 128,

UCC/EAN 128, ISBN, ISBT, Interleaved,

Matrix, Industrial and Standard 2 of 5, Codabar,

Code 93/93i, Code 11, MSI, Plessey, Telepen,

PDF417, Micro PDF417

Symbologies

Works in any lighting conditions, from 0 to

100,000 lux

Ambient Light

Shock

Vibration

2000G, 0.7ms, half sinus, 3 axes

50G r.m.s

10.3.2.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone

0 Lux to 100,000 Lux

Minimum range Maximum range

Mil Size

Inches

2.5

Inches

14.5

UPC

2.5

35.5

High quality symbols in normal room light.

10.3.3 HHP5180 Imager

Parameter

Image Sensor

HHP5180

752 X 480 CMOS sensor

Motion Tolerance

Rotational Sensitivity

Viewing Angle

4 in. (10.2cm) per second

360°

±40°

Ambient Light

Illumination LEDs

Total darkness to 100,000 lux (full sunlight)

626nm ±30nm

LEDs: 526nm ±30nm

Laser: 650nm ±10nm

Aiming:

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 335

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10: Specifications

HHP5180 Imager

Parameter

HHP5180

2D: PDF417, MicroPDF417, MaxiCode, Data Matrix, QR Code,

Aztec, Aztec Mesa, Code 49, UCC Composite

Linear: Code 39, Code 128, Codabar, UPC, EAN, Interleaved 2

of 5, RSS, Code 93, Codablock

Symbologies supported

Postal: Postnet (US), Planet Code, BPO 4 State, Canadian Post,

Japanese Post, KIX (Netherlands) Post

OCR Fonts: OCR-A, OCR-B

1.78cm Depth x 2.79cm Width (without mounting tabs) x

1.21cm Height

0.7 in. Depth x 1.1 in. Width (without mounting tabs) x 0.475 in.

Height

Size

Weight

5.9 grams (.21 ounces)

Imager: 3.3 VDC ±5% (23°C)

Operational Input Voltage:

Illumination + Aimer 5300: 3.0 VDC to 5.5 VDC (23°C)

Imager: Operating Current – 100 mA

Standby Current: 100 µA

Current Draw:

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Humidity

-30° to +50°C (-34° to 122°F)

-40° to +70°C (-40° to 158°F)

up to 95% RH, non-condensing at 122° F (50°C)

18 shocks of 3,500 G for 0.5 msec at 23°C (73° F)

Shock

10.3.3.1 HHP5180 Imager Decode Zone

Performance

Focal Point

7 inches (17.8 cm) from lens plate

4.5 inches (11.4 cm) from lens plate

15 mil Data

Matrix

(.038 cm)6

35 mil

Maxicode

(.089 cm)

SR Working

Range*

8.3 mil Linear 10 mil PDF417 13 mil UPC

15 mil QR

(.038 cm)

(.020 cm)

(.025 cm)

(.033 cm)

3.5 in.

(8.9 cm)

3.1 in.

(7.9 cm)

2.1 in.

(5.3cm)

2.3 in.

(5.8 cm)

2.1 in.

(7.9 cm)

2.0 in.

(5.1 cm)

Near

Far

7.6 in.

(19.3cm)

9 in.

(22.9 cm)

13.2 in.

(33.5 cm)

10.2 in.

(25.9 cm)

8.8 in.

(22.4 cm)

13.0 in.

(33 cm)

336 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10: Specifications

SX5393 Imager

Performance

6.6 mil

PDF417

(.017 cm)

8.3 mil Data

Matrix

(.021 cm)

SF Working

Range*

7.5 mil Linear

(.019 cm)

8.3 mil QR 10 mil Linear 13 mil UPC

(.021 cm)6

(.025 cm)

(.033 cm)

2.8 in.

(7.1cm)

2.5 in.

(6.4cm)

3.4 in.

(8.6cm)

3.4 in.

(8.6cm))

2.2 in.

(5.6cm)

2.0 in.

(5.1cm)

Near

Far

6 in.

(15.2cm)

6.5 in.

(16.5cm)

5.7 in.

(14.5cm)

5.4 in.

(13.7cm)

7.6 in.

(19.3cm)

8.9 in.

(22.6cm)

*Data characterized at 23°C and 0 lux ambient light.

10.3.4 SX5393 Imager

Parameter

Optical Resolution

Field of view at 6 inches

Pitch Angle

HHP5180

1024H x 1024v

5.12 in. x 5.12 in.

±45°

Skew Angle

±45°

Ambient Light

Minimum Contrast

Targeting

Self Illumination

Supply Voltage

Power Supply

Connectivity

0 to 100,000 lux (full sunlight) 300 lux nominal.

10%

Intuitive range finding 626 nm Red LED.

Red LED

5 V ± 10%

3.6 Volt DC nominal (2.7 - 5 Volts DC)

USB 1.1 or serial async

Connector to the interface board Molex 52892-1295 or HiRose FH12-12S-.5SH

Code 39; Code 39 Full ASCII; UPC-A, -A2, -A5; UPC-E, -E2, -

E5; EAN-8 -13; JAN; I2of5; Code 128; Codabar/NW7; RSS 14,

RSS Limited, RSS Expanded, RSS 14 Truncated, PDF417,

microPDF417; Composite, CC-A, CC-B, CC-C; image capture

and signature capture, Data Matrix; QR Code; Maxicode; Aztec

Code; Planet; Postnet; Royal Mail 4SCC; 4 State postal codes

from Australia, Canada, Japan; Korean Post 3of5

-20° to +50°C (-4° to 122°F)

Symbologies Supported

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Humidity

-30° to +60°C (-22° to 140°F)

5% to 95% (non-condensing)

Image engine 4.1 grams

Co-processor board 6.80 grams

15 drops, 5 ft to concrete at room temperature when integrated

correctly into end-user packaging

Weight

Shock

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 337

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10: Specifications

Battery Test Specifications

10.3.4.1 SX5393 Imager Decode Zone

x Lux to 100,000 Lux

Minimum range Maximum range

Mil Size*

Inches

4.6

3.8

Inches

5.7

9.2

15**

9.7

20.8

2.6

11.7

*QR code

**Data Matrix

Code 39

Minimum range Maximum range

Mil Size

7.5

Inches

4.1

3.1

Inches

8.4

10.9

9.7

10.4 Battery Test Specifications

10.4.1 Standard Capacity–2000 mAh (Model WA3000-G1)

10.4.1.1 Electrical Specifications

Note: The electrical specifications apply for ambient temperature TAMB of 0° to

+40°C unless otherwise stated.

Description

Interface Chipset

Rated Voltage

Specification

Maxim DS2762

3.7V

Remark

Typical

Maximum

Typical

Rated Capacity

2000mAh

1.0A

Rated Charge Current

Charge Voltage

4.2 +/- 0.05V

2.6V

Discharge Cut-off voltage

Constant voltage

Current limited

Charge Method

338 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10: Specifications

Standard Capacity–2000 mAh (Model WA3000-G1)

Description

Discharge Current

Specification

0.5C (-20°C to 60°C)

150 m

Remark

Typical

Internal Resistance

Maximum

Battery Pack Electrical Specifications

Description

Specification

Typical

4.350V

4.15V

2.6V

Minimum

Maximum

4.375V

4.20V

2.7V

Over voltage detection voltage

Charge enable

4.325V

4.10V

2.5V

Under voltage detection voltage

Over current detection current

Short-circuit detection current

Short-circuit detection voltage

Over voltage delay time

Under voltage delay time

Over current delay time

2.97A

9.9A

3.17A

13.33A

200mV

3.36A

16.83A

250mV

1.2s

150mV

0.8s

90ms

5ms

100ms

10ms

110ms

20ms

Short-circuit delay time

160µs

0.5mA

200µs

1mA

240µs

2mA

Recovery charge current

10.4.1.2 Standard Discharge

Note: Standard charge is defined as charging with constant voltage limit of 4.2V

and constant current limit of 0.9A; the termination charge occurs when

the current drops to 45mA.

Standard discharge is defined as discharging at a constant current of

350mA until the battery protection circuit switches the battery output off in

over-discharge mode.

Acceptance Test Specifications

Description

Condition

Standard

Open circuit voltage After standard charge, measured within 24 hours.

4.15V or more

Internal resistance

After standard charge, measured within 24 hours.

150 m max.

After standard charge, measured time taken for a fast

discharge.

Capacity_1

110 minutes or more

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 339

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10: Specifications

Standard Capacity–2000 mAh (Model WA3000-G1)

Description

Condition

Standard

After repeating standard charge and fast discharge,

measured the fast discharge time after 300 discharge 90 minutes or more

cycles.

Charge/Discharge

cycle

After standard charge, measured the time taken for a

500 minutes or more

Capacity_2

standard discharge.

After standard charge, apply a standard discharge

followed by a standby discharge. Then measured

capacity after carrying out standard charge and then a

Over discharge

110 minutes or more

fast discharge.

After a standard charge, keep battery at 25°C for 30

100 mins. or more

Self discharge

Temperature

days. Measured the time taken for a fast discharge.

Perform a standard charge and fast discharge at 0°C,

25°C and 40°C and measured the time taken for a

fast discharge at 25°C.

100 mins. @ 0°C

110 mins. @ 23°C

105 mins. @ 40°C

After standard charge, carry out 5 cycles:

Temperature/Humid- 65°C and 90% humidity for 8 hrs.

100 minutes or more

No damage

ity cycle

25°C and 65% humidity for 4 hrs.

-20°C for 8 hrs. 25°C and 65% humidity for 4 hrs.

After standard charge, keep the battery at 60°C for 8

hrs. Carry out a fast discharge, standard charge and

then a fast discharge, measured the time taken for the

second discharge.

Dry heat

EN61000-4-8:

Electro-Static Dis-

charge

A. Contact Discharge:+/- 8kV for each contact pad

by 10 times.

B. Air Discharge:+/- 15kV for 10 times.

10.4.1.3 Environmental Test

Description

Test Reference

Test Condition/Result

Drop sample battery on all faces from

height of 1.2 meters onto concrete floor

No explosion, fire, vent, leakage and

open circuit voltage higher than 3.7V.

Drop

(mechanical)

+60°C dry for 240 hours

No explosion, fire, vent or leakage.

Storage at high temp.

Storage at low temp.

EN60068-2-2 Test

EN60068-2-1 Test

IEC68-2-3 Test

-20°C dry for 240 hours

No explosion, fire, vent or leakage.

Storage at high temp.

and humidity

+40°C at 90%RH for 240 hours.

No explosion, fire, vent or leakage.

340 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10: Specifications

High Capacity–3000 mAh (Model WA3006)

Description

Test Reference

Test Condition/Result

+60°C (2C) for 1 hr. (T1), -20°C (2C)

for 1 hr. 3 mins. maximum allows for

change between T1 and T2, 10 cycles.

No explosion, fire, vent or leakage.

Storage temp. cycling

IEC68-2-14 Test

After standard charge, tested under the

following conditions: Random vibra-

tion 5Hz-500Hz ASD 0.02g2/Hz in 3

axis for 15 mins. Followed by standard

discharge, charge, discharge. No

BS2011 Part 2.1

FDC (IEC68-2-37)

Vibration resistance

parting joints/cracks or damage to con-

nectors. No leakage or critical damage.

3 cycles of 50G 11ms, 1/2 sine pulse

acceleration applied in 6 directions. 18

shocks total.

Impact shock resis-

tance

ESC protection

Accordance with EN61000-4-8

10.4.2 High Capacity–3000 mAh (Model WA3006)

10.4.2.1 Electrical Specifications

Note: The electrical specifications apply for ambient temperature TAMB of 0° to

+40°C unless otherwise stated.

Description

Interface Chipset

Rated Voltage

Specification

Maxim DS2762

3.7V

Remark

Typical

Maximum

Typical

Maximum

Rated Capacity

3000mAh

1.5A

Rated Charge Current

Charge Voltage

4.2 +/- 0.05V

2.6V

Discharge Cut-off voltage

Discharge Current

Internal Resistance

0.5C (-20°C to 60°C)

200 m

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 341

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10: Specifications

High Capacity–3000 mAh (Model WA3006)

Battery Pack Electrical Specifications

Description

Specification

Minimum

Typical

Maximum

4.375V

4.20V

Over voltage detection

voltage

4.325V

4.10V

2.5V

4.350V

4.15V

2.6V

Charge enable

Under voltage detection

voltage

2.7V

Over current detection current

Short-circuit detection current

3.5A

8.0A

5.0A

11.0A

Short-circuit detection

voltage

150mV

200mV

250mV

Over voltage delay time

Under voltage delay time

Over current delay time

Short-circuit delay time

Recovery charge current

0.8s

90ms

5ms

1.2s

110ms

20ms

240µs

2mA

100ms

10ms

200µs

1mA

160µs

0.5mA

10.4.2.2 Standard Discharge

Note: Standard charge is defined as charging with constant voltage limit of 4.2V

and constant current limit of 0.9A; the termination charge occurs when

the current drops to 45mA.

Standard discharge is defined as discharging at a constant current of

350mA until the battery protection circuit switches the battery output off in

over-discharge mode.

Acceptance Test Specifications

Description

Condition

Standard

Open circuit voltage After standard charge, measured within 24 hours.

4.15V or more

Internal resistance

After standard charge, measured within 24 hours.

200 m max.

After standard charge, measured time taken for a fast

discharge.

Capacity_1

110 minutes or more

After repeating standard charge and fast discharge,

measured the fast discharge time after 300 discharge 90 minutes or more

cycles.

Charge/Discharge

cycle

342 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10: Specifications

High Capacity–3000 mAh (Model WA3006)

Description

Condition

Standard

After standard charge, measured the time taken for a

standard discharge.

Capacity_2

500 minutes or more

110 minutes or more

100 mins or more

After standard charge, apply a standard discharge

followed by a standby discharge. Then measured

capacity after carrying out standard charge and then a

fast discharge.

Over discharge

After a standard charge, keep battery at 25°C for 30

days. Measure the time taken for a fast discharge.

Self discharge

Temperature

Perform a standard charge and fast discharge at 0°C,

25°C and 40°C and measured the time taken for a

fast discharge at 25°C.

100 mins. @ 0°C

110 mins. @ 23°C

105 mins. @ 40°C

After standard charge, carry out 5 cycles of the fol-

lowing: 65°C and 90% humidity for 8 hrs.

25°C and 65% humidity for 4 hrs.

Temp./Humidity

cycle

100 minutes or more

No damage

-20°C for 8 hrs. 25°C and 65% humidity for 4 hrs.

After standard charge, keep the battery at 60°C for 8

hrs. Carry out a fast discharge, standard charge and

then a fast discharge, measured the time taken for the

second discharge.

Dry heat

EN61000-4-8:

A. Contact Discharge:+/- 8kV for each contact pad

by 10 times.

Electro-Static Dis-

charge

B. Air Discharge:+/- 15kV for 10 times.

10.4.2.3 Environmental Test

Description

Test Reference

Test Condition/Result

Drop sample battery on all faces from

height of 1.2 meters onto concrete floor

No explosion, fire, vent, leakage and

open circuit voltage higher than 3.7V.

Drop

(mechanical)

+60°C dry for 240 hours

No explosion, fire, vent or leakage.

Storage at high temp.

Storage at low temp.

EN60068-2-2 Test

EN60068-2-1 Test

IEC68-2-3 Test

-20°C dry for 240 hours

No explosion, fire, vent or leakage.

Storage at high temp.

and humidity

+40°C at 90%RH for 240 hours.

No explosion, fire, vent or leakage.

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual 343

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10: Specifications

Maxell ML2032 Rechargeable Coin Battery

Description

Test Reference

Test Condition/Result

+60°C (2C) for 1 hr. (T1), -20°C (2C)

for 1 hr. 3 mins. maximum allows for

change between T1 and T2, 10 cycles.

No explosion, fire, vent or leakage.

Storage temp. cycling

IEC68-2-14 Test

After standard charge, tested under the

following conditions: Random vibra-

tion 5Hz-500Hz ASD 0.02g2/Hz in 3

axis for 15 mins. Followed by standard

discharge, charge, discharge. No

BS2011 Part 2.1

FDC (IEC68-2-37)

Vibration resistance

parting joints/cracks or damage to con-

nectors. No leakage or critical damage.

3 cycles of 50G 11ms, 1/2 sine pulse

acceleration applied in 6 directions. 18

shocks total.

Impact shock resis-

tance

ESC protection

Accordance with EN61000-4-8

10.4.3 Maxell ML2032 Rechargeable Coin Battery

Model

ML2032

Lithium Ion

3 V

System

Nominal Voltage (V)

Nominal Capacity (mAh*)

Nominal Discharge Current

(µA)

200

Depth of Discharge = 10%

Depth of Discharge = 20%

Temperature Ranges

Operating

1,000 (6.5 mAh discharge) (total capacity 6,500 mAh)

300 (13 mAh discharge) (total capacity 3,900 mAh)

-10° C to 60° C (14° F to 140° F)

* Nominal capacity indicates duration until the voltage drops down to 2.0V

when discharged at a nominal discharge current at 20° C (68° F).

344 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX

SUPPORT SERVICES AND WORLDWIDE OFFICES

Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its

customers worldwide. These services include technical support and product repairs.

A.1 Technical Support

For technical support in North America:

Call Toll free: +1 800 387 8898 Option 3 or

Direct Dial:

+1 905 813 9900 Ext. 1999 Option 3

For technical support in EMEA (Europe, Middle East and Africa), please contact

the local office listed in the website below:

http://www.psionteklogix.com/EMEASupport

For technical support in Asia, contact the local office listed in the website below:

http://www.psionteklogix.com

Technical Support for Mobile Computing Products is provided via email through

the Psion Teklogix customer and partner extranets. To reach the website, go to

www.psionteklogix.com, and click on the appropriate Teknet link on the home page.

Then click on the “Login” button or the “Register” button, depending on whether

you have previously registered for Teknet. Once you have logged in, search for the

“Support Request Form”.

A.2 Product Repairs

For repair service in North America:

Call Toll free: +1 800 387 8898 Option 2 or

Direct Dial:

+1 905 813 9900 Ext. 1999 Option 2

For repair service in EMEA (Europe, Middle East and Africa), please contact the

local office listed in the website below:

http://www.psionteklogix.com/EMEASupport

For repair service in Asia, contact the local office listed in the website below:

http://www.psionteklogix.com

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual A-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices

Worldwide Offices

A.3 Worldwide Offices

COMPANY HEADQUARTERS

Psion Teklogix Inc.

2100 Meadowvale Boulevard

Mississauga

Ontario

Canada L5N 7J9

Tel:

+1 905 813 9900

Fax: +1 905 812 6300

Email: [email protected]

CANADIAN SERVICE CENTRE

Psion Teklogix Inc.

7170 West Credit Ave., Unit #1

Mississauga, Ontario

Canada L5N 7J9

Tel:

+1 800 387 8898

Option 2 - or -

Direct: + 1 905 813 9900

Fax: + 1 905 812 6304

Web: www.psionteklogix.com

Ext. 1999 Option 2

NORTH AMERICAN HEADQUARTERS AND U.S. SERVICE CENTRE

Psion Teklogix Corp.

1810 Airport Exchange Boulevard

Suite 500

Erlanger, Kentucky

USA 41018

Tel:

+1 859 371 6006

Fax: +1 859 371 6422

Email: [email protected]

INTERNATIONAL SUBSIDIARIES (see also www.psionteklogix.com)

Psion Teklogix S.A.

La Duranne

135 Rue Rene Descartes

BP 421000

13591 Aix-En-Provence

Cedex 3; France

Tel:

+33 4 42 90 88 09

Fax: +33 4 42 90 88 88

E-mail: [email protected]

A-2 WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX

PORT PINOUTS

B.1 Standard Battery Contact Pin Definition

Signal

PIN #

Function

Name

P-

Power Pin for Battery Pack Negative

Maxim DS2762 Data

Ground

TH (GND)

P+

Power Pin for Battery Pack Positive

Power Switch Sensor

Plastic Rip

P-

Power Pin for Battery Pack Negative

B.2 High-Capacity Battery Contact Pin Definition

Signal

PIN #

Description

Name

P-

Power Pin for Battery Pack Negative

Maxim DS2762 Data

TH (GND) Ground

P+

Power Pin for Battery Pack Positive

Power Switch Sensor

Plastic Rip

P-

Power Pin for Battery Pack Negative

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

B-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B: Port Pinouts

Positive Female Battery Connector (2000mAh & 3000mAh)

B.2.1 Positive Female Battery Connector (2000mAh & 3000mAh)

B.3 LIF (Low Insertion Force) Port Pinout

PIN #

Signal Name

Ground

USB Host Data Plus, For connecting USB devices

USB Host Data Minus, For connecting USB Devices

USB Host Power, for powering USB devices (5V, 100mA Max)

DC Power in, for supplying power to WORKABOUT PRO / charging

battery (5V, 3A)

DC Power in, for supplying power to WORKABOUT PRO / charging

battery (5V, 3A)

LIF Detect, determines if a device is attached to the LIF

USB Device Data Minus, for operating the WORKABOUT PRO as a

USB device

USB Device Data Plus, for operating the WORKABOUT PRO as a

USB device

Ground

B-2

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B: Port Pinouts

Tether Port Pinout

B.4 Tether Port Pinout

PIN #

Signal Name

Ground

USB Host Data Plus, For connecting USB Devices

USB Host Data Minus, For connecting USB Devices

USB Host Power, for powering USB devices (5V, 100mA Max)

TX Data } TX Data and RX Data are only available on terminals with no

internal Bluetooth

RX Data }

Tether Detect, determines if a device is attached to the Tether port

DC Power In, for supplying power to WORKABOUT PRO / charging

battery (5V, 3A)

DC Power In, for supplying power to WORKABOUT PRO / charging

battery (5V, 3A)

DC Power In, for supplying power to WORKABOUT PRO / charging

battery (5V, 3A)

Not used.

Ground

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

B-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B: Port Pinouts

Audio Mini-Plug

B.5 Audio Mini-Plug

Ring 2

Terminal 1

Sleeve

Terminal 6

Ring 1

Terminal 3

Tip

Terminal 2

B-4

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I NDEX

alarms, setting 125

aligning touchscreen 37

alpha keys, accessing (WORKABOUT

PRO S) 35

Append 161

appending to bar codes

characters 150, 206

App Launch icon 101

approvals

About, Bluetooth 223

About Device icon 122

About icon (software version) 121

Accepted Start Char 182

accessories

belt loop (carrying case) 302

carrying case 302

cigarette lighter adaptor 321

desktop docking station 307

Ethernet adaptor cable 311

hand strap 299

holster, soft shell 304

pistol grip 301

port replicator 325

quad battery charger 313

quad docking station 316

single battery charger 312

swivel belt loop (carrying case) 302

tether cable & wall adaptor 319

vehicle cradle 321

WORKABOUT PRO (including

scanner) 330

ASCII

Full Ascii 181

audio indicators

beep conditions 38

volume adjustment 39

audio mini-plug, pinouts B-4

authentication (network) 89

Auto Exposure (Imager) 197

automotive adaptor 321

Aztec, 2D 203

wall adaptor & tether cable 319

Active Connections, Bluetooth 222

ActiveSync 19, 259, 310

options 261

backlight

Battery Power tab 122

External Power tab 123

in tensity 36

scheduling synchronization 261

setting up 259

ActiveSync, CD installation 17

AC wall adaptor 319

Adaptive Windowing 199

adaptor cable

Intensity tab 123

backup battery (ML2032) 16

backup profile, creating (Total Recall) 214

backup profile, restoring (Total Recall)

21 7

AC wall adaptor 319

tether 319

Bad Scan Beep 207

bar code

USB-Ethernet 311

Addendum 187, 200, 201

Addendum Add-on 2 162, 163, 164, 165,

187

Addendum Add-on 5 162, 163, 164, 165,

187

Addendum Required 162, 163, 164, 165

Addendum Separator 162, 163, 164, 165

aiming dot, duration of 142

alarm, setting 49

appending to 150, 206

Decoded 142

displaying type of bar code 206

Imager 195

Options tab 205

prefix character 148, 149

stripping characters 148, 150

suffix character 148, 150

symbologies

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Codabar 154, 166, 188, 201

Code 11 168, 190

Code 128 149, 199

Code 39 199

Code 93 153, 166, 187, 201

Discrete 2 of 5 156, 170, 1 92

EAN 13 149, 162, 184, 200

EAN 8 150, 163, 185, 200

IATA 2 of 5 169

Block Recognizer 69

Bl uetooth setup 219

About Tab 223

Active Connections 222

COM port 221

GPRS setup 223

Mode tab 219

peripherals 326

BooSt menu, accessing 20

boot (reset) 20

Interleaved 2 of 5 155, 168, 190,

Built-In Devices tab 137

Buttons icon 103

202

Matrix 2 of 5 169, 191

MSI Plessey 154, 167, 189

UPC A 150, 164, 185, 201

UPC E 151, 164, 186, 201

Translation tab 207

Barcodes Must Decode 196

batteries

calculator 262

calendar 54

categories, using 56

creating & editing entries 55

deleting appointments 57

reminders, creating 55

calibrating touchscreen 37

Captures Per HW Trigger 197

Card Slot tab 136

a description of 305

backup (ML2032) 16

Battery Details tab 136

battery hotkey 49

Battery info. tab 134

battery power, managing 134

Battery Power tab 122

battery settings 135

charging 15, 27

case, carrying 302

CD (Getting Started) 17

CDMA/1xRTT 239–251

cells

deleting 267

formatting 266

installing 25, 26

installing main battery 16

main battery 15

Center Bar Code Only (Imager) 196

certificates 124

characters

removing 25

run time 39

appending to bar codes 150

safety XVIII

prefix 148, 149

safety precautions XVIII

specifications 338

stripping 148, 150

suffix 148, 150

storing 40

swap time 27

charger

descriptions of 28

safety instructions 306–307

2000 mAh pinout B-1

3000 mAh pinouts B-1

battery charger

chargers 305

desktop docking station 307

installing at a site 305

operator controls 306

quad battery charger (WA3004) 313

single battery 312

safety instructions 306–307

battery power, managing 134

Baud 211

Baud Rate (modem setup) 228

beeper

charging (main battery) 15

Check Char 160, 166, 167, 169

Check Digit 162, 163, 164, 165

check digit 155, 168

Check Digit, One 155, 168

Check Digits (MSI Plessey) 155, 168

beep conditions 38

volume adjustment 39

belt loop, swivel (carrying case) 302

Bi-Direction Redundancy 144

blocking contacts 281

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Check Digit Verification 147, 182, 184,

189, 190, 191, 192

Check Digit Verification (Codabar) 188

Check Digit Verification (I 2 of 5) 156

cigarette lighter adaptor 321

cleaning hand-held 42

clean start 20

Click Data (scanner double-click) 206

Click Time (scanner double-cl ick) 206

clock, setting 49, 125

CLSI Editing 154

CLSI Library System 188

Codabar 154, 166, 188, 201

Codabar 154

Proxy Server setup 238

VPN, setting up 234

connections

managing 234

connectivity hotkey 48

Constant Illumination 199

contacts, blocking 281

Continuous Scan Mode 143, 159, 180,

195

Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A 151

Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A 152

Convert To Code 32 146

Convert To EAN 13 156, 185, 186

Convert To UPC -A 186

122

Codablock 175, 195

coded 142

Code 11 168, 190

cradle See also Picker cradle 321

credit card, wait for (modem setup) 228

Code 128 199

Code 128 149, 161, 183

Code 128 Emulation 158, 194

Code 16K 174

Code 32, Convert To 146

Code 32 Prefix 146

Code 39 146, 160, 181

Code 49 175

Code 93 153, 166, 187, 201

Code 93 153

Data Bits 211

Data Bits (modem setup) 229

Data Encryption, assigning 90

data entry modes

handwriting 291

typing 291

Data Matrix, 2D 175, 203

date, setting 49

Decoded (HHP) parameters 159

Decoded (internal) scanner paramete rs 142

Decoded Intermec (ISCP) parameters 180

decoded scanner 142

Decode Performance 147, 149

Decode Performance Level 148, 149

Decoder Timeout 198

columns

deleting 267

inserting 267

working with 266

communication

ActiveSync 19, 259, 310

Ethernet connection (desktop dock)

311

Ethernet connection (quad dock) 316

WORKABOUT to PC 19, 310

COM port, Bluetooth 221

COM Port Manager 126

Composite 157, 172, 202

Concatenation 167

connecting to a server with 287

connection, cancelling (modem) 229

Connections 217

Delete Char Set ECIs 145

Demo Imager 262

Demo Scanner 262, 263

desktop docking station (WA4002) 307

desktop screen (Today’s Screen) 47

Device ID tab 121

Dial-String Commands (modem setup)

229

Dial Tone, wait for (modem setup) 228

Diff Read Timeout 181

digit

check digit 155, 168

Discrete 2 of 5 156, 170, 192

Discrete 2 of 5 156, 170

editing settings 235

Internet 225

managing 235

modem setup 226

network, selecting 237

network cards, setting up 232

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

III

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

display

backlight, adjusting 36

docking station

uploading data using 40

docking stations 305

desktop docking station 307

installation at site 305

operator controls 306

quad dock 316

copying a file 60

deleting file 60

folders, creating 60

renaming file 60

files & folders, managing 59

find (search) 282

flight mode (disabling the WLAN

connection) 232

Flow Control 230

FNC1 Conversion 183

folder, copying 60

folder, creating 60

folder, deleting 60

folder, renaming 60

formulas (Excel)

Dot Time 142, 196

double-click

appending characters to a decod ed

bar code 206

scanner trigger 206

Double-Click, Manage Triggers menu

130

creating 268

Download Agent 263

Duration 142

Insert Function Command 269

manually inserting 268

Full Ascii 181

Full ASCII (decoded scanner) 147, 161

Function keys 34

EAN 13 149, 162, 184, 200

EAN 8 150, 163, 185, 200

EAN-8 Zero Extend 150

ECI Decoder 146

Games 259

email notification 51

Enable Bookland (UPC-EAN) 152

Enable CC-AB 158

Enable CC-C 158

Enable Plessy 189

Enable RSS Expanded 157, 171, 193

Enable RSS Limited 157, 171, 193

Enable RSS-14 157, 193

Enable TLC-39 158, 173

Error Reporting 127

Ethernet card See Network Card 232

EV15 Specs 334

EV15 1D imager scanner specs 334

Excel Mobile 263

expansion modules 295

External Power tab 123

Getting Started CD 17

Good Scan Beep 207

GPRS (bluetooth) 223

GPS 127

GSM/GPRS 239–251

GS1-128 183

GS1 128 (Composite bar code) 172

GS1-128 GS1 US 149

GS1-128 Identifier 183

G T IN Compliant 183, 187

hand strap 299

hardware, description of 122

Help 66

holster, soft shell 304

Factory Defaults On Reboot 197

Fast Converge (Imager) 198

features (of WORKABOUT PRO) 4

Field Size 148

IATA 2 of 5 169

IEEE 802.1x (network security) 91

Imager 195

EV15 specs 334

Field Size/Chars (bar code scanning) 148

file, renaming 60

File Explorer 59, 271

copy 60

indicators

LED functions 38

softkey bar 62

inking settings 114

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Input Methods 112

Letter Recognizer options (Input Methods

tab) 113

LIF (Low Insert Force) port pinout B-2

Linear Decode 153

L inear Security Level 143

linking hand-held to PC 19

Lithium-Ion batteries

installing 26

removing 26

Lithium-Ion safety XVIII

Lock Sequence 111

Block Recognizer 69, 113

Input Method tab 112

Keyboard Options 113

Letter Recognizer 70, 113

soft keyboard 67

Transcriber 67

Transcriber options 114

input modes

handwriting 291

typing 291

Insert Function Command 269

Intensity tab (backlight) 123

Interleaved 2 of 5 155, 168, 19 0, 202

Internet connection 225

Internet Explorer 282

browsing web sites 282

ISBN Conversion 163, 185

ISBT Concat Any Pair 184

ISBT Concatenation 162

ISBT Concat Transmit 183

ISBT 128 149, 183

Low Power Timeout 143, 160, 181

L1, Set Length 146

L2, Set Length 146

Macro keys 35

deleting a macro 106

executing a macro 106

Macros menu, accessing 105

recording and saving 105

mail server accounts (Messaging) 287

maintenance (of hand-hel d) 42

mapping

Scancode 108

Unicode 107

Matrix 2 of 5 169, 191

Max Gain (Imager) 198

Max Illumination (Imager) 198

Maximum Length 161, 162, 166, 167,

168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175,

176, 177, 178, 179

Max Integration (Imager) 198

Max Number Barcodes 196

Memory

amount available 132

Running Programs 134

Storage Card tab 133

menus

keyboard

one shot mode 104

options 113

Scancode remapping 108

Unicode Mapping 107

keyboard, soft (onscreen) 67

keyboard keys 30, 35

DEL key, accessing (BKSP) 34

Macro keys 35, 105

modifier keys, locking & unlocking 32

modifiers 31

one shot mode 104

punctuation, accessing 33

Scancode Remapping 108

shift-state indicator icon 32, 63

Unicode Mapping 107

WORKABOUT PRO C 33

WORKABOUT PRO S 33

Key Index, assigning 91

pop-up 61

using 61

messages

Scan Indicator 206

scanner warning message 206

Scan Result 206

Laser On Time 142, 159, 180

LED

Messaging 283

folders 284

functions 38

mail server accounts 287

Outlook email, synchronizing 284

Micro PDF-417 158, 174, 194, 203

Length Mode 189, 191, 192

Letter Recognizer 70

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Minimum Cancel Time 143, 160, 180

Minimum Length 161, 162, 166, 167,

168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175,

176, 177, 178, 179, 182, 184, 188, 18 9,

190, 192, 193

mini-plug, audio pinout B-4

Min Scan Duration 197

Mode, Bluetooth 219

Off & On buttons 29

On & Off button 16, 29

One Check Digit 155, 168

One Shot Mode 104

One Shot tab (modifier keys) 104

onscreen (soft) keyboard 67

Options tab (bar codes) 205

Outlook, CD installation 17

Outlook email, synchro nizing (M essag ing)

284

modem setup 226

advanced settings 228

Baud Rate 228

Cancel If Not Connected 229

Dial-String Commands 229

Server Settings 231

Output (Telepen) 17 0

Owner Information 118

ownership information, defining 51

TCP_IP Settings 230

Wait For Credit Card 228

Wait For Dial Tone 228

modifier keys 31

locking & unlocking 32

One Shot Mode 104

shift-state indicator icon 32, 63

MSI Plessey 154, 167, 189

MSN, Pocket 278

Parameter Scanning 143, 16 1, 162, 166 ,

167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174,

175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 181, 182, 183,

184, 187, 188, 189, 190, 191, 192, 193

Parity 229

Parity 212

MSN Messenger

PC, connecting WORKABOUT to 310

PC, linking to WORKABOUT 19

PDF-417 158, 173, 194, 202

Pharmaceutical 161

account, setting up 278

blocking & unblocking 281

contacts, adding 280

picker cradle

installing cable 323

Pictures

name, assigning to WORKABOUT PRO

121

deleting 277

navigation bar 48

Battery hotkey 49

connectivity hotkey 48

Start button 48

volume control 49

network, selecting 237

network card

editing 277

opening 277

slide show, creating 278

Pictures and Videos 276

pinouts B-1

pistol grip 301

Plessey Maximum Length 168

Plessey Minimum Length 168

Plessy Transmit Check Digit 189

Pocket Excel

settings, changing 234

setting up 232

Network Key, assigning 90

New menu, customizing 58

Note

cells, working with 266

columns, inserting 267

columns, working with 266

deleting cells, rows & columns 267

formulas, creating 268

rows, inserting 267

creating 272

recording a message (audio) 274

renaming 274

synchronizing 276

text, converting handwriting into 272

Notes 271

Notification, setting 119

NOTIS Editing 154

rows, working with 266

workbook components 264

worksheets, working with 264

Pocket MSN (Messenger) 278

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Pocket Word 289

port pinouts B-1

port replicator 325

Port Replicator Port A 211

Port Replicator Port B 212, 213

Ports

quad battery charger 313

quad dock (WA4004) 316

radio

Baud 211

configuring

Data Bits 211

authentication 89

Data Encryption, assigning 90

Key Index, assigning 91

network authentication 89

Network Key, assigning 90

802.1x 91

Parity 212

ports

Data Bits 229

Flow Control (modem setup) 230

LIF (Low Insertion Force) B-2

Parity (modem setup) 229

Stop Bits (modem setup) 230

Terminal (modem setup) 230

tether B-3

radio specifications 331

Raster Expand Rate (2D) 144

Raster Height (2D) 144

Reading Range 182, 184, 187, 191

reboot (reset) 20

Regional Settings 139

remapping

PosiCode 172

Postal

Australian 178

Canadian 178

China 178

Scancode 108

Unicode 107

Japanese 178

Kix 179

Remove Programs 140

reset 20

resetting the WORKABOUT

BooSt menu 20

Korean 179

PlaNET 177, 204

PostNET 177, 204

Royal 179, 205

clean start 20

reset 20

Power 134

Advanced battery settings 135

Battery Details tab 136

Battery tab 134

rows

deleting 267

inserting 267

Built-In Devices 137

Card Slot tab 136

On Battery Power 135

On External Power 135

Suspend Threshold 137

Wakeup Keys 139

powering up 16

working with 266

RSS Code 157, 171, 193, 202

Running Programs

activating 134

stopping (programs) 134

Prefix 145

safety instructions

battery charger 306–307

Same Read Timeout 181

Same Read Validate 181

Scancode remapping 108

Scan Data Format 145

Scan Indicator 206

Scan Log File 207

scanner module (SE 955)

specs 332

Prefix Char 148, 149

profile, creating backup 214

profile, restoring backup 217

Programs 64, 259

closing 64

minimizing 64

opening 64

properties, WORKABOUT PRO 122

protective case 302

proxy server, setting up 238

scanning

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

VII

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

aiming (target) dot duration 142

appending characters 150, 206

Bad Scan Beep 207

bar code settings 141

check digit 155, 168

Check Digits (MSI Plessey) 155, 168

Check Digit Verification 147

Check Digit Verification (I 2 of 5) 156

Click Data (appending data) 206

Click Time 206

CLSI Editing 154

Codabar 154

Code 128 149, 161, 183

Code 128 Emulation 158

Code 32 Prefix 146

Code 39 146, 160, 181

Code 93 153

Composite 157

Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A 151

Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A 152

Convert To Code 32 146

Convert To EAN 13 156

Decoded (HHP) 159

Decoded (internal) 142

Decoded Intermec (ISCP) 180

Decode Perf. Level 148, 149

Decode Performance 147, 149

Delete Char Set ECIs 145

Discrete 2 of 5 156

Dot Time 142

double-click 206

EAN-8 Zero Extend 150

ECI Decoder 146

Enable Bookland 152

Enable CC-AB 158

Enable CC-C 158

Enable RSS Expanded 157

Enable RSS Limited 157

Enable RSS-14 157

Enable TLC-39 158, 173

Full ASCII 147, 161

Good Scan Beep 207

Imager 195

Laser On Time 142, 159, 180

Linear Decode 153

Micro PDF-417 158

NOTIS Editing 154

Options tab 205

PDF-417 158

Postal

Royal 205

Prefix 145

prefix character 148, 149

removing characters 148, 150

RSS Code 157

Scan Data Format 145

Scan Indicator 206

Scan Log File 207

Scan Result 206

Scan Result Time 206

Security Level 153

Set Length L1 146

Set Length L2 146

specifications 332

specifications, imager 335

Suffix 145

suffix character 148, 150

Supp. Redundancy 152

Supplementals 152

target (aiming) dot duration 142

Translations tab 207

Transmit Check Digit 147

T r ansmit Check Digit (I 2 of 5) 156

Transmit Check Digit (MSI Plessey)

155

Transmit Code 1D Char 145

T r ioptic Code 39 161

T r ioptic Code 39, Enable 146

UPC-A Check Digit 150

UPC-A Preamble 151

UPC-EAN 152

UPC-EAN Shared Settings 165, 186

UPC-E Check Digit 151

UPC-E Preamble 151

UPC-E1 Check Digit 151

UPC-E1 Preamble 151

2D Maxicode 203

2D QR Code 203

2D UP C Half Block Stitching 153

Scanning Mode (2D) 144

Scan Result 206

Scan Result Time 206

screen

navigating 47

stylus 47

touch pen 47

scrolling, adjusting speed (Up_Down tab)

103

SCU (Summit Client Utility) 73

Config Tab 78

PlaNET 204

PostNET 204

configuring 74

Diags (Diagnostics) Tab 85

VIII WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

EAP Credentials 82

EAP Types 80, 81

customising 58

customizing 118

Global Settings Tab 83

IP, assigning 73

Stop Bits 230

Storage Card tab 133

Strip Leading 148, 150

Strip Start/Stop Chars 160

Strip Trailing 148, 150

stylus (touch pen), using 47

Suffix 145

Main Tab 74, 77

security 80

Status Tab 85

ThirdPartyConfig 82

Windows Zero Config (WZC) 82

WLAN, connecting to 73

SD/MMC Card, inserting 41

Search (find) 282

Suffix Char 148, 150

Summit Client Utility (SCU) 73

Supp. Redundancy (Code 128) 152

Supplementals (UPC-EAN) 152

Suspend Threshold tab 137

swap time (for battery) 27

swivel belt loop (carrying case) 302

Security Level 153

Server Settings (modem setup) 231

Set Length L1 146

Set Length L2 146

Settings 65, 101

App Launch 101

Buttons 103

target dot, duration of 142

task

Personal Tab 101

App Launch icon 101

Buttons icon 103

completed (marking as) 53

creating 52

One Shot tab 104

Up_Down tab 103

deleting 53

editing 52

SE 955 scanner specs 332

shift-state indicator (softkey bar) 63

shift-state indicator, accessing 63

shift-state indicator icon 32

shutting down programs 134

single battery charger (WA3001) 312

Sled See vehicle cradle. 321

softkey (softkey bar) 62

softkey bar

notification 52

sorting 53

TCP_IP Settings (modem setup) 230

T e lepen 170, 193

Terminal 230

Terminal Services Client 287

287

moving around 288

session, disconnecting (without

ending) 289

shift-state indicator 63

softkey 62

soft keyboard icon 63

softkeys 62

session, ending 289

tether cable 319

tether port pinout B-3

Text

soft keyboard (onscreen) 67

soft keyboard icon (softkey bar) 63

softkeys (softkey bar) 62

Soft Scan Timeout 207

Sound, setting events 119

Sound settings 119

Block Recognizer 69

entering 66

Letter Recognizer 70

soft keyboard entry 67

transcriber, using 67

title bar (navigation bar) 48

TLC-39 173

Today’s Screen (desktop screen) 47

appearance of 120

Items (to appear in screen) 120

Total Recall 213

backup profile, creating 214

specifications

for WORKABOUT PRO 329

SE 955 scanner 332

802.11g 331

Start/Stop Transmit 166, 182, 188

Start button 48

Start Menu 57

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

backup profile, restoring 217

touch pen, using 47

touchscreen

Videos and Pictures 276

volume control 49

VPN connection, setting up 234

calibrating 37

stylus, using 47

touch pen, using 47

Wakeup Keys tab 139

wall adaptor 319

touchscreen, aligning (cal ib rating) 37

Transcriber

warnings 206

Inking 114

quick settings 114

Transcriber (Input Methods tab) 114

Transcriber, using 67

Translations parameters (bar codes) 207

Transmit Check Digit 182, 185, 186,

188, 189, 190, 191, 192

Transmit Check Digit (I 2 of 5) 156

Transmit Check Digit (MSI Plessey) 155

Transmit Code 1D Char 145

Transmit Number System 164, 165, 185,

186

trigger mappings 129

Trigger Press Type, Manage T riggers

menu 132

Trioptic Code 39 161

Trioptic Code 39, Enable 146

Window Height 196

Win dows Mobile 5.0, navigating in 47

Windows Zero Config (WZC) 82, 86

Window Width 196

Wireless WAN 239–251

WLAN connections, disabling 232

Word Completion tab 116

Word Mobile

data entry modes 291

document, creating 290

Word See Pocket Word 289

WORKABOUT PRO

approvals 330

specifications 329

worldwide offices A-2

W P A a uthentication 89

W P A -PSK authentication 89

WZC (Windows Zero Config) 82, 86

Unicode Mapping 107

Up_Down tab (scrolling adjustments) 103

UPC A 150, 164, 185, 201

UPC-A Check Digit 150

UPC-A Preamble 151

UPC E 151, 164, 186, 201

UPC-EAN 152

2D Aztec 177

2DAztec 203

2D Data Matrix 175, 203

2D Maxicode 176, 203

2D QR Code 176, 203

2D Raster Expand Rate 144

2D UPC Half Block Stitching 153

802.1x (network security) 91

UPC-EAN Shared Settings 165, 186

UPC-E Check Digit 151

UPC-E Preamble 151

UPC-E1 Check Digit 151

UPC-E1 Preamble 151

UPC Half Block Stitching, 2D 153

USB-Ethernet adaptor cable (W A 4010)

311

vehicle adaptor 321

vehicle cradle 321

powered 10-55 VDC 321

powered 12 VDC 321

unpowered 321

Version tab 121

WORKABOUT PRO Hand-Held Computer With Windows Mobile 5.0 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Peg Perego Stroller Pliko P3 User Manual
Pelco Dust Collector C1501M User Manual
Philips Baby Accessories SCF666 27 User Manual
Philips Headphones MD110 User Manual
Philips Home Theater System MCD300 User Manual
Philips Home Theater System NTRX500 User Manual
Philips Stereo Amplifier 5534A User Manual
Philips Stereo System SWA3104W User Manual
Planet Technology Network Card WL U357v2 User Manual
Planet Technology Network Router IAD 300 User Manual